2016 Mitsubishi Outlander 63411 PDF

BK0223400US.
book 1
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
BK0223400US.book 1
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202658
Combination headlights and dimmer Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Multi information display
switch P.5-177 (if so equipped) P.5-68, 5-76
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch (if so equipped)
Turn signal lever P.5-183
switch P.5-95 P.5-129
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-184 Supplemental restraint system
Headlight leveling switch
(SRS) - airbag (for drivers
(if so equipped) P.5-182 Drivers vents
seat) P.4-33, 4-40
P.7-2
Horn switch P.5-191
Instrument cluster
P.5-126
Drivers vents
P.7-2
Forward collision mitigation

system (FCM) ON/OFF
switch (if so equipped)
P.5-114 Engine switch (if so
equipped) P.5-18
Lane departure warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) P.5-117
Fuse box P.9-25 Windshield wiper and washer
Drivers side power liftgate switch (if so equipped) P.5-40 switch P.5-185
Rear window wiper and
Steering wheel audio remote control switches P.7-27
washer switch P.5-189
[For DISPLAY AUDIO and MMCS, refer to the separate
owners manuals.]
Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped) Cruise control switch P.5-96 Ignition switch (if so equipped)
P.5-192 P.5-60
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - front knee airbag
lever P.5-54 (for drivers seat) P.4-40
1-1 Overview
BK0223400US.book 2
Instruments and controls
Hazard warning flasher switch 1

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-15 P.5-184
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (MMCS) (if so equipped) Passengers airbag off indicator P.4-38
[For DISPLAY AUDIO and MMCS, refer to the separate owners manuals.]
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - air bag

(for front passengers seat)
Front passenger seat belt warning light
P.4-33, 4-40
P.4-22
Air conditioner P.7-5 Passengers vents

P.7-2
Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-190
Wiper deicer switch (if so equipped) P.5-190
Glove compartment P.5-229
Hood release lever
Card holder P.5-229
P.9-3
Fuel tank filler door release lever Key slot (if so equipped)
P.3-3 P.5-26
Floor console box P.5-229 Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped)
Arm rest P.5-39
12 V power outlet P.5-219 12 V power outlet P.5-219
USB input terminal
Cup holder P.5-232
Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
P.4-8
Drive mode-selector (if so equipped) P.5-79 Parking brake lever P.5-53
S-AWC drive mode-selector (if so equipped) P.5-83 Selector lever P.5-64, 5-72
Overview 1-2
BK0223400US.book 3
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302372
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirrors switch P.5-58

Sun visors P.5-218
Vanity mirror P.5-218 Lock switch P.5-50
Card holder P.5-218
Power door lock
switch P.5-35
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-23 Power window switch

Seat belts P.4-17 P.5-49
Dome light (rear) P.5-226
Inside rearview mirror P.5-55

Cargo room light HomeLink Wireless Control System (if so
P.5-227, 9-32 equipped) P.5-220
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

Third row seat (7 persons) P.5-231
P.4-10
Front seat P.4-4
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

(for front seats) P.4-44
Second row seat P.4-8
1-3 Overview
BK0223400US.book 4
Interior
Dome light (front)/Reading Downlight 1

lights P.5-226, 5-226 P.5-177
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain

Bottle holder P.5-233
airbags P.4-45 Sunroof switch
Hands-free microphone (if so equipped) P.5-51
Assist grips P.5-235

Coat hook P.5-235
Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

P.5-233
Head restraints P.4-10
Arm rest P.4-9

Cup holder P.5-232
Overview 1-4
BK0223400US.book 5
Luggage area
1 Luggage area
N00100501511
Jack P. 8-5
Tools P.8-5
Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-29
Luggage hooks P.5-236
Luggage floor box P.5-230
1-5 Overview
BK0223400US.book 6
Outside (Front)
Outside (Front) 1
N00100602564
Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-51

Power window P.5-49
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Windshield wipers P.5-185
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-57

Engine hood P.9-3 Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-183, 9-30, 9-35
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-184, 9-30, 9-35
Halogen headlights type LED headlights type
Headlights, high beam Headlights, low beam Headlights, high beam Headlights, low beam
P.5-177, 9-30, 9-33 P.5-177, 9-30, 9-32 P.5-177, 9-30, 9-33 P.5-177, 9-30, 9-33
Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights

P.5-177, 9-30, 9-33 P.5-177, 9-30, 9-33
Parking lights P.5-177, 9-30, 9-34 Parking lights P.5-177, 9-30, 9-34
Front turn signal lights Front turn-signal lights
Daytime running lights (if so equipped) Daytime running lights (if so equipped)
P.5-183, 9-30, 9-34 P.5-183, 9-30, 9-34
P.5-177, 9-30, 9-34 P.5-177, 9-30, 9-34
Overview 1-6
BK0223400US.book 7
Outside (Rear)
1 Outside (Rear)
N00100602577
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7, 5-29

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
Antenna P.7-51 P.5-12
Locking and unlocking P.5-33
Tail lights P.5-177, 9-30, 9-35 Tire P.9-15

Tire pressure monitoring system
High-mounted stop light P.9-30 P.5-119
Tire inflation pressures P.9-18
Liftgate (if so equipped) P.5-36
Power liftgate (if so equipped) Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-20
P.5-38
Tire chains P.9-21
Size of tires and wheels P.11-7
Rear window wiper
P.5-189
Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

P.5-124
License plate lights
P.5-177, 9-30, 9-37 Rear side-marker lights P.5-177, 9-30
Stop lights P.5-177, 9-30, 9-35
Rear turn signal lights P.5-183, 9-30, 9-35
Back-up lights P.9-30, 9-36

Spare tire P.8-7
1-7 Overview
BK0223400US.book 1
If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

2
N00200702234
NOTE
For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display (Color liquid crystal display type), refer to Multi-information display on
page 5-128.
These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-174
tance.
Charging system warning light
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-174
Oil pressure warning light at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
(Vehicles equipped with mono-color as possible.
liquid crystal display)
If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-173
If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Quick index 2-1

BK0223400US.book 2

2
Park your vehicle in a safe place.
Selector lever position indicator in the Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing. P. 5-66,
instrument cluster flashes rapidly If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubi- 5-74
(once per second) shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
(Vehicles equipped with mono-color
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-173
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON or towing company for assistance.
Check engine light)
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-93
Electric power steering system (EPS) dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
warning light
2-2 Quick index

BK0223400US.book 3

When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning. 2
Test the system as described on page 5-92. P. 5-92
If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-39
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
Selector lever position indicator in the Have the automatic transaxle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or P. 5-66,
instrument cluster flashes slowly a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. 5-74
(once every 2 seconds)
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
and by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-96
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and
normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.
Quick index 2-3

BK0223400US.book 4

2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-90
as possible.
ASC indicator When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
P. 5-119
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
ing light ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If the warning light comes on, there may be a malfunction in the LED headlight
unit.
P. 5-180
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
LED headlight warning light
2-4 Quick index

BK0223400US.book 5
If this problem occurs...

2
N00200901936
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key. Will not turn from LOCK to ACC. (Vehicles with steering lock system)
P. 5-62
(except for vehicles equipped Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from ACC to OFF or LOCK.

Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the P (PARK) position. P. 5-61
On vehicles with steering lock system, push the key in at the ACC position and keep it
depressed until it is turned to the LOCK position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
Make sure the selector lever is in the P (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch P. 5-24
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

ate. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the instrument panel, and then start the engine or P. 5-26,
(for vehicles equipped with the change the operation mode. Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the drivers door. 5-26
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-5

BK0223400US.book 6

Cannot shift the selector lever Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
2 from the P (PARK) position. Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
P. 5-64
The windows are fogged up.
Push the defogger switch to change to the position. P. 7-9
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-13
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-6 Quick index

BK0223400US.book 7

The information screen in the
multi information display will 2
be interrupted and the engine
coolant temperature warning
display will appear. Also
will blink. (Type 1: Color liquid
crystal display type)
The high coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
(Type 2: Mono-color liquid
Type 1
The engine is overheated.
and P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Type 2
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
Quick index 2-7

BK0223400US.book 8

1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
2 wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in position (Electronically controlled 4WD), SNOW or LOCK position (S-AWC) and
P. 8-15
sand, mud or snow then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving.
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle out of the stuck posi-
tion.
WARNING
When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
P. 5-87,
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
6-5
or stream.
The automatic transaxle makes
no gear change when accelerat-
ing. The initial movement of the There may be a problem in the automatic transaxle.
vehicle is slow when the vehicle Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-70
starts moving. your choice.
(for vehicles with automatic
transaxle)
2-8 Quick index

BK0223400US.book 9

The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift There may be a problem in the CVT.
2
change when accelerating. The
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display (Color liquid crystal display P. 5-77
is slow when the vehicle starts type) will not turn off, or if they come on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your
moving. nearest Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Quick index 2-9

BK0223400US.book 10
BK0223400US.book 1
General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
BK0223400US.book 2
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and the oxygenates may not be identified by those
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent names. Oxygenates are required in some
N00301001922
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and areas of the country. Oxygenated fuel can be
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- used in your vehicle.
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly.
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-
Ethanol (Gasohol)
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement
A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
WARNING 2.4 liter engine model in your vehicle, provided the octane number
Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
is at least as high as that recommended for
sive. You could be burned, seriously
Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline.
injured or killed when handling it. When-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
engine and keep flames, sparks, and number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON. Methanol
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-
3.0 liter engine model Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
door areas.
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
Unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane type of alcohol could adversely affect the
CAUTION number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON vehicles performance and damage critical
Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will may be used, though it is recommended your parts of the vehicles fuel system.
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and vehicle be operated on premium grade
unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Reformulated gasoline
line is illegal, and will void your warranty number of 91 [(MON+RON)/2], or 95 RON.
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, To obtain maximum performance, premium
and oxygen sensors. gasoline is recommended. Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning fuel referred to as Reformu-
lated Gasoline.
Oxygenated gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Gasoline detergent additives
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
Gasoline sold at some service stations con- emissions and improve air quality.
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
BK0223400US.book 3
Filling the fuel tank

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup- cator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop- Check engine light) to come on. Illumina-
NOTE
Repeatedly driving short distances at low
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi-
system and engine, resulting in hard starting
durability of the engine and the fuel system. cles emission-control system is malfunction- and poor acceleration. If these problems 3
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors occur, you are advised to add a detergent
dealer may suggest using a different, lower-
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
manganese tricarbonyl) mine if the problem is fuel-related. its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
NOTE unsuitable additive could make an engine
additive that is blended into some gasolines Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems malfunction. For details, please contact the
to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi such as hard starting, stalling during idling, nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Motors Corporation recommends using gaso- abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
lines without MMT. tion. If you experience any of these prob-
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. Filling the fuel tank
adversely affect performance, and cause the If the engine malfunction indicator (SER- N00301101965
malfunction indicator on your instrument VICE ENGINE SOON or Check engine
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an light) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as WARNING
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a soon as possible by the nearest authorized When handling fuel, comply with the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility safety regulations displayed by garages
of your choice. and filling stations.
Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
Sulfur in gasoline sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- refueling your vehicle, always turn the
isfy Californias low-emission regulations engine off and keep away from flames,
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. sparks, and smoking materials. Always
handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other
areas.
than California is allowed to have a higher
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could
adversely affect the vehicles catalytic con-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
General information 3-3
BK0223400US.book 4
Filling the fuel tank
WARNING Refueling
Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
be sure to get rid of your bodys static 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
electricity by touching a metal part of the 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
3 car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on driver side of your vehicle.
your body could create a spark that The fuel tank filler door can be opened
ignites fuel vapor. from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
Perform the whole refueling process filler door release lever located at the left
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- side of the drivers seat.
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not
let any other person near the fuel tank
filler. If you allowed a person to help you 1- Remove
and that person was carrying static elec- 2- Close
tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
until refueling is finished. If you moved WARNING
away and did something else (for example, Since the fuel system may be under pres-
sitting on a seat) part-way through the sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
refueling process, you could pick up a slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
fresh charge of static electricity. uum that might have built up in the fuel
Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
contains toxic substances. hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
Keep the doors and windows closed while stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
turning the fuel tank filler cap counter- fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
fuel vapor could get into the cabin. clockwise.
Fuel tank capacity NOTE

While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on
the hook (A) located on the inside surface of
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L) the fuel tank filler door.
Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)

BK0223400US.book 5
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

6. To re-install, turn the fuel tank filler pipe
cap slowly clockwise until you hear click- Modifications to and racing
ing sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle
filler door closed. N00301600152
This vehicle should not be modified with 3

WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit-
Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is subishi Motors designs and manufactures
securely closed. If the fuel cap were loose, high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
4. Fueling correctly depends mainly on cor- CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
rect handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations.
not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the use only the cap specified for your model
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
fuel tank filler port as far as it goes.
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
CAUTION NOTE TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
Your vehicle can only be operated using VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED UNDER
If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata- WARRANTY.
driving, the engine malfunction indicator
lytic converter damage will result if leaded (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Check
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light) may come on when the
consequently, this must never be attempted. that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
a self check. lems include the following:
5. When the nozzle stops automatically, do Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear at least 3 clicks.
Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
not add more fuel.
The indicator will go off after several driving parts
cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con- Failure to use required fuel and fluids
CAUTION Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
top-off the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicles paint-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it or electrical wiring systems
off with a soft cloth.

BK0223400US.book 6
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

Modification of any onboard com- Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts affects the driving safety of your
puter/control module, including repro- the vehicle without an external antenna Mitsubishi-vehicle.
gramming, or replacing/adding chips to may cause electrical system interference,
any onboard computer/control module which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
Modification/alterations to the
3 tion.
electrical or fuel systems
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man- Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-
ual for further details regarding warranty cov- ifications must not be used. N00301800141
erage. Refer to the Specifications section for Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
information regarding wheel and tire vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
Installation of accessories sizes. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
N00301701219
Motors dealer before installation of any
accessory which may involve modification of
WARNING
CAUTION While driving, do not use a cellular phone
the electrical or fuel systems.
Before any electrical or electronic accesso- in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
ries are installed, consult an authorized Mit- thing, including cellular phone usage, that CAUTION
subishi Motors dealer. distracts you from the safe operation of Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
The installation of accessories, optional dent. sory fitment or modification.
parts, etc., should only be performed Refer to and follow all state and local laws If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
in your area regarding cellular phone improper installation methods are used (pro-
within the limits prescribed by law, and in
usage while driving. tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
accordance with the guidelines and warn-
devices may be adversely affected, resulting
ings contained within the documents
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
accompanying this vehicle.
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
Important point!
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
Improper installation of electrical parts Due to the large number of accessory and Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
could cause a fire. Refer to the Modifica- replacement parts provided by different man- parts
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- N00301400219
systems section within this owners man- sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
ual. dealer to check whether the attachment or
designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
BK0223400US.book 7
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
authorized accessories to choose from to tai- 3
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealers
Parts Manager has information on various
audio systems, protection items, as well as
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

BK0223400US.book 8
BK0223400US.book 1
Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seat arrangement .............................................................................4-3
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-4
Front seats ........................................................................................4-4
Second row seats ..............................................................................4-8
Third row seat (Seating 7 passengers) ...........................................4-10
Head restraints ...............................................................................4-10
Making a cargo area .......................................................................4-12
Making a flat seat ...........................................................................4-16
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-17
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-24
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-24
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-26
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-33
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-33
BK0223400US.book 2
Seats
Seats
N00408401519
To adjust the seatback Page 4-8

1 - Front seat Arm rest Page 4-9
To adjust the seat forward or back- Accessing the third row seat (Seating 7
wardPage 4-5 passengers) Page 4-9
To adjust the seat height (Drivers seat 3 - Third row seat (Seating 7
only) Page 4-6 passengers)
Heated seat (if so equipped) Page 4-8
2 - Second row seats
To adjust the seat forward or backward
(vehicles with second row seat slide func-
tion) Page 4-8
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

BK0223400US.book 3
Seat arrangement
Seat arrangement
N00401701122
You may arrange your seats in the following positions.
Seating 5 passengers Seating 7 passengers

4
Ordinary use
Flat seatPage 4-16
Folding the second row

seats
Page 4-13
Making a cargo
area
Folding the third row

seatsPage 4-15
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

BK0223400US.book 4
Seats and restraint systems
Seats and restraint systems Front seats WARNING

N00401601219 N00401801426 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death during deployment of the
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety Position the drivers seat as far back as possi-
drivers airbag, always properly wear the
features that help protect you and your pas- ble while maintaining a position that still seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far
sengers in an accident. enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily back as possible while maintaining a posi-
4 Seat belts are the most important safety control the steering wheel and safely operate tion that still enables you to fully apply the
device. When worn properly, seat belts can the vehicle. pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
reduce the chance of serious injury or death and safely operate the vehicle.
in various types of crashes. For added protec- To reduce the risk to the front passenger
Manual seat adjustment Power seat adjustment
tion during a severe frontal collision, your of serious injury or death during deploy-
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System ment of the passengers airbag, always
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door front passengers seat as far back as possi-
ble.
locks also are safety equipment, which must
Always place children 12 years old and
be used correctly.
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
Always check the following before you drive:
That everyone in your vehicle is properly

wearing their seat belt. CAUTION
That infants and small children are prop- WARNING Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
erly secured in an appropriate child Do not attempt to adjust the seat while adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
restraint system in the rear seat. driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
That all doors are fully closed and locked. trol and result in an accident. Do not place a cushion or the like between
After adjusting the seat, make sure that it your back and the seatback while driving.
That seatbacks are upright, with head
is securely locked into position. The effectiveness of the head restraints will
restraints properly adjusted. be reduced in the event of an accident.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or catch your hand or leg.
death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or pay careful attention to the second row seat
death, by following the instructions in this passengers.
manual.

BK0223400US.book 5
Front seats
CAUTION To adjust the seat forward or Power seat adjustment

When adjusting the front seat while the sec- backward
ond row seat is folded, be careful not to N00401901326 Operate the switch forward or backward to
apply strong force to the flipped second row move the seat to the desired position. Release
seat cushion. the switch to lock the seat in place.
Doing so could cause damage to the cover of Manual seat adjustment
the front seat and the fitting of the second 4
row seat cushion. Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
seat in place.
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)

2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
cle)
NOTE
To prevent the battery from completely dis-
WARNING charging, operate the power seat with the
To make sure that the seat is securely engine running.
locked, try to move it forward or back-
ward without using the adjusting lever.

BK0223400US.book 6
Front seats
To adjust the seatbacks Power seat adjustment WARNING

N00402001379 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
Operate the switch in the direction of the death in the event of an accident or sud-
Manual seat adjustment arrows to adjust the seatback. den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, Seat belt performance during an accident
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
lean backward to a comfortable position and are reclined. The more a seatback is
release the lever. The seatback will lock in reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
place. mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
1- Move forward
2- Move backward
To adjust the seat height
(Drivers seat only)
N00402101253
NOTE
To prevent the battery from completely dis- Manual seat adjustment
charging, operate the power seat with the
engine running.
CAUTION Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
The reclining mechanism used in the seat- the seat.
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

BK0223400US.book 7
Front seats
1- Raise 1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat 3- Raise or lower the entire seat
2- Lower
Power seat adjustment
Operate the switch in the direction of the

arrows to raise or lower the seat.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from completely dis-
charging, operate the power seat with the
engine running.
2- Raise or lower the back end of the seat

BK0223400US.book 8
Second row seats

to an appropriate height where they lock in
Heated seat (if so equipped) CAUTION position. Refer to Head restraints on page
N00435601391 Switch off the heated seats when not in use.
4-10.
The heated seats can be operated by pushing Operate the heaters at the HI position for
the switch when the ignition switch or the quick heating. After the seat has become
operation mode is in ON. The indicator light warm, set the heater switch to the LO posi- To adjust the seat forward or
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
4 (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
seat temperature may be felt while using the
backward (vehicles with sec-
heated seats. This is caused by the operation ond row seat slide function)
of the heaters internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
into the seat.
seat in place.
Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating) solvents; doing so can cause damage not
2 - Heater off only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm) heater.
If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
WARNING attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
Persons who are unable to feel tempera- off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- tioning during use.
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, NOTE
fatigue or other physical conditions or You can adjust the seat forward or backward
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
when using the heated seat even at low
Second row seats on either side separately.
N00402501231
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care When sitting in the middle seating position of
when using the heated seat. the second row seat, adjust the head restraints

BK0223400US.book 9
Second row seats
WARNING NOTE Arm rest

To make sure that the seat is securely You can adjust the seatback forward or back- N00403001318
locked, try to move it forward or backward on either side separately. To use the armrest, tilt the arm rest down for
ward without using the adjusting lever. use as shown.
The arm rest includes a cup holder.
WARNING 4
CAUTION To reduce the risk of serious injury or
When sliding (vehicles with second row seat death in the event of an accident or sud-
slide function) or reclining the seat rearward, den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
pay careful attention to the third row seat the upright position while the vehicle is in
passengers. motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
To adjust the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback by seat belt is not properly positioned against
hand to the desired position, and release the the body during an accident, there is
lever. The seatback will lock in place. increased risk you will slide under the belt
NOTE
When a person is sitting in the middle Never sit on an arm rest.
seating position of the second row seats, Doing so could damage the arm rest.
the two sides of the second seats must have
the same forward/backward position
(vehicles with second row seat slide func- Accessing the third row seat
tion) and the same seatback angle.
(Walk-in function, Seating 7
passengers)
N00400101031
For third row seat passenger entry or exit, the

second row seats can be moved forward.
Pull up the lever (A) and tilt the seatback for-
ward. Then slide the entire seat forward.

BK0223400US.book 10
Third row seat (Seating 7 passengers)

To return the seat, slide the entire seat back-
ward to the desired position and then raise the Third row seat (Seating 7 Head restraints
seatback until it locks securely. passengers) N00404301594
After returning the seat, gently try to move it N00419501073 Head restraints can reduce the risk of a whip-
forward and backward to check that it is lash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear.
securely retained and adjust the seatback to WARNING The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
4 the normal seating position. The third row seats are intended for use trated position.
by no more than two belted occupants, To maximize the effectiveness of the head
each of which does not exceed 160 cm (63 restraints, adjust the seatback to the upright
inches) in height. position, and the head restraint to the proper
Exceeding these limitations can result in
position. Sit back against the seatback with
an increased risk of personal injury or
your head close to the head restraint.
death in the event of an accident.
To adjust the seatback
Pull up the strap and adjust the seatback by

hand to the desired position, and release the
strap.
WARNING
To make sure that the seat is securely
locked, try to move it forward or back-
ward without using the lever. To reduce
the risk of serious injury or death in the *: Seating 7 passengers
event of an accident or sudden stop, all
seatbacks should be kept in the upright
position while the vehicle is in motion.

BK0223400US.book 11
Head restraints
WARNING WARNING Adjustment of the head

Driving without the head restraints in When a person sits in the second center restraint height (front seats)
place can cause you and your passengers seating position, pull up the head restraint
serious injury or death in an accident. To to a height at which it locks in position. Be
reduce the risk of injury in an accident, sure to make this adjustment before start- To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are ing to drive. Serious injuries could other- adjust the head restraint height so that the
installed and properly positioned when wise be suffered in the result of an impact. center of the restraint is at your ear level 4
the seat is occupied. when seated. Any person too tall for the
In order to minimize the risk of a neck restraint to reach their ear level when seated
injury due to a rear impact, the seatback should raise the restraint to the highest locked
must be adjusted to the upright position position.
and the head restraint must be adjusted to
the proper position before vehicle opera- To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
tion. The driver should never adjust the To lower the restraint, push down on it
seat while the vehicle is in motion. while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
Never place a cushion or similar device on direction shown by the arrow.
the seatback. This can adversely affect
After adjusting the height, push down on
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the NOTE the restraint to make sure it is locked in
restraint. position.
The head restraint height in the second row
outboard seats and the third row seats cannot
be adjusted.

BK0223400US.book 12
Making a cargo area

pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
To remove locks into place.
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head CAUTION
restraint up and out of the seatback. Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
4 as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
Making a cargo area

N00405501115
WARNING
Never adjust the seats to make a cargo
WARNING area when the vehicle is in motion or on a
slope. The seats could move more than
To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
necessary or move suddenly and causing a
the event of an accident, the head
serious accident and/or injury.
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle CAUTION When returning a seat back to its seating
The shape and size of the head restraint dif- position after folding down, make sure
operation.
fers according to the seat. Always use the that the seat is firmly secured and seat belt
correct head restraint provided for the seat buckles are in proper position. If the seat
and do not install the head restraint in the is not secured, it could move causing a
To install wrong direction. serious accident.
Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo
First check that the head restraint is facing in area while the vehicle is in motion. People
the right direction as shown in the previous who are not properly seated and
restrained can be seriously injured or
illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
killed in an accident.
back. Push the head restraint down while

BK0223400US.book 13
Making a cargo area

4. On vehicles with the second row seat slide
WARNING NOTE function, move the second row seat fully
When driving the vehicle, do not allow You can separately fold the right and left side
backward.
anyone to sit on the third row seat if the of the second row seat.
Refer to To adjust the seat forward or
second row seat is in the folded position.
backward on page 4-8.
CAUTION
To fold the second row seat NOTE 4
In the cargo area, do not load the luggage 1. When folding the left side second row If you do not move the second row seat fully
backward, you may not be able to fold the
higher than the top of the seats and make seat, store the seat belt for the middle
sure that the luggage is firmly secured. second row seat.
seating position of the second row seat.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter- Refer to Detachable center seat belt for
ing the passenger compartment during sud- second row on page 4-20. 5. Pull the strap (B), then flip the seat cush-
den braking could result in a serious accident ion forward.
2. Lower the head restraint for second row
and/or injury.
middle seating position to its lowest posi-
Seats should always be operated by an adult.
Seat adjustments by a child could lead to an
tion.
unexpected accident. Refer to Head restraints on page 4-10.
When adjusting the seats, be careful not to 3. Pull the strap (A), then fold forward the
catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could head restraints for second row outside
result. seating position.
NOTE
When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
return it to the upright position before driv-
ing.
Folding the second row seats

N00405701146
The second row seat can be folded to create

an additional cargo area.

BK0223400US.book 14
Making a cargo area

6. Fold forward the seat belt buckle.
CAUTION To return
Do not allow any person to sit on the flipped
seat cushion, and do not place luggage on it. 1. Raise the seatback until it locks securely
The seats mounting fittings could bend into place.
under the weight, making it impossible for 2. While lifting the seat belt buckle (A), gen-
the seat cushion to be secured when it returns tly lower the seat cushion. Make sure that
4 to the original position. there is a hook (B) at the position shown
in the illustration.
NOTE
If the seatback cannot be folded, follow the
steps below.
1. Raise the seatback once until it locks.
CAUTION 2. Pull the strap again.
Do not allow any person to get on the plastic 3. Pull up the lever, then fold the seatback
cover (C), and do not place luggage on it. forward.
Doing so could damage the plastic cover.
7. Pull up the lever (D), then fold the seat-

back forward.

BK0223400US.book 15
Making a cargo area
NOTE WARNING Folding the third row seats

A rubber strap (C) is attached to the seat belt Ensure that the head restraints are (Seating 7 passengers)
buckle for the left outboard seating position. returned to their original positions before N00409800021
This helps raise the seat belt buckle while the the seats are occupied. Failure to do so
seat cushion returns to the original position. could cause serious injury if involved in an
accident. To fold
4
1. Remove the head restraints from the third
6. If the center seat belt is stored; row seats. (Refer to Head restraints on
Pull out the detachable anchor plate (D) page 4-10.)
from the seatback. 2. Pull up the strap (A), then fold the seat-
Pull the small latch plate (E) slowly and back forward.
insert it into the detachable anchor plate
until a click is heard.
Make sure that the seat belt is not
3. Push down the seat cushion until it locks twisted.
securely into place. For details, refer to Detachable center
seat belt for second row on 4-20.
3. Stow the removed head restraints in the

luggage floor box with their front faces
facing downward.
4. Make sure that all seat belt buckles are

properly positioned on the seat cushion.
5. Return the folded head restraint to its
original position.

BK0223400US.book 16
Making a flat seat
Making a flat seat CAUTION

N00404801166 To raise the seatback of the front seat, firmly
place your hand on the seatback, pull the
The entire interior of the vehicle may be used
seatback lock knob up, and raise the seatback
for sleeping accommodations by removing slowly. (Refer to To adjust the seatback on
the head restraints and fully reclining all the page 4-6.) Do not let children adjust the seat-
4 seats when the vehicle is stopped. back.
1. Remove the head restraints from the front

WARNING seats and raise the arm rest on the second
Never drive with passengers or cargo on row seats.
the flat seat. This is extremely dangerous
For vehicles with a cargo area cover,
and can cause severe or fatal injury or
death in an accident or if heavy braking is
remove the cover.
To return required. (Refer to Head restraints on page 4-10,
Arm rest on page 4-9 and Cargo area
1. Pull the strap (A), then raise the seatback cover on page 5-233.)
until it locks securely into place.
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm CAUTION
that it has actually been secured. Adjust the seats only when the vehicle is
stopped in a safe place.
Seat should be adjusted only by adults to
avoid accidents.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg.
Do not walk around on top of the seats after
they have been laid flat because the footing
is uneven. It is safest to move about on your
hands and knees.
To ensure the seats are locked securely,
2. Slide the second row seats back as far as
attempt to move them back and forth.
possible (vehicles with second row seat
Do not jump on or drop heavy objects on the
slide function).
2. Install the head restraints. seatbacks.
(Refer to To adjust the seat forward or
backward on page 4-8.)

BK0223400US.book 17
Seat belts
Seat belts
N00406001481
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help

reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts. 4
Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.
WARNING
3. Slide the front seats fully forward, then 5. The flat seat configuration is now com- To help reduce the risk of injury or death
recline their seatbacks backward to plete. in an accident, seat belts and child
achieve a flat surface. To return the seats to the normal position, restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to Child restraint systems on page
(Refer to To adjust the seat forward or reverse the above procedure.
4-26 for additional information.
backward on page 4-5 and To adjust the
Never use one seat belt for more than one
seatback on page 4-6.)
person.
Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
Always place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
it behind you or under your arm.
Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
across your hips, not around your waist.
Never modify or alter the seat belts in
your vehicle.
4. Recline the seatbacks of the second row

seats.
(Refer to To adjust the seatback on page
4-8.)

BK0223400US.book 18
Seat belts
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
WARNING WARNING retractor in the event of a sudden change in
To reduce the risk to the driver of serious Children 12 years old and under should
the vehicles motion.
injury or death during deployment of the always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
drivers airbag, always properly wear the erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
seat belt and adjust the drivers seat as far serious injury or death in an accident, NOTE
back as possible while maintaining a posi- especially due to a deploying front passen-
4 tion that still enables you to fully apply the gers airbag. Refer to Child restraint sys-
For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to Installing a
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, tems on page 4-26 for additional child restraint system using the seat belt on
and safely operate the vehicle. information. page 4-31.
To reduce the risk to a front seat passen- Any child who is too small to properly
ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system. seats with their backs against the upright
remains seated all the way back and Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as child safety seat and positioned in the rear injury or death during deployment of the
far back as possible. Refer to Supplemen- seat. airbag, adjust the drivers seat as far back
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag on In the event of an accident, all seat belt as possible while maintaining a position
page 4-33 for additional information. assemblies, including retractors and that still enables you to fully apply the
Never hold an infant or child in your arms attachment hardware, should be inspected pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors and safely operate the vehicle. The front
even when you are wearing your seat belt. dealer to determine whether replacement passenger seat should also be moved as
Never place any part of the seat belt you is necessary. far back as possible. Refer to Supple-
are wearing around an infant or child.
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to Seat belt instructions on page 4-33. Also refer to To adjust the
your child in the event of an accident or N00406201467 seat forward or backward on page 4-5.
sudden stop. All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
an emergency locking retractor.
This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

BK0223400US.book 19
Seat belts
4. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
take up any slack in the lap belt.
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding

WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
the buckle until you hear a click. Pull
death in the event of an accident or sud-
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
locked securely in the buckle.
the upright position while the vehicle is in NOTE
motion. With the exception of the seat belt for the
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-
Seat belt performance during an accident
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
are reclined. The more a seatback is
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
mance will be adversely affected. If the
installation function (see page 4-31).
seat belt is not properly positioned against
When the ALR function has been activated,
the body during an accident, there is
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
increased risk you will slide under the belt
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the NOTE

webbing so that it easily pulls across your If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
body. out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

BK0223400US.book 20
Seat belts
WARNING Detachable center seat belt for To attach

Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and second row 1. Pull out the detachable anchor plate (C)
is worn as low as possible across the hips, N00409900035
not around the waist. Failure to follow this from the storage pocket on seat back
The center seat belt for the second row can be
instruction will increase the risk of serious cushion.
detached to fold the left side second row seat.
injury or death in the event of an accident. 2. Pull out the small latch plate (A) and then
4 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
This seat belt must be worn correctly as illus-
pull out the latch plate (B) by tilting it as
trated.
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may shown in the illustration.
adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
untwisted as it retracts.
WARNING NOTE
Never detach the center seat belt except Pulling out the latch plate by force may dam-
age the headliner.
when the left side seat back in the second
row is folded. Using the center seat belt
with the detachable anchor unlatched
increases the risk of serious injury or
death in an accident. Make sure the small
latch plate (A) is properly latched to the
detachable anchor before the center seat
belt is used.

BK0223400US.book 21
Seat belts
3. Pull the small latch plate (A) slowly and 3. After the seat belt has retracted com-
To detach
insert it into the detachable anchor plate pletely, insert the latch plate (B) into the
until a click is heard. Make sure that the 1. While holding the seat belt, insert a metal upper slit (F), and then insert the small
seat belt is not twisted. plate, such the latch plate of the seat belt latch plate (A) into the lower slit (G).
or a key, into the slit (E) on the detachable
anchor (C) and release the center seat belt
from the detachable anchor. 4
4. Store the detachable anchor in the storage

NOTE pocket on the seatback.
If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract 2. Retract the seat belt slowly by holding the
all the way. seat belt.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
The seat belt can be buckled up by inserting
the latch plate (B) into the buckle (D) like
NOTE
other seat belts. If the seat belt is not held, the seat belt will
rapidly retract. This could cause damage to
If the seat belt switch to the ALR child
the interior trim.
restraint installation function and cannot be
pulled out, detach the latch plate (B) and
move the second row seat fully backward.
Refer to Installing a child restraint system
using the seat belt on page 4-31.

BK0223400US.book 22
Seat belts
warning light will come on and a tone will
Drivers seat belt sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
Front passenger seat belt warn-
reminder/warning light and you to fasten your seat belt. ing light
display If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still N00418301247
N00418401394 unfastened, the warning light will blink and The front passenger seat belt warning light is
the tone will sound intermittently until the located in the instrument panel.
4 Type 1 seat belt is fastened. At the same time, FAS-
TEN SEAT BELT is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi information
display (Type 1 only).
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
is also seated and fastening a seat belt.
Type 2
Children should additionally be restrained
in a secure child restraint system. When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or the operation mode is put in
ON, this indicator normally comes on and
NOTE goes off a few seconds later.
If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- The light comes on when a person sits on the
tened, the warning light and the tone will front passenger seat but does not fasten the
issue further warnings each time the vehicle seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
starts moving from a stop.
sequently fastened.
A tone and warning light are used to remind

the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or the operation mode is put in ON
without the drivers seat belt being fastened, a
BK0223400US.book 23
Seat belts
WARNING WARNING Storing the second row (out-

When a child booster seat is used on the Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so board seating positions) and
front passenger seat, the front passenger that the shoulder belt is positioned across
seat belt warning light will not come on, if the center of your shoulder without touch- third row seat belts
the seat belt is not fastened when the ing your neck. The shoulder belt should N00406501112
booster seat is used. Confirm that the not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- When seat belts for the second row outboard
child is wearing the seat belt properly. ure to follow this instruction can adversely seating position and for the third row are not 4
Do not install any accessory or sticker that affect seat belt performance and increase used, the seat belts can be stored.
makes the light difficult to see. the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.
Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
Adjustable seat belt shoulder
Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
anchor (front seats) position after adjusting it.
N00406301354
The seat belt shoulder anchor height can be

adjusted. To move the anchor down, press the
lock knob (A) and slide the anchor down to
the desired position. To move the anchor up,
slide the anchor up to the desired position.
Anchor down Anchor up

BK0223400US.book 24
Seat belt use during pregnancy

Put the seat belt webbing in the back slot (A)
on the clip and insert the metal plate of the
Seat belt extender Seat belt use during preg-
latch plate into the front slot (B) as shown in
N00406701202
If your seat belt is not long enough, even

nancy
the illustration. N00406800134
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
must be obtained. The extender may be used Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
4 for either of the front seats.
women are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
seat belts.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
WARNING
The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
who can use the standard seat belt should
Seat belt pre-tensioner and
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an force limiter systems
extender can adversely affect seat belt N00417701710
performance in an accident. The drivers and front passengers seats each
When not required, the extender must be have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
removed and stowed.
system and force limiter system.

BK0223400US.book 25
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate
Pre-tensioner system under the same conditions as the airbag con-
trol unit.
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys- When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side some smoke is released and a loud noise will
collision or when a rollover or overturning of be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care 4
the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys- should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
tem operates simultaneously with the deploy- as it may cause some temporary irritation to
ment of the front airbags, side airbags or people with respiratory problems.
curtain airbags. Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located in the 1- SRS warning light tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are
drivers and front passengers seat belt retrac- 2- Front impact sensors not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may
tors (A) and in the front passenger seats final 3- Seat belt pre-tensioner not activate in certain collisions, even though
anchor (B). When activated, the pre-tension- 4- Airbag control unit the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-
ers quickly draw back seat belt webbing and 5- Side impact sensors aged. Such non-activation does not mean that
increase seat belt performance. 6- Seat belt buckle switches something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten-
sioner system, but rather that the collision
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness forces were not severe enough to activate the
of the electronic parts of the system whenever system.
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include WARNING
all of the items listed above and all related The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
wiring. designed to work only once. After the seat
[Except for vehicles equipped with the belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
F.A.S.T.-key] they will not work again. They must
The ignition switch is in the ON or promptly be replaced and the entire seat
START position. belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes The operation mode is in ON.
the following components:

BK0223400US.book 26
Child restraint systems

The child restraint system should be appropri- Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
SRS warning ate for your childs weight and height, and (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches
N00408701147
should properly fit your vehicles seat. (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
This warning light tells you if there is a prob- For detailed information, refer to the instruc- use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat tion manual accompanying the child restraint in the rear seat until the vehicles lap-and-
belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to SRS system. shoulder belt fits them properly.
4 warning light/display on page 4-39.
Guidelines for child restraint WARNING
Force limiter system system selection All children must be seated in the rear
N00408900126 seat, and properly restrained.
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force Accident statistics show that children of
All children should be properly restrained in all sizes and ages are safer when properly
limiter system will help reduce the force
a restraint device that offers the maximum restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
protection for their size and age. the front seat.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial Be sure to select a child restraint system
Child restraint systems requirements for child size and age that may that is appropriate not only for the childs
N00407101740 vary from the recommendations listed below. size and age but also for your vehicle.
Some child restraint systems may not fit
When transporting infants or small children Children less than 1 year old and who your vehicle properly.
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
system must always be used. This is required ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
by law in the U.S. and Canada. MUST ONLY be used in the second row
Child restraint systems specifically designed seat.
for infants and small children are offered by Children older than 1 year of age and who
several manufacturers. Choose only a child weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
restraint system with a label certifying that it are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety be in a forward-facing restraint used only
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle in the rear seat.
Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
turers statement of compliance on the box
and child restraint system itself.

BK0223400US.book 27
WARNING WARNING WARNING

Any child who is too large to use a child Never hold an infant or child in your arms Your vehicle is also equipped with a front
restraint system should ride in the rear or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, passengers airbag.
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi- Never place any part of the seat belt you RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
tioned over the shoulder and across the are wearing around an infant or child. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
chest, not across their neck, and with the Failure to follow these simple instructions senger seat. This places the infant too 4
lap belt positioned low on the childs hips, creates a risk of serious injury or death to close to the passengers airbag. During
not across their stomach. If necessary, a your child in the event of an accident or deployment of that airbag, the infant can
booster seat should be used to help achieve sudden stop. be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing
a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster child restraint systems or infant restraint
seat manufacturers instructions. Only use systems must only be used in the rear seat.
a booster seat that is certified as comply-
ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- Airbag
tions.

BK0223400US.book 28
WARNING WARNING NOTE

FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT When installing a child restraint system, Before purchasing a child restraint system,
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat follow the instructions provided by the try installing it in the rear seat to ensure
whenever possible. If one must be used in manufacturer and follow the directions in proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt
the front passenger seat, move the seat to this manual. Failure to do so can result in buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it
the most rearward position and make sure serious injury or death to your child in an may be difficult to securely install some
4 the child stays in the child restraint sys- accident or sudden stop. manufacturers child restraint systems.
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow After installation, push and pull the child If the child restraint system can be pulled
these instructions could result in serious restraint system back and forth, and side forward or to either side easily on the seat
injury or death to the child. to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
the child restraint system is not installed choose another manufacturers child restraint
securely, it may cause injury to the child system.
or other occupants in the event of an acci- Depending on the seating position in the
dent or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that
When not in use, keep your child restraint you have, the child restraint system can be
system secured with the seat belt, or attached using one of the following 2 meth-
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre- ods:
vent it from being thrown around inside Attach to the lower anchorage in the second
the vehicle during an accident. row seat ONLY if the child restraint system
is compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-29).
Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-31).
WARNING
It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infants
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.

BK0223400US.book 29
Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations Examples of child restraint sys-
tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901201 tems compatible with the LATCH
Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the system
Anchors and Tethers for chil- backside of the second row seats. These are
dren) system
N00419000198
for securing a child restraint system tether
N00418801167 strap to each of the 3 rear seating positions in
your vehicle.
4
Lower anchor locations
The outboard seating positions in the second

row seat of your vehicle are equipped with
lower anchors for attaching child restraint
systems compatible with the LATCH system.
A- Rear-facing child restraint system

B- Front-facing child restraint system
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors
D- Tether strap
(These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system

N00419101271
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

NOTE remove the head restraint from the loca-
The symbols on the seatback show the location where you wish to install the child
tion of the lower anchor points. restraint system.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).

BK0223400US.book 30

3. For easier access, the seatback may be D- Connector 4. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
recline rearward. restraint system to the tether anchor bar
Push the anchor connectors (D) on the NOTE (F) and tighten the tether strap so it is
child restraint system into the lower In order to secure a child restraint system securely fastened.
anchors (C) in accordance with the compatible with the LATCH system, use the
instructions provided by the child restraint lower anchor points in the outboard positions
4 systems manufacturer. of the second row seat. It is not necessary to
After it is security fastened, adjust the use the vehicles seat belt. The vehicles seat
seatback to 4 steps forward from most belt, however, MUST be used to secure a
reclined position. child restraint system in the middle seating
Remember, the lower anchors (C) pro- position of the second row seat.
vided with your vehicle are designed to
secure suitable child restraint systems
compatible with the LATCH system in WARNING
the outboard positions of the second If there is any foreign material in or
row seats only. The anchor connectors around the lower anchors, remove it
are NOT designed to secure a suitable
before installing the child restraint sys- NOTE
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook,
child restraint system in the middle from, not looped through or otherwise
seating position of the second row seat. turn the hook sideways.
interfering with, the child restraint sys-
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
and/or the seat belt interferes with the 5. Push and pull the child restraint system in
child restraint system, the child restraint all directions to ensure it is firmly
system will not be secured properly, could secured.
detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could WARNING
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
Child restraint system tether anchors are
cle occupants.
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
the seat where the child restraint system is no circumstances are they to be used for
installed. adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
A- Vehicle seat cushion other items, or equipment to the vehicle.
B- Vehicle seatback
C- Lower anchor

BK0223400US.book 31
Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING

tem using the seat belt (with When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
N00407301494
system tightly secured to the seat. 4
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
part of the belt all the way out of the
installation function. Always use the ALR
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
child restraint installation function when you Installation
feed back into the retractor.
install a child restraint system using the seat
belt. 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
Children 12 years old and under should where you wish to install it.
always be restrained in the rear seat, when- To help assure proper fitting of the child
ever possible, although the front passenger restraint system, always remove the head
seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. restraint.
When installing the front-facing child
restraint system on the second row seat,
adjust the angle of the second row seat-
back to the most upright position.
2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys- 4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.
tems manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a click when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.

BK0223400US.book 32

If the belt is in the ALR function, you will 6. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the 7. Before putting your child in the restraint,
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing child restraint system to the tether anchor push and pull the restraint in all directions
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
function has not been activated and you securely fastened. before each use. If the child restraint sys-
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, through 6.
4 grab the shoulder part of the belt near the 8. To remove a child restraint system from
buckle and pull up to remove any slack the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
from the lap part of the belt allowing the remove the child from the restraint.
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child from the restraint and let the belt fully
restraint system will not be secure. It may retract.
help to put your weight on the child 9. Reinstall the head restraint.
restraint system and/or push on its seat- Refer to Head restraints on page 4-10.
back while pulling up on the belt (See
illustration).
NOTE Children who have outgrown
If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook, child restraint systems
turn the hook sideways. N00407601628
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
WARNING wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
Child restraint system tether anchors are their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
designed only to withstand loads from cor- their stomach, a commercially available
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
booster seat must be used to raise the child so
no circumstances are they to be used for
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
other items, or equipment to the vehicle. and the lap belt remains positioned low
If your child restraint system requires the use across their hips. The booster seat should fit
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
accordance with the following procedures. compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

BK0223400US.book 33
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- Regularly check your seat belt buckles and The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
tions. their release mechanisms for positive engage- ment the primary protection of the driver and
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
WARNING retractors for automatic locking when in the ing those occupants with protection against
Any child who is too small to properly
Automatic Locking Retractor function. head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child
The entire seat belt assembly should be bags, together with sensors at the front of the 4
restraint system, to reduce their risk of replaced if the webbing shows any obvious vehicle and sensors attached to the front
serious injury or death in an accident. cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- seats, form an advanced airbag system.
A child should never be left unattended in, tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
or unsupervised around, your vehicle. severe fading from sunlight. All of these con- The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
When you leave the vehicle, always take ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
the child out as well. which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
Children can die from heat stroke if left or mance in an accident. front passenger with protection against chest
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on injuries by deploying the bag on the side
hot days. impacted in moderate to severe side impact
Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair or replace any
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
Keep your vehicle keys away from chil- the driver and the passengers on the front seat
dren. part of the seat belt assemblies. This work
should be done by an authorized and the second row outboard seats with pro-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have tection against head injuries by deploying the
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer curtain airbag on the side impacted in moder-
Maintenance and inspection perform the work could reduce the effec- ate to severe side impact collisions and by
of seat belts tiveness of the belts and could result in a
serious injury or death in an accident.
deploying both curtain airbags when a roll-
N00407000221
over is detected. The curtain airbags are also
designed to help reduce the risk of complete
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with
and partial ejection from the vehicle through
mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an
organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the
Supplemental Restraint Sys- side windows in both side impact and roll-
tem (SRS) - airbag over type accidents.
shade. Do not allow them to retract until com-
pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re- N00407701788
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
dye the belts. The color may rub off and the This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
webbing strength may be affected. Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- all types of accidents, seat belts must
bags for the driver and passengers. ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or

BK0223400US.book 34
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
WARNING WARNING
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- Airbags inflate very quickly and with
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-
ERLY SEATED. great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
led in the rear seat). Refer to Child restraint
A driver or front passenger sitting too seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
systems on page 4-26. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
close to the steering wheel or instrument
chest close to the steering wheel or the
4 WARNING
panel during airbag deployment can be
seriously injured or killed. instrument panel.
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS Airbags inflate very quickly and with Do not put your feet or legs on or against
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY great force. If the driver and front pas- the instrument panel.
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. senger are not properly seated and
Seat belts help keep the driver and pas- restrained, the airbag may not provide
sengers properly positioned. This the proper protection, and can cause
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, serious injuries or death when it inflates.
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
death when the airbags inflate. injury or death due to a deploying
During sudden braking just before a col- drivers airbag, always properly wear
lision, an unrestrained or improperly your seat belt and adjust the drivers seat
restrained driver or front passenger can as far back as possible, maintaining a
move forward into direct contact with, or position that still allows the driver to
within close proximity to, the airbag have good control of the steering wheel,
when it begins to inflate. brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is trols.
the most forceful and can cause serious To reduce the risk to the front passenger
injuries or death if the occupant comes in of serious injury or death from a deploy-
contact with the airbag at this time. ing passengers airbag, make sure the
Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in passenger always wears the seat belt
rear impact collisions, and in lower- properly, remains seated upright and all
speed frontal collisions because the air- the way back in the seat, and positions
bags are not designed to inflate in those the seat as far back as possible.
situations. Seat all infants and children in the rear
Seat belts reduce the risk of being seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or ate child restraint system.
rollover.

BK0223400US.book 35

Infants and small children should never NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passengers airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys- 4
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
Child restraint systems on page 4-26. in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
Older children should be seated in the
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed.
Refer to Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems on page 4-32.

BK0223400US.book 36

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
How the Supplemental front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
Restraint System works the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
N00407801532
The SRS includes the following components: When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
4 deployed.
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released

accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
10- Side airbag modules the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
11- Curtain airbag modules tion to people with respiratory problems.
12- Side impact sensors
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated.
1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
2- SRS warning light the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
3- Passengers airbag off indicator under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the
4- Front impact sensors all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.
5- Airbag module (Passenger) wiring.
6- Airbag module (Drivers knee) [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Drivers seat position sensor F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the ON or Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
8- Passengers seat occupant classifica-
START position. force. In certain situations, contact with an
tion sensor system inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
9- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The operation mode is in ON.
The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418601266
This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).
BK0223400US.book 37

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
NOTE SRS warning light/display on page 4-39.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- WARNING
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
standing how a vehicles systems performed. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
The EDR is designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash location) are
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a recorded. However, other parties, such as
play comes on, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
4
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or law enforcement, could combine the EDR dealer as soon as possible.
less. data with the type of personally identifying Please observe the following instructions
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- to ensure that the drivers seat position
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record tigation. sensor can operate correctly.
such data as: Adjust the seat to the correct position,
and sit well back against the seatback.
How various systems in your vehicle were To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Refer to Front seats on page 4-4.
operating; equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
Do not recline the seatback more than
Whether or not the driver and front pas- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the necessary when driving.
senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as Do not place metallic objects or luggage
How far (if at all) the driver was depress- law enforcement, that have the special equip- under the front seat.
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; ment, can read the information if they have If the vehicle is involved in a severe
and, access to the vehicle or the EDR. impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
How fast the vehicle was traveling. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Drivers seat position sensor
These data can help provide a better under- N00417900177
standing of the circumstances in which
The drivers seat position sensor is attached
crashes and injuries occur. Passengers seat occupant clas-
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
unit with information on the seats fore-aft sification sensor system
position. The airbag control unit controls N00418001374
deployment of the drivers front airbag in The passengers seat occupant classification
accordance with the information it receives sensor system is attached to the front passen-
from this sensor. ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
If there is a problem involving the drivers trol unit with information regarding the
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-

BK0223400US.book 38

bag control unit controls deployment of the
passengers front airbag in accordance with
WARNING WARNING
The SRS warning light comes on while If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
the information it receives from this system.
you are driving. and dry the seat immediately.
The passengers front airbag will not deploy
To ensure that the passengers seat occu- If the vehicle is involved in a severe
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
pant classification sensor system can sense impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
pant on the front passengers seat or a child in
4 a child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
senger airbag off indicator will come on. can adversely affect the performance of
Refer to Passengers airbag off indicator on the passengers airbag system.
page 4-38. Adjust the seat to the correct position,
Passengers airbag off indicator
If there is a problem involving the passen- and sit well back against the seatback. N00418101346
gers seat occupant classification sensor sys- Refer to Front seats on page 4-4. The passengers airbag off indicator is
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument Do not recline the seatback more than located in the instrument panel.
panel will come on. Refer to SRS warning necessary.
light/display on page 4-39. Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
Do not place anything between the seat
WARNING and the floor console.
If any of the following conditions occur, When attaching a child restraint system,
you should immediately have your vehicle secure it firmly.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Do not place luggage or other objects on
Motors dealer as soon as possible: the seat.
The SRS warning light does not initially Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
come on when the ignition switch or the
Do not modify or replace the seat and
operation mode is under the following
seat belt.
conditions.
Do not place luggage or other objects
[Except for vehicles equipped with the The indicator normally comes on when the
under the seat.
F.A.S.T.-key] ignition switch is turned to the ON position
The ignition switch is in the ON or Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
START position.
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON. stick pins, needles, or other objects into ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
The SRS warning light does not go out it. the passenger front airbag is not operational.
after several seconds. Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
The front passengers seat is not occupied.
BK0223400US.book 39

The system senses that a child is using a onds and then go out. This is normal and
child restraint system on the front passen-
WARNING means the system is working properly.
Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
gers seat. If there is a problem involving one or more of
cle that makes the passengers airbag off
the SRS components, the warning light will
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
When the passengers seat occupant classifi- come on and stay on. At the same time, the
You must be able to see the passengers
cation sensor system sense there is a person airbag off indicator and verify the status warning display will appear on the informa-
seated in the front passengers seat, the indi- of the passengers airbag system. tion screen in the multi information display 4
cator goes out to show that the passengers (Type 1 only).
front airbag is operational. The SRS warning light/display is shared by
SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
N00408301589
WARNING system.
There is a Supplemental Restraint System
If any of the following conditions occur,
(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.
you should immediately have the airbag WARNING
system in your vehicle inspected by an If any of the following conditions occur,
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as Type 1 there may be a problem with the SRS air-
soon as possible: bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
The passengers airbag off indicator they may not function properly in a colli-
comes on when an adult is sitting on the sion or may suddenly activate without a
front passenger seat. collision:
The passengers airbag off indicator does Even when the ignition switch or the
not come on when the front passenger operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
seat is not occupied. ing light does not come on or it remains
The passengers airbag off indicator does Type 2 on.
not come on when the ignition switch is The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
turned to the ON position or the oper- ing display comes on while driving.
ation mode is put in ON. The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
The passengers airbag off indicator does sioners are designed to help reduce the
not come on when a child is in a child risk of serious injury or death in certain
restraint system on the front passengers collisions. If either of the above conditions
seat. occurs, immediately have your vehicle
The system checks itself every time the igni-
The passengers airbag off indicator checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
tion switch is turned to the ON position or
comes on and goes out repeatedly. Motors dealer.
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
warning light will come on for several sec-

BK0223400US.book 40

designed to deploy at the same time as the
Drivers and passengers front drivers front airbag.
airbag system
N00407901331
The drivers airbag is located under the pad-

ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
4 The front passengers airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The drivers airbag and the front
passengers airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
gers airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.
Driver
Front passenger
Drivers knee airbag system

N00404500010
The drivers knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The drivers knee airbag is
BK0223400US.book 41
Deployment of front airbags

N00408001616
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded 4
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag are The front airbags and drivers knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicles main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag are the impact to the vehicles main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and drivers knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,

BK0223400US.book 42

they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and drivers Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY narrow object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and drivers knee air-
4 airbags and drivers knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicles body belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and drivers knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and drivers knee air- Side collision to your vehicle
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and drivers Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when

The front airbags and drivers knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

BK0223400US.book 43
The front airbags and drivers Collision with an elevated median/island or WARNING
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb Do not attach anything to the steering
wheels padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
The front airbags and drivers knee airbag
may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
4
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole compartment. Such items could strike and
carriage impact). Some typical situations are injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and drivers knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
and these unexpected impacts can move you ground
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or
death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
injure an occupant, when the airbag
inflates.

BK0223400US.book 44
WARNING WARNING Side airbag system

Do not attach additional keys or accesso- Do not place objects, such as packages or N00408101431
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the pets, between the airbags and the driver The side airbags (A) are contained in the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent or the front passenger. Such objects can driver and front passenger seatbacks.
the drivers knee airbag from inflation adversely affect airbag performance, or The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
normally or could be propelled to cause cause serious injury or death when the
4 serious injury if the airbag inflates. airbag deploys.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even
with no passenger in the front seat.
Do not attach accessories to the lower por- Immediately after airbag inflation, some
tion of the drivers side instrument panel. parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
Such objects could prevent the drivers not touch them. You could otherwise be
knee airbag from inflating normally or burned.
could be propelled to cause serious injury The airbag system is designed to work
if the airbag inflates. only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-

cles equipped with side airbags.
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.

BK0223400US.book 45
Curtain airbag system WARNING WARNING

N00419201227 The side airbags and curtain airbags can Do not place any objects around the area
The curtain airbags are contained in the front cause serious injury or death to anyone where the side airbags deploy. Such
pillar, the rear pillar and the side sections of too close to the airbag when it deploys. To objects can interfere with proper side air-
the roof. reduce the risk of injury from a deploying bag deployment, and cause injury during
side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and deployment of the side airbag.
The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
front passenger must be properly Do not place stickers, labels or additional
4
on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
restrained and seated well back, upright, trim on the back of either front seat. They
even with no passenger in the seat.
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean can interfere with proper side airbag
Also, when the airbag control unit detects against the door. deployment.
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
will deploy. other object around the part where the
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the
windshield, side door glass or front and
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
other object may be hurled with great
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
second row seat passengers to hold onto
the back of either front seat. Special care
should be taken with children.

BK0223400US.book 46
WARNING WARNING Deployment of side airbag and

Do not put a hanger or any heavy or Do not allow a child to lean against or sit curtain airbag
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- close to the passenger door, even if the N00408201546
tain airbag was activated, any such item child is seated in a child restraint system.
could be propelled away with great force The childs head should also not lean
and could prevent the curtain airbag from against or be close to the section of the The side airbag and curtain airbag
4 inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly seatback where the side airbag and cur- ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if when...
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
objects in the pockets of clothes that you Failure to follow all of these instructions The side airbag and curtain airbag are
hang on the coat hook. could lead to serious injury or death to the designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats child.
moderate to severe side impact to the middle
that have side airbags. Covers can inter- Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
of the passenger compartment.
fere with proper side airbag deployment airbag or curtain airbag components
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- should be done only by an authorized Mit-
A typical situation is shown in the illustra-
mance. subishi Motors dealer. There is a risk of a tion.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint serious injury or death. Improper work
system in the front passenger seat. Rear- methods can cause accidental side airbag Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
facing child restraint systems MUST or curtain airbag deployment, or render a vehicle bodys side structure
ONLY be used in the rear seat. side airbag or curtain airbag inoperable.
Front-facing child restraint systems Either of these situations could result in
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. serious injury or death.
If a front-facing child restraint system Do not place luggage heavier than the
must be used in the front passenger seat, specified on the roof carrier.
move the seat as far back as possible, and Such luggage may cause the curtain air-
make sure that the child stays in the child bags to inflate accidentally, which could When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
restraint system, properly restrained and result in serious injury or death. (Curtain airbag only)
away from the door.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in an accident. The

BK0223400US.book 47

SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are
The side airbag and curtain airbag Side impact in an area away from the passenger
designed to provide additional protection.
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all MAY NOT DEPLOY when... compartment
occupants, be sure to always wear your seat In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
belts properly. bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
if the deformation of the body seems to be
large, because the vehicles body structure is
4
designed to absorb the impact and to deform Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle
in order to help protect the occupants. There collision with the side of vehicle
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
narrow object
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do
not protect the occupant in all types of side
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.

BK0223400US.book 48
Oblique side impact The side airbag and curtain airbag Head-on collision
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when...
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
4 designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Some typical situations are shown in the Rear end collision to your vehicle
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag illustration.
only)
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do
not protect the occupant in all types of colli-
sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts Pitch end over end
properly.

BK0223400US.book 49
SRS servicing WARNING NOTE

N00408500669 Do not modify your front seats, center pil- Steering wheel
lar or center console. Such modifications Instrument panel
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury.
Also, if you discover any tear or open [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air- To contact Mitsubishi Motors North 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- America, Inc.
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
or repair on any SRS components or wir- If you have found any scratch, crack or Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and Customer Relations Department
ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
P.O. Box 6400
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci- [For vehicles sold in Canada]
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa- When you transfer ownership of the vehicle Canada, Inc.
tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec- Customer Relations Department
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owners manual. P.O. Box 41009
part. For example, replacement of the If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, 4141 Dixie Road
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury.
If any of the following parts needs to be
If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
make sure it is in proper working order. subishi Motors dealer.
Drivers seat
Front passenger seat
Front seat belt

BK0223400US.book 50
Warning label
[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] [For vehicles sold in American Samoa]
N00408600354
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
Caribbean, Inc. call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
are located in the vehicle as shown in the
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc.
illustration.
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, P.O. Box 698
4 Inc. PAGO PAGO,
Customer Service Department AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
P.O. Box 192216
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
[For vehicles sold in Guam]

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
P.O. Box 6066
TAMUNING
GUAM 96931
[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
* - Located in the passengers side as well.

BK0223400US.book 1
Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3 Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles .....................5-88
Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Service brake .................................................................................5-89
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Hill start assist (if so equipped) ......................................................5-89 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Brake assist system ........................................................................5-90
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-91
equipped).....................................................................................5-12 Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-93
Door locks ......................................................................................5-33 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-94
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-35 Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-96
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-36 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)............5-100
Liftgate (except for vehicles equipped with the power liftgate) ....5-36 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) (if so equipped).... 5-111
Power liftgate (if so equipped) .......................................................5-38 Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) (if so equipped)........... 5-116
Inside liftgate release .....................................................................5-44 Tire pressure monitoring system ................................................. 5-119
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-45 Rear-view camera (if so equipped)...............................................5-124
Power window control ...................................................................5-49 Instrument cluster ........................................................................5-126
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-51 Multi Information display - Type 1 .............................................5-128
Parking brake .................................................................................5-53 Multi Information display - Type 2 .............................................5-146
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-54 Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-55 (multi information display - Type 1) .......................................5-154
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-57 Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-60 2) ..............................................................................................5-171
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped) ..............................................5-62 Indicators .....................................................................................5-172
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-62 Warning lights ..............................................................................5-173
Automatic transaxle (if so equipped)..............................................5-64 Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi informa-
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-71 tion display - Type 1) ...............................................................5-175
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped).................5-79 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-177
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped) .....................5-81 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-182
4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-85 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-183
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-87 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-184
BK0223400US.book 2
Features and controls
ECO mode switch ........................................................................ 5-184

Front fog light switch (if so equipped)......................................... 5-184
5 Wiper and washer switch ............................................................ 5-185
Wiper deicer switch (if so equipped)............................................ 5-190
Electric rear window defogger switch ......................................... 5-190
Horn switch ................................................................................. 5-191
Link System (if so equipped) ....................................................... 5-192
Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped) .................................... 5-192
USB input terminal (if so equipped) ............................................ 5-215
Sun visors .................................................................................... 5-218
12 V power outlets ...................................................................... 5-219
HomeLink Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ............... 5-220
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-225
Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-228
Cup holders ................................................................................. 5-232
Bottle holders .............................................................................. 5-233
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ............................................... 5-233
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-235
Coat hooks ................................................................................... 5-235
Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-236
BK0223400US.book 3
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508701366 N00508801628
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- F.A.S.T.-key
the break-in period. (with electronic immobilizer and key-
less entry system function)
Avoid revving the engine. 2- Emergency key
Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, 3- Key number plate
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
actions would have a detrimental effect on NOTE
the engine and lead to increased fuel and The key is a precision electronic device with
oil consumption; this could ultimately 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
result in the malfunction of engine com- keyless entry system the following in order to prevent damage.
ponents. Be particularly careful to avoid 2- Key number plate Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
full acceleration while in low shift posi-
top of the dashboard.
tion (low gears).
Do not take the remote control transmitter
Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within Type 2 apart.
the seating capacity. (Refer to Cargo load Do not excessively bend the key or subject
precautions on page 6-10.) Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys it to strong impacts.
Refrain from towing a trailer or other are provided. Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
vehicle (Refer to Trailer towing on page Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency Keep away from magnetic objects such as
6-11). key in a safe place together as a set of spare key rings.
keys.
Features and controls 5-3

BK0223400US.book 4
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
NOTE NOTE achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
Keep away from devices that produce mag- When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
a key registered to the immobilizer system.
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door or
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
and televisions. liftgate is opened after using the key, the
door lock knob or the power door lock cle have been programmed to the vehicles
Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular switch to unlock the vehicle. electronics.
phones, wireless devices and high fre- The system does not enter the preparation
5 quency equipment (including medical status if the keyless entry system or the NOTE
devices). F.A.S.T.-key operation was not used to lock In the following cases, the vehicle may not
Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. the vehicle. be able to recognize the registered ID code
Do not leave the key where it may be from the key. This means the engine will not
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
ity.
Electronic immobilizer start even when the key is turned to the
START position.
If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system) When the key contacts a key ring or other
the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509101790 metallic or magnetic object
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles
ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
No keys other than those registered in Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
Refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft theft starting system) on page 5-18.
starting system) on page 5-4.
Refer to Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) on (F.A.S.T.-key)]
page 5-18.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
5-4 Features and controls

BK0223400US.book 5

Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
NOTE NOTE your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
When the key grip contacts metal of Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
have your ID code changed.
another key with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle Additional keys
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the START posi- tered keys. You need to register the ID code 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a to the vehicle.
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Registering the ID code can be done by your-
Motors dealer. self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or
When the key contacts or is close to other by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
immobilizer keys (including keys of other For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
vehicles) CAUTION low the Customer key programming proce-
Do not make any alterations or additions to dure below.
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi- If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Replacement keys
NOTE
Only keys that have been programmed to the You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
In cases like the above, move the offending
vehicles electronics can be used to start the register up to 8 keys.
object(s) away from the key and turn the key
vehicle.
back to the ACC or LOCK position.
Then try to start the engine again. If the
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
engine does not start, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
The key may not operate properly when it is
referring to the key number.
near an object or facility that emits strong To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
electromagnetic waves. vehicle keys must be changed.

BK0223400US.book 6

4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in OFF or LOCK position and remove Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
Canada) it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
N00562201149 a blank immobilizer key into the ignition immobilizer display.
You can program new keys to the system if switch and turn it to the ON position. It is not possible to register a key if:
you have two valid (already registered) keys Perform this operation no more than 30 the immobilizer display goes off during the
seconds after the immobilizer display
5 and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
starts blinking. When registration of the
procedure
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors the immobilizer display does not come on
dealer) by doing the following: ID code is complete, the immobilizer dis- within 30 seconds after step 4.
play will come on for 30 seconds then go The procedure will be terminated automati-
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition off. If an error occurs, the blinking immo- cally if:
switch and turn the key to the ON posi- bilizer display will go off during the pro- a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
tion for 5 seconds. cedure. from the moment when the first key is
2. Turn the key to the OFF or LOCK turned to the OFF or LOCK position to
position and remove the first key. Type 1 the moment when the second key is turned
to the ON position
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first
a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
key, insert the second valid key into the
from the moment when the second key is
ignition and turn it to the ON position. turned to the OFF or LOCK position to
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer the moment when the blank immobilizer
display will start to blink. key is turned to the ON position
Type 2
To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tem.
Also refer to Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer remote control transmitter program-
ming on page 5-10.
5. If you wish to register another key, per-
form the process again from step 1.

BK0223400US.book 7
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
General information Keyless entry system (if so NOTE

N00562301094 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
N00509001959
matically retract or extend when the doors
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
the remote control switches of the keyless
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. entry system.
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This It can also help you signal for attention by
device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules setting off the panic alarm.
Refer to Features and controls: Outside
rearview mirrors on page 5-57.
5
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con- To lock
ditions.
This device may not cause harmful inter- Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
ference. doors and the liftgate.
This device must accept any interference The turn signal lights will also blink once.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
CAUTION 1- LOCK ( ) button
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
matically retract when the LOCK button(1)
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
2- UNLOCK ( ) button is pressed.
3- PANIC button If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
ance could void the users authority to oper-
4- Indicator light horn will sound once.
ate the equipment.
To unlock
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

drivers door only.

BK0223400US.book 8

Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK In a vehicle equipped with the Mitsubishi
button one more time to unlock all the doors
Operation of the outside rear- Multi-Communication System, it is possible
and liftgate. view mirrors (Vehicles to change the setting by means of screen
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. equipped with the mirror operations.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. retractor switch) Refer to the separate owners manual for
The front side-marker and parking lights will details.
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
Welcome light on page 5-181.
5 To retract Answerback function
NOTE Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- entry system answerback function can be
liftgate using the LOCK button, press the
LOCK button twice rapidly to retract the out- changed as required. This is done with the
matically extend when the UNLOCK
button(2) is pressed. side rearview mirrors. key removed from the ignition switch.
On vehicles equipped with a Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, the functions To extend NOTE
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, The answerback function will not operate if
refer to the separate operation manual. any of the doors are open.
Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
liftgate using the UNLOCK button, press the
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. UNLOCK button twice rapidly to return the
outside rearview mirrors to their extended Horn deactivation/reactivation
Refer to Setting of door and liftgate unlock
function on page 5-9. positions.
The answerback function can be set in the
The outside rearview mirrors are not initially following three ways.
set to work as described above. If you want Each time the answerback function is set, a
them to work as described above, you need to chime will sound to tell you the condition of
set them so that they do not retract/extend the answerback function.
when the doors and liftgate are
locked/unlocked using the keyless entry sys- One chime: The horn will not sound.
tem. Two chimes: The horn will sound.
For details, please consult an authorized Mit-

BK0223400US.book 9

Four chimes: The horn will sound if the 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
Setting of door and liftgate
LOCK button is pressed twice
within 1 second. during this time. unlock function
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and N00543601115
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- The door and liftgate unlock function can be
2. Open the drivers door and turn the coming the LOCK button in step 3. set to the following two conditions.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
the OFF position. Number of tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- chimes
To lock To unlock
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
5
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) One chime One flash Two flashes function.
during this time.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and Two chimes One flash No flash
Number of
LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- Three chimes No flash Two flashes Condition
chimes
ing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Four chimes Two flashes One flash All doors and the liftgate
One chime
Five chimes No flash One flash unlock
NOTE
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Six chimes Two flashes No flash Two chimes Drivers door unlock only
Multi-Communication System, the functions Seven
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, No flash No flash
chimes 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
refer to the separate operation manual.
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
NOTE the OFF position.
Turn signal lights deactiva- On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
tion/reactivation Multi-Communication System, the functions onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, during this time.
The answerback function can be turned ON 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
or OFF separately. UNLOCK buttons within 5 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com-
the OFF position.

BK0223400US.book 10

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
NOTE referring to the key number.
Customer remote control trans-
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the mitter programming (Except
Multi-Communication System, the functions
can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
remote control transmitter must be changed. for vehicles sold in Canada)
refer to the separate operation manual. Take your vehicle and all remote control N00544001158
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi You can program new remote control trans-
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed. mitters to the system if you have one valid
5 Using the panic alarm (already registered) remote control transmit-
N00543701060 Additional remote control ter by doing the following. The drivers door
transmitters must be opened while you follow the steps
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
below:
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- N00543900049
tion as follows: To add a remote control transmitter, you must 1. Have available all (current and new)
already have 1 registered remote control remote control transmitters you wish to
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
transmitter. register.
1 second.
Registering the ID code can be done by your- 2. With a valid (already registered) remote
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
the horn will sound intermittently for
dealer. For you to register the ID code your- button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
about 3 minutes.
self, follow the Customer remote control and hold the LOCK button (1).
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
transmitter programming procedure below. 3. Within 5 seconds of pressing the LOCK
the remote control transmitter.
If you choose to have your authorized button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID buttons in sequence.
Replacement remote control code, take your vehicle and any remaining At this time, ID codes for all remote con-
transmitters keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors trol transmitters except for the transmitter
N00543801087
dealer. used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the
answerback function (door is locked and
Only remote control transmitters pro-
grammed with the vehicles electronics can NOTE unlocked) informs you that the registra-
You are provided with 2 remote control tion mode has been activated.
lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate.
transmitters, but you may register up to 8
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you remote control transmitters.
can order a remote control transmitter from

BK0223400US.book 11

4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
the following ID code registration opera-
NOTE General information
The remote control transmitter can be used N00546101124
tion using the next remote control trans-
from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
mitter you wish to register within 4
this distance may change if your vehicle is
seconds. frequency subject to Federal Communica-
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta-
i) Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
tion, or a radio station.
buttons for 2 seconds. sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
If the following conditions are observed after
ii) Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
buttons for 1 second.
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ton on the remote control transmitter, the complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and 5
iii) Press the UNLOCK button. The battery in the remote control transmitter may Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
answerback function informs you that the need to be replaced. dard(s).
ID code registration of the transmitter is The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked Operation is subject to the following two con-
completed. or unlocked. ditions.
5. To register the ID codes of additional The panic alarm cannot be operated.
The indicator light (4) is dim or does not This device may not cause harmful inter-
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4
come on. ference.
within 60 seconds after step 4.
If you lose your remote control transmitter, This device must accept any interference
6. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi received, including interference that may
mitter is registered within 60 seconds
Motors dealer for a replacement. cause undesired operation.
after step 4, the registration mode is can-
If you wish to obtain an additional remote
celed and the normal mode returns.
control transmitter, please contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum CAUTION
NOTE of 8 remote control transmitters can be pro- Changes or modifications not expressly
grammed for your vehicle. approved by the manufacturer for compli-
For verification purposes, try to lock and
To use the new remote control transmitters, it ance could void the users authority to oper-
unlock the doors after the registration is
is necessary to register the key with both the ate the equipment.
completed.
The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
button is pressed. tem.
Also refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
The keyless entry system does not work if
theft starting system): Customer key pro-
the key is in the ignition switch.
gramming on page 5-6.

BK0223400US.book 12
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

3. Remove the remote control transmitter 7. Place the remote control transmitter in the
Procedure for replacing the from the remote control transmitter case. remote control transmitter case, then
remote control transmitter bat- Then, open the remote control transmitter securely close the remote control trans-
tery using the method described in step 1. mitter case.
N00544100064 8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static it works.
electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
5 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
NOTE
You may purchase a replacement battery at
insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade an electric appliance store.
screwdriver into the notch in the remote An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
control transmitter case and use it to open replace the battery for you if you prefer.
the case.
CAUTION
4. Remove the old battery. When the remote control transmitter case is
5. Install a new battery with the +side (A) opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
down. out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.
+ side
Free-hand Advanced Secu-

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
- side
key) (if so equipped)
NOTE N00503101121
Be sure to perform the procedure with the Coin type bat-
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi- tery CR1620 The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
shi mark is not facing you when you open the ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
remote control transmitter case, the buttons liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine
may come out. 6. Close the remote control transmitter
to be started and the operation mode to be
firmly.
changed simply by carrying it.

BK0223400US.book 13

The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
remote control transmitter of the keyless key can be modified as stated below.
entry system. (Keyless entry operations are possible.)
Refer to Free-hand Advanced Security For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry shi Motors dealer.
system on page 5-29. Enabling only the locking and unlocking
of the doors and the liftgate
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the Enabling only the starting of the engine
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
5
vehicle operations such as locking and
unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
NOTE
starting the engine and changing the
The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
waves.
cle, make sure you are carrying the In cases such as the following, operation
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle. A- External transmitter may be improper or unstable.
B- Internal transmitter The vehicle is near a facility that emits
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
WARNING transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
Individuals who use implantable pace- WARNING station or an airport
makers or implantable cardiovascular- Individuals using other electro-medical The key is carried together with other com-
defibrillators should keep away from the apparatus besides implantable pacemak- munication devices such as cellular phones
external and internal transmitters. The ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi- or radios, or electrical appliances such as
electromagnetic waves used in the brillators should check with the computers
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
implantable pacemakers and implantable the effect of the electromagnetic waves metal object
cardiovascular-defibrillators. used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag- A keyless entry system is being used
netic waves may affect the operations of nearby
the electro-medical apparatus. The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
The vehicle is in a location with strong
electromagnetic waves or noise

BK0223400US.book 14
NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
stances.
Refer to To operate without using the
F.A.S.T.-key on page 5-26.
The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
5 with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions. *: Front of the vehicle
Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- NOTE : Operating range
ing reception operations, the reception of When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate down or there are strong electromagnetic
the running down of the battery. Do not place waves or noise in the area, the operating NOTE
near to electrical appliances such as televi- range could decrease or operations could The door or liftgate switch can only be used
sions or computers. become unstable. for locking or unlocking when a matching
F.A.S.T.-key is detected.
Operating range of the The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
Operating range for locking and key is too close to the windshield, door win-
F.A.S.T.-key dows or liftgate.
N00503201177
unlocking the doors and the lift-
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
When a person enters the operating range of
gate feet (70 cm) of the handle of the drivers
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- door, front passengers door or liftgate, the
key and presses the drivers or front passen- The operating range is within about 2.3 feet system may not operate if the key is close to
gers door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate (70 cm) of the handles of the drivers door, the ground or in a high position.
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch, front passenger door and liftgate. If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
verification of the ID code is performed. range, even a person not carrying the
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors
The doors and the liftgate can be locked and
or the liftgate by pressing the drivers or
unlocked and the engine can be started only front passengers door lock/unlock switch,
when the ID codes of the vehicle and the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate
F.A.S.T.-key match. OPEN switch.

BK0223400US.book 15
Operating range for starting the NOTE Drivers and front passengers door lock/unlock
engine and changing the opera- Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle, switches
tion mode it may not be possible to start the engine and

N00503301077
change the operation mode if the key is too
close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key 5
N00503401283
To lock
Liftgate switches
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

drivers or front passengers door lock/unlock
switch (A), or the liftgate LOCK switch (B)
within the operating range to lock all the
doors and the liftgate.
*: Front of the vehicle The turn signal lights will blink once and the
: Operating range buzzer will sound once.
Also refer to Doors locks, Power door

NOTE locks, Liftgate and Power liftgate on
pages 5-33, 5-35, 5-36 and 5-38 respectively. NOTE
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
On the vehicles equipped with the mirror
ing range, it may not be possible to start the
retractor switch, the outside rearview mirrors
engine and change the operation mode if the
automatically retract when all doors and lift-
key is in a storage space such as the glove
gate are locked using the drivers or front
compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
passengers door lock/unlock switch (A) or
or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
the lift gate lock switch (B).
ment.
In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate.

BK0223400US.book 16

Press the drivers door lock/unlock switch Press the front passengers door lock/unlock
NOTE (A) to unlock only the drivers door. switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN switch (C) to
There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
Within about 2 seconds, press the drivers unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
compartment
door lock/unlock switch one more time to
A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. Front passengers door lock/unlock switch
The operation mode is not in OFF.
The liftgate OPEN switch (C) can be used to
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly. Drivers door lock/unlock switch
5 Press the liftgate OPEN switch within about
3 seconds of locking.
If the liftgate OPEN switch is pressed 3 sec-
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked.
The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
Multi-Communication System, the function Liftgate OPEN switch
refer to the separate operation manual. NOTE
On the vehicles equipped with the mirror
To unlock retractor switch, the outside rearview mirrors
automatically extend when the drivers door
is unlocked using the drivers lock/unlock
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the switch (A), front passengers door
operating range, you can unlock the doors lock/unlock switch (B) or the liftgate open
and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key switch (C).
operation. Settings can be changed so that all doors and
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. the liftgate are unlocked automatically by
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the pressing the drivers door lock/unlock switch
buzzer will sound twice. once.
Refer to Setting of door and liftgate unlock
Also refer to Door locks, Power door function on page 5-30.
locks, Liftgate and Power liftgate on
pages 5-33, 5-35, 5-36 and 5-38 respectively.
BK0223400US.book 17
NOTE NOTE Operation of the outside rear-

If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked Functions settings can be modified as stated view mirrors (Vehicles
using the drivers or front passengers door below.
lock/unlock switch when all doors and the See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer equipped with the mirror
liftgate are locked and no doors or the lift- for details. retractor switch)
gate are opened within about 30 seconds, the On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi N00585700027
doors and the liftgate will automatically re- Multi-Communication System, the functions
lock.
The amount of time after unlocking until the
To retract 5
vehicle re-locks automatically can be Activating the operation confirmation func-
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and
Motors dealer for details. during locking, or only during unlocking. liftgate using the LOCK switch, press the
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Deactivating the operation confirmation LOCK switch twice rapidly to retract the out-
Multi-Communication System, the functions function (blinking of the turn signal lights) side rearview mirrors.
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, and buzzer.
refer to the separate operation manual. Modifying the number of blinks in the
In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- operation confirmation function (blinking
To extend
key does not operate. of the turn signal lights).
A door or the liftgate is open or ajar Making the buzzer sound when the Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and
The operation mode is not in OFF. F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger liftgate using the UNLOCK switch, press the
The doors and the liftgate cannot be compartment when all the doors and the UNLOCK switch twice rapidly to return the
unlocked by using the liftgate OPEN switch liftgate are closed. outside rearview mirrors to their extended
for about 3 seconds after locking. positions.
The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho- The outside rearview mirrors are not initially
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details. set to work as described above. If you want
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi them to work as described above, you need to
Multi-Communication System, the function set them so that they do not retract/extend
when the doors and liftgate are
locked/unlocked using the F.A.S.T.-key or the
keyless entry system of the F.A.S.T.-key.
For details, please consult an authorized Mit-

BK0223400US.book 18

On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, it is possible
Engine switch CAUTION
N00513501098 If the engine switch operation is not smooth
to change the setting by means of screen
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
operations.
switch.
Refer to the separate owners manual for other than those registered in advance can be
Immediately contact an authorized Mitsubi-
details. used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
shi Motors dealer.
lizer function)
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
5 NOTE switch can be used to start the engine.
On vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key and equipped NOTE
with the mirror retractor switch, the outside When operating the engine switch, press the
rearview mirrors automatically retract when switch all the way in. If the switch is not
all the doors and liftgate are locked using the fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
F.A.S.T.-key function. operation mode may not change. If the
Refer to Features and controls: Outside engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
rearview mirrors on page 5-57. need to hold the engine switch down.
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- Operation mode of the engine

theft starting system) switch and its function
N00529600114
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-

CAUTION OFF
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- The indicator light (A) will flash orange
when there is a problem or malfunction in The indicator light on the engine switch turns
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. off.
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
Never drive if the indicator light on the The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi- when the selector lever is in any position
a F.A.S.T.-Key registered to the immobi-
ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi other than the P (PARK) position.
lizer system. Motors dealer.
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
cle have been programmed to the vehicles ACC
electronics.
Allows operation of electrical accessories.

BK0223400US.book 19

The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
ACC power auto-cutout function
minates orange.
N00568101023
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed

ON with the operation mode in ACC, the function
automatically cuts out the power for the audio
All electrical accessories can be used. system and other electric devices that can be
The indicator light on the engine switch illu- operated with that mode.
minates green. When the engine switch is pressed while the 5
The indicator light turns off when the engine operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-
is running. plied again to those devices.
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic When the engine is not running, put the oper- It is possible to modify functions as follows:
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation The time until the power cuts out can be
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the mode in ON or ACC for a long time when changed to approximately 60 minutes.
one registered to the immobilizer computer. the engine is not running may cause the bat-
(Refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft The ACC power auto-cutout function can
tery to be discharged, making it impossible
starting system) on page 5-18) be deactivated.
to start the engine.
For details, we recommend you to consult an
When the battery is disconnected, the current
operation mode is memorized. After recon-
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi
Changing the operation mode necting the battery, the memorized mode is
Motors Multi-Communication System,
N00568001035 selected automatically. Before disconnect-
screen operations can be used to make the
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
If you press the engine switch without press- adjustment.
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
ing the brake pedal while the vehicle is sta- Refer to the separate Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
tionary, you can change the operation mode munications System manual for details.
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. is run down.
The operation mode cannot be changed from
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to Oper-
ating range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode on page 5-15.

BK0223400US.book 20
Warning activation
N00503501213
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displays on the information screen in the multi information display in order to pre-
vent mistaken operations or vehicle theft.
When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is also displayed if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key.
Type 1: Color liquid crystal display type Type 2: Mono-color liquid crystal display type
5 Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Display Buzzer Indicator Buzzer
Detection of Inner buzzer No sounds There is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-
failure sounds once key.
Illuminates
Fall of battery Inner buzzer No sounds The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is The warning is not activated if the
voltage sounds once run down. battery is completely dead.
Blinks

BK0223400US.book 21

Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
F.A.S.T.-key Inner buzzer Inner buzzer When the vehicle is parked with The F.A.S.T.-key take-out moni-
take-out mon- sounds once sounds once the operation mode in any mode toring system does not function if
itoring system other than OFF, if you close the the F.A.S.T.-key is removed
Outer Outer door after opening any of the through a window without open-
Blinks
buzzer buzzer doors and taking the F.A.S.T.-key ing a door.
sounds sounds out of the vehicle, a warning is This setting can be changed. 5
intermit- intermit- issued until the F.A.S.T.-key is Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
tently tently detected in the vehicle. Motors dealer for details.
The warning may display even if

the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating
range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode. The
surrounding environment or elec-
tromagnetic waves may make it
impossible to verify the ID codes
of the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
Key lock-in Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in Make sure you have the F.A.S.T.-
prevention sounds once buzzer OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in the key with you before locking the
system sounds passenger compartment, all the doors. Even if you leave the
Outer about 3 sec- doors and the liftgate are closed, F.A.S.T.-key inside the vehicle, it
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- and someone tries to lock the vehi- is possible that the doors will lock
sounds mittently cle by pressing the drivers or depending on the surrounding
about 3 sec- front passengers door lock/unlock environment and wireless signal
onds inter- switch, or the liftgate LOCK conditions.
mittently switch, a warning is issued and
you cannot lock the doors and lift-
gate.

BK0223400US.book 22

Type 1 Type 2
Item Solution Note
Door ajar pre- Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in
vention sys- sounds once buzzer OFF, and someone tries to lock the
tem sounds vehicle by pressing the drivers or
Outer about 3 sec- front passengers door lock/unlock
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- switch, or the liftgate LOCK
5 sounds mittently switch while one of the doors or
about 3 sec- the liftgate is not fully closed, a
onds inter- warning is issued and you cannot
mittently lock the doors and liftgate.
Operation Inner buzzer Outer When the operation mode is in any
mode OFF sounds once buzzer mode other than OFF, all the doors
reminder sys- sounds and the liftgate are closed, and
tem Outer about 3 sec- someone tries to lock the vehicle
Blinks
buzzer onds inter- by pressing the drivers or front
sounds mittently passengers door lock/unlock
about 3 sec- switch, or the liftgate LOCK
onds inter- switch, a warning is issued and
mittently you cannot lock the doors and lift-
gate.

BK0223400US.book 23
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped) To unlock NOTE

N00514301080 When the steering wheel does not unlock,
The following methods can be used to unlock the warning display will appear. Press the
the steering wheel. engine switch again while moving the steer-
To lock ing wheel slightly right and left.
Put the operation mode in ACC.
Warning display
After pressing the engine switch and opera- Start the engine.
tion mode in OFF, when drivers door is 5
opened, the steering wheel is locked.
WARNING
If the engine is stopped while driving, do
NOTE not open a door or press the LOCK switch
When the following operation is performed on the remote control switch until the When the steering wheel lock is abnormal,
with the operation mode in OFF, the steering vehicle stops in a safe place. This could the warning display will appear and the inner
wheel is locked. cause the steering wheel to lock, making it buzzer will sounds. Put the operation mode
Open or close one of the doors. (except the impossible to operate the vehicle. in OFF and then press the lock switch of the
liftgate) F.A.S.T.-key. If the warning will appear
Lock all door and the liftgate by using the again, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
F.A.S.T.-key operation or the remote con- CAUTION Motors dealer.
trol transmitter of the F.A.S.T.-key. Carry the F.A.S.T.-key with you when leav-
warning display
When the drivers door is opened while the ing the vehicle.
steering wheel does not unlock, warning dis- If your vehicle needs to be towed, put the
play will appear and the buzzer sounds to operation mode in ACC to unlock the steer-
alert the steering wheel is unlocked. ing wheel.
Warning display

BK0223400US.book 24

If the engine does not start, wait for a
NOTE while and then attempt to start the engine
CAUTION
If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock, Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
the warning display will appear. Immediately at high speeds until the engine has had a
or starter motor still turning will damage
stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact chance to warm up.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the starter mechanism.
If the engine will not start because the bat-
Warning display tery is weak or discharged, refer to Starting the engine
Jump-starting the engine on page 8-2
5 for instructions. Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
A longer warm up period will only con- cally controlled fuel injection system. This
sume extra fuel. system automatically controls fuel injection.
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- There is no need to depress the accelerator
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant pedal when starting the engine.
Starting and stopping the temperature display starts to move or the To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
low coolant temperature indicator goes between attempts to restart the engine.
engine out. Refer to Engine coolant temperature
N00514601331
display on page 5-134 or Low coolant 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
temperature indicator on page 5-172. seated with seat belts fastened.
Tips for starting 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
The operation mode can be in any mode WARNING firmly with your right foot.
to start the engine. Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
The starter motor will be turning for up to ventilated area any longer than is needed NOTE
approximately 15 seconds if the engine to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
After the engine has not started for a while,
switch is released at once. Pressing the bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
the brake pedal effort needed to start the
engine switch again while the starter extremely poisonous, could build up and
engine may become greater. If this occurs,
cause serious injury or death.
motor is still turning will stop the starter depress the brake pedal more firmly than
motor. usual.
The starter motor will be turning for up to
approximately 30 seconds while the
CAUTION
Do not push-start the vehicle.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the P
engine switch is pressed. (PARK) position.

BK0223400US.book 25

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
NOTE could be flooded with too much gasoline. operation.
The engine can only be started when the
While depressing the brake pedal, push
selector lever is in the P (PARK) or N Using the MIVEC engine
the accelerator pedal all the way down
(NEUTRAL) position.
For safety reasons, the engine should be and hold it there, then press the engine
The MIVEC engine automatically switches
started when the selector lever is in the P switch to crank the engine. If the engine
its intake-valve control between a low-speed
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push
mode and a high-speed mode in accordance
the engine switch to stop cranking the
lock.
engine, and release the accelerator pedal.
with driving conditions for maximum engine 5
performance.
5. Press the engine switch. Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a
6. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- few seconds, and then press the engine
ing displays are functioning properly. switch to crank the engine again while NOTE
depressing the brake pedal, but do not To protect the engine, the high-speed mode
push the accelerator pedal. If the engine may not be selected while the engine coolant
NOTE fails to start, repeat these procedures. If temperature is low. In such a case, the engine
Minor noises may be heard on engine start- revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm
the engine still will not start, contact your
up. These will disappear as the engine warms even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
up. facility of your choice for assistance.
Startability of the engine with an ambient Stopping the engine

When the engine is hard to start N00568201024
temperature of -22 F (-30 C) or lower
When the ambient temperature is -22 F (-30
After several attempts, you may experience WARNING
that the engine still does not start. C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
Do not operate the engine switch while
from a standstill even with the selector lever driving except in an emergency. If the
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such in the D (DRIVE) position. engine is stopped while driving, the brake
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear This phenomenon occurs because the trans- servomechanism will cease to function and
window defogger, are turned off. axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place the power steering system will not func-
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it the selector lever in the P (PARK) position tion and it will require greater manual
there, then crank the engine. Release the and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. effort to operate the steering. This could
accelerator pedal, immediately after the The transaxle will warm up, and you will be result in a serious accident.
engine starts. able to start normally.

BK0223400US.book 26

Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key reminder
after starting the engine or changing the oper-
If you have to bring the engine to an emer-
ation mode.
gency stop while driving, press and hold the Warning display (color liquid crystal display
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press type)
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.
Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
5 in any position other than the P (PARK)
position. If the engine is stopped with the
selector lever in any position other than the
P (PARK) position, the operation mode
Warning light (mono-color liquid crystal dis-
will go to ACC rather than OFF. play type)
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the P (PARK) posi-
tion.
1. Stop the vehicle. NOTE If the operation mode is in OFF and the
Do not insert into the key slot anything other drivers door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam- in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
depressing the brake pedal.
age or a malfunction. warning display and the buzzer buzzing for
3. Move the selector lever to the P
Remove the object or additional key from the approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
(PARK) position, and then press the
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the remove the key.
engine switch to stop the engine.
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
receive the registered ID code from the regis-
If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat- tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start To operate without using the
ing properly and the operation mode may not change. F.A.S.T.-key
The F.A.S.T.-key is fixed in the key slot N00514800017
N00568301041
when inserted in the illustrated direction.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot in the Simply pull out the key to remove it from the
key slot.
Emergency key
instrument panel. Starting the engine and
N00515201158
changing the operation mode should be now
possible. The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
key.

BK0223400US.book 27

When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such that the door is locked, turn the emergency All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the key back to the center and remove it. cle have been programmed to the vehicles
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can electronics.
be used to lock and unlock the drivers door.
To use the emergency key (A), unlock the

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
N00561000042
lock knob (B) and remove it from the
F.A.S.T.-key (C). Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-
grammed to the vehicles electronics can be 5
used to start the vehicle.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle
2- Lock and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-
3- Unlock rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
codes reprogrammed.
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- Additional F.A.S.T.-keys

theft starting system) N00561100014
NOTE N00529600055 To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
Only use the emergency key in an emer-
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig- 2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis-
has run down, replace the battery as soon as nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle ter the ID code to the vehicle.
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- Registering the ID code can be done by your
After using the emergency key, be sure to bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using sold in Canada).
Locking and unlocking the drivers door a F.A.S.T.-Key registered to the immobi- For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
lizer system. low the Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Turn the emergency key toward the front of ming procedure below.
the vehicle to lock the door. After checking

BK0223400US.book 28

If you choose to have your authorized 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.- 7. Release in sequence the LOCK and
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per- UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
code, take your vehicle and all remaining form the following procedure within 30 pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi seconds.) immobilizer display on the information
Motors dealer. 3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key screen in the multi-information display
slot in the illustrated direction. will blink.
NOTE
5 You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. When registration of ID code is complete,
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
immobilizer display will come on for 30
Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- seconds.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
Canada) will sound for 3 seconds.
N00561201197
4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
press the LOCK button during this time. NOTE
system if you have two valid (already regis- F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
5. Release in sequence the LOCK and
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and a blank (not regis- nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
tered) F.A.S.T.-key. before the immobilizer display starts blink-
pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-
ing.
For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the form the following procedure within 30
procedures below. seconds.)
6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press 8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
1. Open the drivers door. the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds key, repeat the process from step 1 after
and press the LOCK button during this the operation mode is put in OFF.
NOTE time. 9. When all F.A.S.T.-keys are registered,
Keep the drivers door open until F.A.S.T.- remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key
key programming is finished. Do not open or slot.
close other doors.

BK0223400US.book 29

3- Power liftgate button (if so equipped) To unlock
NOTE 4- PANIC button
The immobilizer display will go off immedi-
5- Operation indicator light
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF. Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
Perform the operation when the interrupt dis- drivers door only.
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- NOTE
play screen may prevent you from seeing the On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
immobilizer display. tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto- button one more time to unlock all the doors
It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if
the immobilizer display goes off during the
matically retract or extend when the doors
and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using
and liftgate. 5
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
procedure. the remote control transmitter buttons.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
Refer to Features and controls: Outside
rearview mirrors on page 5-57. The front side-marker and parking lights will
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
Keyless entry system Welcome light on page 5-181.
N00515501249
To lock
Press the remote control transmitter buttons NOTE
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate. On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
It can also help you signal for attention by tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
doors and the liftgate.
setting off the panic alarm. matically extend when the UNLOCK button
The turn signal lights will also blink once. (2) is pressed.
NOTE can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- refer to the separate operation manual.
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto- The door and liftgate unlock function can be
matically retract when the LOCK button (1) set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
is pressed. the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the Refer to Setting of door and liftgate unlock
horn will sound once. function on page 5-30.
1- LOCK ( ) button
2- UNLOCK ( ) button

BK0223400US.book 30
Answerback function NOTE Number of

To lock To unlock
chimes
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless Multi-Communication System, the functions Six chimes Two flashes No flash
entry system answerback function can be can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
Seven chimes No flash No flash
changed as required. This is done with the refer to the separate operation manual.
key removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
5 Horn deactivation/reactivation tion
The answerback function can be set in the can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
The answerback function from the turn signal
following three ways. lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.
One chime: The horn will not sound. 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
Two chimes: The horn will sound. 2. Open the drivers door and turn the com-
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the bination headlights and dimmer switch to The buzzer answerback function can be
LOCK button is pressed twice the OFF position. turned ON or OFF as required.
within 1 second. 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
during this time.
NOTE
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- Multi-Communication System, the functions
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of can be adjusted on the screen. For details,
bination headlights and dimmer switch to pressing the LOCK button in step 3. refer to a separate operation manual.
the OFF position.
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- Number of
To lock To unlock
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) chimes
during this time.
Setting of door and liftgate unlock
One chime One flash Two flashes
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and function
Two chimes One flash No flash
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of N00544601095
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Three chimes No flash Two flashes The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Four chimes Two flashes One flash set to the following two conditions.
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
Five chimes No flash One flash tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

BK0223400US.book 31

condition of the door and liftgate unlock
Operating the power liftgate NOTE
function.
N00579500020 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
After unlocking the doors and the liftgate, the all doors and the liftgate are locked and no
Number
Condition power liftgate can be operated by pressing the doors or the liftgate are opened within about
of chimes 30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
power liftgate button (3).
All doors and the liftgate automatically re-lock.
One chime Refer to Power liftgate on page 5-38.
unlock On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
Two
Drivers door unlock only Using the panic alarm
5
chimes N00544701067 refer to the separate operation manual.
If the following conditions are observed after
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
2. Open the drivers door and turn the com- ton on the remote control transmitter, the
tion as follows: battery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be
replaced.
the OFF position. 1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- 1 second. or unlocked.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) 2. The headlights will blink on and off and The panic alarm cannot be operated.
during this time. the horn will sound intermittently for The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
4. Release in sequence the LOCK and about 3 minutes. come on.
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. the remote control transmitter. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
replacement.
NOTE NOTE If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi The indicator light (5) comes on each time a
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
Multi-Communication System, the functions button is pressed.
key can be programmed for your vehicle.
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
refer to the separate operation manual. To use the new remote control transmitters, it
feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
is necessary to register the key with both the
may change if your vehicle is near a TV
transmitting tower, a power station, or a
tem.
radio station.
Also refer to Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-
key programming on page 5-28.

BK0223400US.book 32

4. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
General information Procedure for replacing the up.
N00562001062
remote control transmitter bat-
+ side
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- tery
quency subject to Federal Communications N00562101076
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For electricity from your body by touching a - side
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com- metal grounded object.
5 plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade Coin type bat-
Operation is subject to the following two con- tery CR2032
screwdriver into the notch in the case and
ditions. use it to open the case.
This device may not cause harmful
interference. 5. Close the case firmly.
This device must accept any interference 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
received, including interference that it works.
may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
CAUTION You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
approved by the manufacturer for compli- An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
ance could void the users authority to oper- replace the battery for you if you prefer.
ate the equipment.
NOTE
Be sure to perform the procedure with the
CAUTION
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi- When the remote control transmitter case is
shi mark is not facing you when you open the opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
case, the transmitter may come out. out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.
3. Remove the old battery.

BK0223400US.book 33
Door locks
Door locks To lock and unlock with the key NOTE

N00509201544 (drivers door) When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the drivers door will be locked or
WARNING Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to unlocked.
Make sure all doors are tightly closed and lock the door. After checking that the door is To lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, use
locked while driving. the power door lock switch, the keyless entry
locked, turn the key back to the center and
Locked doors, in combination with the system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
remove it.
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk Refer to Power door locks on page 5-35,
Keyless entry system on pages 5-7 and
5
of ejection in an accident.
5-29, and To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
Locked doors can help keep passengers,
key on page 5-15.
especially small children, from opening
doors and falling out of moving vehicles. In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the drivers door can be locked and unlocked
Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
using the emergency key.
from gaining access to your vehicle when
Refer to Emergency key on page 5-26.
you slow or come to a stop.
Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
1- Insert or remove the key
injury or death due to heat stroke.
2- Lock
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
3- Unlock
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
When closing a door, make sure that the
door is fully closed and the door-ajar
warning display goes out on the informa-
tion screen on the multi-information dis-
play. If the door is ajar it could open while
driving and cause an accident.

BK0223400US.book 34
Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- display. (Color liquid crystal display type
To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door. only)
the inside
Move the lock knob to the lock position to Lock out protection
lock the door. N00517301052
All doors should be kept locked while driv- If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-
ing. ation mode is in any mode other than OFF,
5 when you push the lock knob forward with
the drivers door or passengers door open,
the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position.
Operation mode ON reminder

Key reminder system (except system (vehicles equipped with
for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)
F.A.S.T.-key) N00503801157
N00549601250
1- Lock
2- Unlock
The drivers door can be unlocked without

using the lock knob by pulling on the inside If the drivers door is opened while the engine
door handle. is stopped and the operation mode is in any
If the ignition switch is turned off and the
mode other than OFF, the operation mode ON
drivers door is opened with the key in the
To lock the door without using buzzer will sound intermittently to remind
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
you put the operation mode in OFF.
the key sound intermittently to remind you to remove
The warning display will be displayed on the
the key.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked information screen in the multi-information
The warning display will be displayed on the
position. display. (Color liquid crystal display type
information screen in the multi-information
only)

BK0223400US.book 35
Power door locks
Power door locks To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors and liftgate
N00509301617 and liftgate N00563401119
You can select the functions to unlock the

NOTE
doors and liftgate either using the ignition
When locking or unlocking with the key on
Using the power door lock switch switch position or the engine switch, or
the drivers door, only the drivers door will
lock or unlock. using the selector lever position.
These functions are not activated when the
Repeated continuous operation between lock
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
5
and unlock could activate the power door
locking systems built-in protection circuit, vate or deactivate these functions, please
and prevent the system from operating. If contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper- dealer.
ating the power door lock switch.
Using the ignition switch or the

engine switch
1- Lock All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

2- Unlock the ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
LOCK position or the operation mode is
put in OFF.
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked
or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the drivers or the front passenger Using the selector lever position
door.
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the selector lever is moved to the P (PARK)
position with the ignition switch or the opera-
tion mode in ON.

BK0223400US.book 36
Child safety locks for rear door

door can be opened using the inside door han-
Child safety locks for rear dle.
door
N00509401298
WARNING
Always keep the doors tightly closed and
locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen-
5 ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
NOTE
On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi Liftgate (except for vehicles
can be adjusted on the screen. For details, 1- To lock equipped with the power
refer to a separate operation manual. 2- To release liftgate)
N00510101282
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-

gers, especially children, from opening the WARNING
rear door using the inside door handle. It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro- open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
enter the passenger compartment.
vided on each rear door.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the cause unconsciousness and even death.
rear door cannot be opened using the inside When opening and closing the liftgate,
door handle. make sure that there are no people nearby
To open the rear door when the child safety and be careful not to hit your head or
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- pinch your hands, neck, etc.
side door handle. If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift-
When the lever is in the release position (2), gate, remove it before opening the liftgate.
the child safety lock is released and the rear Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close
due to the weight of the snow or ice.

BK0223400US.book 37
Liftgate (except for vehicles equipped with the power liftgate)
WARNING NOTE
When opening the liftgate, always fully On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
open it. A partially opened liftgate can tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
unexpectedly close due to its own weight. matically extend when the liftgate and all
When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the doors are unlocked using the liftgate open
effort required to open or close the liftgate switch (A).
may be greater or less than expected.
The liftgate may also open or close more
quickly.
To close 5
1. Pull the liftgate grip (B) downward as
illustrated and release it before the liftgate
CAUTION closes completely. Gently close the lift-
Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when CAUTION gate from the outside so that it is com-
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from Make sure there is no one standing nearby
the exhaust could lead to burns. pletely closed.
when opening the liftgate.
To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure
that area above and behind the liftgate is
clear before opening it.
NOTE
The liftgate cannot be raised if it is not raised
immediately after pressing the liftgate open
NOTE switch.
Locking and unlocking the doors by using If this happens, raise the liftgate again after
power door locks (driver and front passenger pressing the liftgate open switch.
side), keyless entry system, or F.A.S.T.-key It is not possible to open the liftgate while
operation (vehicles equipped with the the battery is disconnected. If necessary, use
F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift- the inside liftgate release.
gate.
When the battery is reconnected, all doors
and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them CAUTION
before trying to open the liftgate. To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
To open attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (B).
1. After unlocking, push the liftgate open
switch (A) and raise the liftgate.

BK0223400US.book 38
Power liftgate (if so equipped)
CAUTION Power liftgate (if so equipped) WARNING

Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con- N00575900026 When opening and closing the power lift-
firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate gate, make sure that there are no people
opens while driving the vehicle, objects Before operating the power liftgate, unlock nearby and be careful not to hit your head
stored in the luggage compartment could fall the power liftgate by pushing the power door or pinch your hands, neck, etc.
out into the road. lock switch or the unlock button on the key- Make sure the power liftgate is completely
less entry system or F.A.S.T.-key. open before loading and unloading lug-
5 NOTE
Refer to Keyless entry system, Free-hand gage.
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
Gas struts (C) are installed in the locations key) and Power door locks on pages 5-7,
illustrated in order to support the liftgate. 5-12 and 5-35 respectively.
CAUTION
Please observe the following in order to pre- Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
vent damage or faulty operation: loading and unloading luggage.
Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts Operating the power liftgate The heat from the exhaust could cause burns.
when closing the liftgate. N00576000037 Before driving, make sure the power liftgate
Do not attach any plastic material, tape, is securely closed. If the liftgate opens while
etc., to the gas struts. WARNING driving, objects stored in the luggage com-
Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts. The luggage area was not designed for partment could fall out into the road.
Do not hang objects on the gas struts. people to ride in. Do not let your children Do not install any accessory other than Mit-
ride in or play in the luggage area. Riding subishi Motors Genuine parts on the power
or playing in the luggage area could result liftgate. The weight of the accessory may
in a serious accident and/or injury. cause faulty operation of the liftgate.
Before driving, make sure the power lift- Before closing the liftgate, make sure there is
gate is securely closed. no foreign object around the striker (A).
If you drive with the power liftgate open, If a foreign object matter gets into the striker,
exhaust gas may enter the vehicle and it could prevent the power liftgate from clos-
cause carbon monoxide poisoning. ing securely.
To avoid injury, the power liftgate should
not be operated by children.

BK0223400US.book 39
Automatic operation CAUTION

N00576500029 Do not apply excessive force to the power
When the power liftgate main switch (A) is liftgate when opening or closing it. Doing so
could damage to the power liftgate.
on, the power liftgate can be operated using
either the power liftgate switch on the
F.A.S.T.-key, the drivers side power liftgate
switch or the open/close switches on the NOTE
power liftgate. Do not start the engine while the power lift- 5
gate is operating. The sudden operation pre-
Refer to Operating conditions on page
vention mechanism could operate, making
5-40. the power liftgate stop intermittently while it
moves.
NOTE The power liftgate cannot be opened when
When opening and closing the power lift- the battery is discharged or disconnected.
gate, do not place your hands near the arm The liftgate must be then opened using the
(B) and gas struts (C). inside liftgate release.
To prevent damage to the gas struts: Refer to Inside liftgate release on page
Do not push or pull on the gas struts. 5-44.
Do not wrap, attach or hang anything on the If the keyless entry system or close switch is
gas struts. operated when the power liftgate main
switch is off, the warning buzzer sounds 4
times to notify the driver that the power lift-
gate cannot be operated.
The power liftgate does not operate normally
WARNING under the following conditions:
To avoid accidental or unintended opera- When parked on an incline
tion of the power liftgate, turn off the In strong winds
power liftgate main switch when not oper- When the power liftgate is covered with
ating the power liftgate. snow
Do not turn off the power liftgate main Repeated continuous opening and closing
switch while the power liftgate is opening operation of the power liftgate will activate a
or closing. built-in protection circuit and switch the
power liftgate to manual operation.

BK0223400US.book 40

The power liftgate is completely closed. <Using the drivers side power liftgate switch
NOTE The power liftgate is unlocked. or the close switch on the power liftgate>
If one of the power liftgate switches is oper-
ated while the power liftgate is operating, the The operation mode is in ON with the
<Using the open switch on the power lift-
power liftgate will reverse and return to the selector lever in the P (PARK) position,
gate>
full open or close position.
or the operation mode is in ACC or OFF.
If the selector lever is moved from P The power liftgate is unlocked. The power liftgate is completely open.
(PARK) position to another position while
The F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating Nothing is touching the auto reverse sen-
5 the power liftgate is operating or completely
open, a warning buzzer will sound for
range (2.3 feet (70 cm) from the power sors on the power liftgate.
approximately 10 seconds to notify the liftgate open switch) and the power lift-
gate is locked.
driver that the power liftgate is open. Operating the power liftgate using
If the battery or fuse is replaced while the
The power liftgate can be closed automati- the F.A.S.T.-key or the drivers
power liftgate is open, it cannot be closed
automatically. cally when all of the following conditions are side power liftgate switch
In this case close the power liftgate manu- met.
ally. <Using the F.A.S.T.-key> After unlocking the doors and the power lift-
gate, the power liftgate can be operated by
The operation mode is in OFF.
Operating conditions The power liftgate is completely open.
pressing the switch (A) of the F.A.S.T.-key or
N00576100038
the drivers side power liftgate switch (B).
Nothing is touching the auto reverse sen-
The power liftgate can be opened automati- sors (A) on the power liftgate.
cally when all of the following conditions are
met.
<Using the F.A.S.T.-key>
The operation mode is in OFF.

The power liftgate is completely closed.
The power liftgate is unlocked.
<Using the drivers side power liftgate

switch>
The operation mode is in ON with the

selector lever in the P (PARK) position.
BK0223400US.book 41

While open: The warning buzzer sounds If the drivers side power liftgate switch is
and the power liftgate com- pressed once while the power liftgate is oper-
pletely closes. ating, the warning buzzer will sound and the
If the power liftgate switch is pressed once power liftgate will move in the direction
while the power liftgate is operating, the opposite to the one in which it was operating.
warning buzzer sounds and the liftgate will
reverse and return to the full open or closed WARNING
position. When operating the power liftgate, make 5
sure that there are no people near the
NOTE power liftgate and that there is sufficient
If the power liftgate switch is pressed 3 or space behind and above the vehicle.
more times in a row, the power liftgate may
not operate normally.
If this occurs, wait a short time before again Opening the power liftgate using
pressing the power liftgate switch twice. the open switch
<Using the drivers side power liftgate The power liftgate can be opened by pressing
switch> the open switch (C).
If the drivers side power liftgate switch is
pressed for more than 1 second, the power
liftgate will operate after the buzzer sounds
and the hazard warning flasher blinks.
<Using the F.A.S.T.-key> The power liftgate operates as follows.
If the power liftgate switch is pressed twice in
a row, the power liftgate operates after the While closed: The warning buzzer sounds
warning buzzer sounds and the hazard warn- and the power liftgate com-
ing flasher blinks. pletely opens.
The power liftgate operates as follows: While open: The warning buzzer sounds
and the power liftgate com-
While closed: The warning buzzer sounds pletely closes.
and the power liftgate com-
pletely opens. If the open switch is pressed while the power
liftgate and all doors are unlocked, the power

BK0223400US.book 42

liftgate will open after the warning buzzer If the close switch on the power liftgate is
sounds and the hazard warning flasher blinks. pressed, the power liftgate will close after the
warning buzzer sounds 3 times and the hazard
NOTE warning flasher blinks 2 times.
When you are carrying the F.A.S.T.-key with
If the close switch is pressed once while the
the power liftgate is locked, the power lift- power liftgate is closing, the warning buzzer
gate can be opened by pressing the open sounds once and the power liftgate opens.
5 switch even if the power liftgate is locked.
For vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac- NOTE
If the close switch is again pressed once
matically extend when the power liftgate and while the power liftgate is operating in the
all doors are unlocked using the liftgate open
opening direction, the warning buzzer will
switch (C).
sound once and the power liftgate will close.
WARNING
The auto reverse mechanism will not oper-
ate just before the power liftgate becomes
Closing the power liftgate using Auto reverse
fully closed. Therefore, be careful not to
trap a hand, part of your body or an
the close switch N00576200026 object at this time.
If the auto reverse sensors (A) on either side When the power liftgate is closed manu-
The power liftgate can be closed by pressing of the power liftgate detect that something is ally, the auto reverse mechanism will not
the close switch (D) on the power liftgate. being trapped by the closing power liftgate, operate.
the warning buzzer will sound once and the If the auto reverse mechanism has been
liftgate will automatically reverse direction repeatedly activated, the power liftgate
may stop and then, depending on its posi-
and return to the full open position.
tion, may abruptly open or close. Once the
power liftgate is completely closed or
open, automatic operation will be
resumed.

BK0223400US.book 43
CAUTION Sudden operation prevention

Do not damage the auto reverse sensor, when mechanism
loading or unloading luggage. If the sensor is
damaged, the power liftgate will not close
If the engine is started while the power lift-
automatically.
gate is operating, the power liftgate may
intermittently move or stop moving to pre-
vent the power liftgate from moving abruptly.
Drop prevention mechanism Approximately 10 seconds after the power 5
liftgate has fully closed or opened, power lift-
After the power liftgate has opened automati- gate operation will again resume.
cally, if it is detected that the power liftgate is
dropping due to factors such as accumulated
CAUTION WARNING
snow, the power liftgate will close automati- When the power liftgate is closed manu-
The auto reverse will not operate while the
cally. ally, the auto reverse mechanism will not
sudden operation prevention mechanism is
A warning buzzer will sound continuously operate even if something is trapped
activated.
while the drop prevention mechanism is oper- under the liftgate.
ating.
Manual operation CAUTION
NOTE N00576300030
Make sure there is no one around the power
If snow has accumulated on the power lift-
When the power liftgate main switch is off, liftgate when opening it.
gate, remove it before operating the power
liftgate. the power liftgate can be manually opened
Do not install any accessory other than Mit- and closed.
subishi Motors Genuine parts on the power NOTE
liftgate. The drop prevention mechanism
After unlocking the power liftgate, push the The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
may be activated due to the weight of the power liftgate open switch (A) and pull up raised immediately after pressing the power
accessory. the power liftgate. liftgate open switch.
The drop prevention mechanism could be If this happens, raise the liftgate again after
activated if you attempt to close the liftgate pressing the liftgate open switch.
manually immediately after the power lift-
gate has been completely opened automati-
cally.

BK0223400US.book 44
Inside liftgate release
NOTE CAUTION
When the battery is discharged or discon- Do not fully close the power liftgate with
nected, the power liftgate cannot be opened your hand still on the power liftgate grip.
even manually. At that time, the liftgate can Doing so could trap and injure your hand or
be opened only by using the inside liftgate arm.
release. Refer to Inside liftgate release on
page 5-44.
Power liftgate easy closer
5 To close the power liftgate, pull the power N00576400028
liftgate grip (B) downward and release it The power liftgate easy closer is designed to
before the power liftgate is completely help the power liftgate close securely.
closed, and then gently close the power lift- If the power liftgate is closed to a position
gate from the outside. where it is detected as being ajar, it closes NOTE
automatically. The power liftgate easy closer operates even
when the power liftgate main switch is OFF.
Repeated continuous operation of the handle
WARNING could activate the protection circuit and tem-
Keep your hands and fingers away from porarily prevent the power liftgate easy
the power liftgate while the power liftgate closer from operating.
easy closer is activated. To return the If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before
power liftgate to the slightly ajar position operating the power liftgate easy closer
while the power liftgate easy closer is acti- again.
vated, press the power liftgate open
switch.
Inside liftgate release

CAUTION CAUTION N00523101084
Do not touch the latch (A) on the inside of The inside liftgate release is designed to pro-
The auto reverse mechanism will not operate
the power liftgate. The power liftgate easy vide a way to open the liftgate if the battery is
when the power liftgate is closed manually.
Therefore be especially careful not to trap a closer could operate and catch your fingers. dead or disconnected.
hand or finger. The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is
mounted on the liftgate.

BK0223400US.book 45
Theft-alarm system
Liftgate Power liftgate CAUTION

Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
Armed stage
N00510301200 5
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.
You and your family should familiarize your- 3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the
selves with the location and operation of the
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the
liftgate release lever.
CAUTION ignition switch.
Always keep the release lever lid on the lift- For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
To open gate closed when driving so that your lug- key, put the operation mode in OFF.
gage cannot accidentally bump the lever and 2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate. open the liftgate. 3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key operation.
Theft-alarm system Arm the system and leave
N00510201267
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide

protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the armed stage, the sec-
ond is the alarm stage, and third is the dis-
armed stage. If triggered, the system
provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate. nals.

BK0223400US.book 46
Theft-alarm system
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
on the instrument panel flashes for confir-
NOTE NOTE
The system will be disarmed if, while the For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
mation.
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol- sensor, if the turn signal lights do not flash
lowing operation is performed. after the locking and unlocking operation
Except for vehicles equipped with the using the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned F.A.S.T.-key operation, the theft-alarm sys-
to the ON position. tem may be malfunctioning.
5 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The system will not be armed if a door, the If the answerback function (flashing of the
liftgate or the engine hood is not completely turn signal lights by locking and unlocking
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as the doors and the liftgate) is deactivated, the
described above. turn signal lights do not flash after the lock-
The theft-alarm system can be activated ing and unlocking operation.
For information on the answerback function,
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
4. The system has entered the armed stage refer to Keyless entry system on pages 5-7
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
after about 20 seconds, when the theft- and 5-29 and To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes system to the system armed mode while peo-
key on page 5-15.
slower. ple are riding in the vehicle. For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to sensor, the theft-alarm system could be acti-
flash while the system is in the armed vated in the following situations.
stage. Using a car washer.
Taking the vehicle on a ferry.
NOTE Parking in an automated car park.
If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm Leaving someone or a pet in the vehicle.
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can- Leaving a window or the sunroof open.
not enter the armed stage. Leaving an unstable object such as a stuffed
The system enters the armed stage about 20 toy or accessory in the vehicle.
seconds after the engine hood is closed.
The system will be disarmed if, while the
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all
doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
operation.

BK0223400US.book 47
Theft-alarm system
Attempt an unauthorized moving of the
NOTE vehicle. (the vehicle inclination detection
NOTE
During a continuous impact or vibration by The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
function)
hail, thunder, etc. utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
Detect a motion in the vehicle. (the inte-
According to the situations, deactivate the automatically shut off to save battery power.
vehicle inclination detection function and rior intrusion detection function) The system will then be rearmed until the
the interior intrusion detection function. Disconnect the battery terminal. proper disarming step is taken.
Refer to Theft-alarm system: To deactivate The alarm will resume if unauthorized
the vehicle inclination detection function
and the interior intrusion detection func-
Type of alarm actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.
5
N00582500024
tion on page 5-47.
For vehicles equipped with the interior alarm When the alarm is activated:
sensor, the sensitivity of the interior intru- Alarm deactivation
sion detection function can be adjusted. For 1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
further details, please contact an authorized utes. N00582600025
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. After 3 minutes the headlights automati- The alarm can be deactivated in the following
cally shut off. ways.
2. The horn (the siren for vehicles equipped
Alarm stage with the interior alarm sensor) will sound By using the keyless entry system or the
N00510401214
intermittently for 3 minutes. F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol- the doors and liftgate.
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
the system is armed. Horn or siren sounds! tion or put the operation mode in ON.
Headlights blink on and off!
One of the doors and the liftgate is opened
To deactivate the vehicle inclina-
without using the keyless entry system or
the F.A.S.T.-key operation. tion detection function and the
The engine hood is opened. interior intrusion detection func-
tion (vehicles equipped with the
Also, for vehicles equipped with the interior interior alarm sensor)
alarm sensor, the alarm will be activated if N00582700026
any of the following occur.
The vehicle inclination detection function and
the interior intrusion detection function can

BK0223400US.book 48
Theft-alarm system
be deactivated when parking in automated car
parks or leaving pets in the vehicle.
NOTE Disarm...by using the keyless entry system or
The function will be activated again if the F.A.S.T.-key operation
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the following operation is performed.
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked
ignition switch. using the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
If the ignition switch is turned to the ON
key, put the operation mode in OFF.
5 2. Raise and hold the wiper and washer
or ACC position or the operation mode is
put in ON or ACC.
switch to the MIST position for about 3
seconds. The buzzer will sound once and
the function will be deactivated.
Disarmed stage NOTE
N00510501172
To activate the function again, raise and hold If the UNLOCK button on the remote control
the wiper and washer switch to the MIST The system will be disarmed if the following transmitter, or the drivers or front passen-
position for about 3 seconds. operation is performed. gers door lock/unlock switch is pressed
The buzzer will sound twice and the function when all doors and the liftgate are closed and
will be activated. Except for vehicles equipped with the no door is opened within approximately 30
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.
turned to the ON position. The amount of time after unlocking until the
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- vehicle relocks automatically can be
key, if the operation mode is put in ON. adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by Motors dealer for details.
using the keyless entry system or the On a vehicle equipped with a Mitsubishi
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
refer to a separate operation manual.
Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
ing procedure.

BK0223400US.book 49
Power window control
Testing the theft-alarm system Power window control WARNING

N00510601144 N00510800383 Never leave the vehicle without carrying
Use the following procedure to test the sys- the key.
tem: Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
1. Lower the drivers window.
2. Arm the system as explained in Armed
stage. 5
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
comes on and flashes for approximately
20 seconds.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the
drivers side door by using the inside door
lock knob. Open the door. 1- Open (down)
5. Make sure that the horn (the siren for 2- Close (up)
vehicles equipped with the interior alarm
sensor) sounds intermittently and the
headlights blink when a door is opened.
NOTE
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors Never try to operate the main switch and
sub-switch in different directions at the same
and the liftgate by using the keyless entry
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation. tion.
Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

BK0223400US.book 50
Power window control

stopped. However, once the drivers door or
Main switch Sub switch the front passengers door is opened, the
N00548701137 N00548800102
power windows cannot be operated.
The main switch located on the drivers door
can be used to operate all the windows. Lock switch
A window can be opened or closed by operat- N00549001166
ing the corresponding switch. When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
5 Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main
If the drivers door window switch is fully switch will open or close only the drivers
pressed down/pulled up, the drivers door door window. To unlock the switch, press it
window automatically opens/closes com- again.
pletely.
If you want to stop the window movement, 1- Close
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc- 2- Open
tion.
Each sub-switch can be used for its own pas-
senger door window, unless the drivers win-
dow lock switch is activated.
NOTE
The rear door windows open only half-way.
1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock
N00548901155
1- Drivers door window switch The power windows can be run up or down
2- Front passenger door window switch when the ignition switch or the operation
3- Left rear door window switch mode is in ON.
4- Right rear door window switch The door windows can be opened or closed
5- Lock switch for a 30-second period after the engine is

BK0223400US.book 51
Sunroof (if so equipped)
WARNING CAUTION What to do if you hear wind

Before driving with a child in the vehicle, The safety mechanism is deactivated while buffeting when driving
be sure to lock the window switch to make the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- N00551400014
it inoperative. Children tampering with cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the switch could easily trap their hands or the door window opening. Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
heads in the window. Do not deliberately trap your hands or head ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
in order to activate the safety mechanism. or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result. rear door windows down or partially opened.
5
Safety mechanism (Drivers
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
door window only) mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
N00528801129
NOTE door windows open, open the front door win-
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the The safety mechanism can be activated if the dows as well as the rear door windows to
door window is automatically lowered a little. driving conditions or other circumstances minimize the condition.
After the obstruction is removed, pull up the cause the door window to be subjected to a
switch again to close the door window. physical shock similar to that caused by
trapped hand or head. Sunroof (if so equipped)
If the battery terminals are disconnected or
WARNING the fuse for power window is replaced, the
N00511001682
If the battery terminals are disconnected safety mechanism will be cancelled and the The sunroof can be opened and closed with
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, door window will not automatically the ignition switch or the operation mode in
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. open/close completely. ON.
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
injury could result. drivers door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed.
Following this, release the switch, raise the
CAUTION switch once again and hold it in this condi-
The safety mechanism is deactivated just tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You
before the door window closes. This allows should now be able to operate the drivers
the door window to close completely. There- door window in the normal function.
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.

BK0223400US.book 52
Sunroof (if so equipped)

After that, the sunroof can be set the initial-
To open NOTE ized state in the following procedure.
Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati- ing the sunshade. 1. Move the sunroof in slide open position.
cally opens. 2. Press the tilt up switch (2) continually in
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. 10 seconds.
Sunroof timer function 3. The sunroof will be moved to tilt up posi-
NOTE tion automatically bit by bit.
5 The sunroof can be operated when the igni- 4. The initialize is completed when the sun-
The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven tion switch or the operation mode is in ON. roof is stopped at tilt up position.
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf- The sunroof can be opened or closed for a 30- If the sunroof does not return to normal,
feting is lower than with the sunroof fully second period after the engine is stopped. consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
open. However, when the drivers door or the front dealer.
passenger door is opened, the sunroof cannot
be operated. Turn on the ignition switch again NOTE
To close to operate. The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati- Safety mechanism cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
cally closes. cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. hand or head.
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
To tilt up cause the sunroof to re-open automatically. CAUTION
The opened sunroof will become operational The safety mechanism is deactivated while
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear of the again after a few seconds. the switch (2) is pressed. Therefore be espe-
sunroof raises for ventilation. cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or the sunroof opening.
more times consecutively, normal closing of Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
To tilt down the sunroof will be aborted. in order to activate the safety mechanism.
As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
Press the switch (3). closed bit by bit until the sunroof is com- roof could result.
pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the
switch (2).
BK0223400US.book 53
Parking brake
Sunshade NOTE NOTE

When leaving the vehicle unattended, be Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
The sunshade can be opened or closed manu- sure to close the sunroof and carry the key. engine turned off will run down the battery.
ally while the sunroof is closed. Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro- Operate the sunroof only while the engine is
zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme running.
cold).
Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
Parking brake
sunroof or roof opening edge.
N00511401400
5
Do not apply any force that may cause dam-
age to the sunroof. To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
Release the switch when the sunroof has plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
reached a completely open or completely and then move the selector lever to the P
closed position. (PARK) position.
If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-
roof switch is operated, release the switch
and check whether something is trapped by
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
CAUTION sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Do not attempt to close the sunshade when
the sunroof is opened. Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski
carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend-
Be careful that hands are not trapped when
ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier,
closing the sunshade.
the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
sunroof is tilted up.
Be sure to close the sunroof completely
WARNING when washing the vehicle or when leaving
Do not stick your head, hands or anything the vehicle.
else in the sunroof opening. Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
Before operating the sunroof, make sure (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
fingers, etc.). a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
Never leave a child unreliable adults unat- After washing the vehicle or after rain be
tended inside the vehicle. sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.

BK0223400US.book 54
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
To apply To deactivate CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
5 tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
button at the end of hand grip. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
ignition switch is in the ON position, 3- Push the lever downward.
Warning display
the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on. When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
Before driving, be sure to release the and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
parking brake. downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
Steering wheel height and

reach adjustment
N00511501241
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position, move the lever upward or down-
ward while moving the steering wheel to the
desired position.

BK0223400US.book 55
Inside rearview mirror
Type 1 To adjust the vertical mirror

1
position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
to adjust its position.
2
Type 2 5
1- Wheel lock
2- Release
Type 3
WARNING
After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
is secured in the locked (1) position.
Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
WARNING
Inside rearview mirror Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
N00511601356
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
making any seat adjustments so as to have a ing.
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the
view through the rear window.

BK0223400US.book 56
Inside rearview mirror
To adjust the mirror position To reduce the glare Type 2

It is possible to move the mirror up/down and When the headlights of the vehicles behind
left/right to adjust its position. you are very bright, the reflection factor of
Type 1
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the to reduce the glare.
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
5 reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the
1- Daytime position reflection factor of the mirror is automatically
2- Night position changed.
NOTE
Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.

BK0223400US.book 57
Outside rearview mirrors
Type 3 NOTE WARNING

If you want to stop automatic mode, press Your passengers side mirror is convex.
When the headlights of the vehicles behind the switch (3) and the indicator will go off. The objects you see in the mirror will look
you are very bright, the reflection factor of To return to automatic mode, press the smaller and farther away than they
the rearview mirror is automatically changed switch again or perform the following opera- appear in a regular flat mirror.
to reduce the glare. tion. Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free- tance of vehicles following you when
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
changing lanes.
5
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
after turning to OFF or ACC position.
key)]
Put the operation mode in ON after putting
the operation mode in OFF.

Normally, use the automatic mode. When the N00512201232
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
WARNING
NOTE Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner view mirrors while driving. This can be
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity dangerous.
could result. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.

BK0223400US.book 58

4- Left For vehicles equipped with the mirror
To adjust the mirror position
retractor switch
N00549101167
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

NOTE
After adjusting, return the lever to the
when the ignition switch is in the ON or Retracting and extending the mir-
(OFF) position.
ACC position or the operation mode is put
rors using the mirror retractor
in ON or ACC.
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the switch
5 mirror you wish to adjust. To retract the mirror
N00549201113
With the ignition switch in the ON or
The outside mirror can be retracted towards ACC position or the operation mode in ON
Except for vehicles equipped
with the mirror retractor
the side window to prevent damage when or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to
switch parking in tight locations. retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the
mirrors to their original positions.
Except for vehicles equipped with the
After placing the ignition switch in the
mirror retractor switch
LOCK position or the operation mode in
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi- OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the
Vehicles equipped with the
cle with your hand to retract it in. When mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for
mirror retractor switch about 30 seconds.
extending the mirror, pull it out towards the
front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in
place.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

tion.
1- Up
2- Down
3- Right
BK0223400US.book 59
CAUTION Retracting and extending the mir- NOTE

It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors rors without using the mirror Automatically extend when the ignition
by hand. After retracting a mirror using the retractor switch (automatic exten- switch is turned to the ON position or the
mirror retractor switch, however, you should operation mode is put in ON with the
extend it by using the switch again, not by
sion function) drivers door closed, and automatically
hand. If you extended the mirror by hand retract when the ignition switch is turned to
after retracting it using the switch, it would [Vehicles with the keyless entry system] the LOCK position or the operation mode
not properly lock in position. As a result, it
could move because of the wind or vibration
The mirrors automatically retract or extend is put in OFF with the drivers door opened.
Automatically extend when the vehicle
5
when the doors are locked or unlocked using
while you are driving, taking away your rear- the remote control switches of the keyless speed reaches approximately 19 mph (30
ward visibility. km/h).
entry system.
Refer to Keyless entry system on page 5-7. Deactivate the automatic extension func-
tion.
[Vehicles with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
NOTE rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T-key)]
Be careful not to get your hands trapped
while a mirror is moving.
The mirrors automatically retract or extend Door mirror heater (if so equipped)
when the doors are locked or unlocked using N00549301260
If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
the remote control switches or the F.A.S.T-
after hitting a person or object, you may not When the rear window defogger switch is
be able to return it to its original position
key.
Refer to Keyless entry system on page 5-29 pressed with the engine running, the outside
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-
or To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key on rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
pens, push the mirror retractor switch to
place the mirror in its retracted position and page 5-15. Current will flow through the heater element
then push the switch again to return the mir- inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
ror to its original position. condensation.
NOTE The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
Functions can be modified as stated below. the defogger is on.
to operate as intended, please refrain from
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as The heater will be turned off automatically in
Motors dealer.
this action can result in burn-out of the mir- about 15 to 20 minutes depending on the out-
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
ror motor circuits. side temperature.
Communication System, screen operations
can be used to make the adjustment. Refer to
the separate owners manual for details.

BK0223400US.book 60
Ignition switch
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key):
ACC
Engine switch on page 5-18.
Allows operation of electrical accessories
[Except for vehicles equipped with the with the engine off.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key).]
ON
5 Type 1 Type 2 All accessories can be used.
START
NOTE
The door mirror heater can be turned on
Engages the starter. Release the key when the
automatically.
For further information, please contact your
engine starts.It will automatically return to
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the ON position.
Communication System, screen operations NOTE
can be used to make the adjustment.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
Refer to the separate owners manual for
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
details. LOCK (Type 2) which the transponder inside the key sends
must match the one registered to the immobi-
The engine is off and the steering wheel is lizer computer. (Refer to Electronic immo-
Ignition switch locked. The key can be inserted and removed bilizer on page 5-4.)
N00512401696 only when the switch is in this position.
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- ACC power auto-cutout func-
OFF (Type 1)
key).] tion
For information on operations for vehicles N00539601071
The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the
removed only when the switch is in this posi-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to ignition switch in the ACC position, the
tion.

BK0223400US.book 61
Ignition switch
function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position.
When the ignition switch is turned from the
ACC position, the power is supplied again
to those devices.
NOTE 5
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to about 60 minutes.
The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated.
NOTE NOTE
The key cannot be removed unless the selec-
The key cannot be removed unless the selec-
tor lever is set to the P (PARK) position,
For details, we recommend you to consult an tor lever is set to the P (PARK) position,
which allows the ignition switch to turn to
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. which allows the ignition switch to turn to
the OFF position.
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi- the LOCK position.
Refer to the separate Mitsubishi Multi-Com- Type 2 CAUTION
munications System manual for details.
If the engine is stopped while driving, the
When removing the key, first set the selector power brake booster will stop functioning
lever to the P (PARK) position, and push and greater effort for braking will be
To remove the key the key in at the ACC position and keep it required. Also, the power steering system
N00550901211 depressed until it is turned to the LOCK will not function and it will require greater
position, and remove it. effort to manually steer the vehicle.
Type 1 Do not leave the key in the ON position for
a long time when the engine is not running.
This will cause the battery to run down.
When removing the key, first set the selector Do not turn the key to the START position
lever to the P (PARK) position, and then when the engine is running. It will damage
turn the key to the OFF position and the starter motor.
remove it.

BK0223400US.book 62
Steering wheel lock (if so equipped)

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
Steering wheel lock (if so To lock (F.A.S.T.-key): Starting on page5-12.
equipped)
N00512501222
Remove the key at the LOCK position. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand ter (F.A.S.T.-key).]
key).]
To unlock
5 Tips for starting
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- Turn the key to the ACC position while
Do not operate the starter motor continu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to moving the steering wheel slightly.
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter could run the battery down or damage the
(F.A.S.T.-key): Steering wheel lock on CAUTION starter motor. If the engine does not start,
page5-23 Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. turn the ignition switch back to the OFF
or LOCK position, wait a few seconds,
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- NOTE the engine or starter motor still turning
ter (F.A.S.T.-key).] (Vehicles with steering
If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft will damage the starter mechanism.
lock system) lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn If the engine will not start because the bat-
the key from LOCK to ACC. Firmly tery is weak or discharged, refer to
turn the steering wheel to the left or to the Jump-starting the engine (on page 8-2)
right as you turn the key.
for instructions.
A longer warm up period will only con-
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
Starting the engine enough for driving when the bar graph of
N00512601803 engine coolant temperature display starts
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand to move or the low coolant temperature
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- indicator goes out. Refer to Engine cool-
key).] ant temperature display on page 5-134 or
For information on operation for vehicles Low coolant temperature indicator on
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- page 5-172.
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to

BK0223400US.book 63
Starting the engine

2. Insert the ignition key. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
WARNING 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down with the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
your right foot. there, then crank the engine. Release the
ventilated area any longer than is needed
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the P accelerator pedal, immediately after the
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and (PARK) position. engine starts.
extremely poisonous, could build up and 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
cause serious injury or death. tion and make certain that all warning could be flooded with too much gasoline.
lights are functioning properly before While depressing the brake pedal, push
starting the engine. the accelerator pedal all the way down
5
CAUTION 6. Turn the ignition switch to the START and hold it there, then crank the engine for
Do not push-start the vehicle. position without pressing the accelerator 5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch
Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive pedal. Release the ignition switch when to the OFF or LOCK position and
at high speeds until the engine has had a the engine starts. release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
chance to warm up. seconds, and then crank the engine again
Release the ignition switch as soon as the NOTE for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor Minor noises may be heard on engine start- brake pedal, but do not push the accelera-
will be damaged up. These will disappear as the engine warms tor pedal. Release the ignition key if the
up. engine starts. If the engine fails to start,
repeat these procedures. If the engine still
Starting the engine will not start, contact your local Mitsubi-
When the engine is hard to start shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
This model is equipped with an electronically your choice for assistance.
controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys- After several attempts, you may experience
tem that automatically controls fuel injection. that the engine still does not start. Startability of automatic transaxle
There is usually no need to depress the accel-
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
vehicle and CVT vehicle with
erator pedal when starting the engine.
The starter should not be run for more than 15 as lights, air conditioning blower and rear ambient temperature of -22 F (-30
seconds at a time. window defogger, are turned off. C) or lower
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine. When the ambient temperature is -22 F (-30
C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
1. Make sure all occupants are properly from a standstill even with the selector lever
seated with seat belts fastened.
BK0223400US.book 64
Automatic transaxle (if so equipped)

in the D (DRIVE) or R (REVERSE)
position. Automatic transaxle (if so NOTE
During the break-in period or immediately
This occurs because the transaxle has not equipped)
after reconnecting the battery, your vehicle
warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a N00513200216
may not shift smoothly. This does not indi-
problem. If this occurs, place the selector cate a problem in the transaxle. Shifting will
lever in the P (PARK) position and let the Automatic transaxle will automatically
become smoother once the transaxle has
engine idle for at least 10 minutes. change its gear depending on road and driv- been shifted several times by the electronic
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be ing conditions. This helps achieve smooth
5 able to start normally. driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
control system.
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up Also you can manually shift up and shift
down the transaxle. Refer to Sports mode
operation.
on page 5-68.
Selector lever operation
N00513801408
Using the MIVEC engine As an additional safety precaution, models

DRIVING UPHILL equipped with an automatic transaxle have a
The MIVEC engine automatically switches shift-lock device that holds the selector lever
its intake-valve control between a low-speed The transaxle prevents unnecessary upshifts in the P (PARK) position. To move the
mode and a high-speed mode in accordance even when the accelerator pedal is released selector lever from the P (PARK) position
with driving conditions for maximum engine and ensures smooth driving. to another position, follow the steps below.
performance.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
DRIVING DOWNHILL 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
NOTE position.
To protect the engine, the high-speed mode According to the conditions, the transaxle
may not be selected while the engine coolant will automatically shift to a lower gear to
temperature is low. In such a case, the engine achieve stronger engine braking. This may
NOTE
revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm The selector lever cannot be moved from P
help reduce your need to use the service
even if the accelerator pedal is depressed. (PARK) to another position if the operation
brake.
mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the brake
pedal is not pressed and held down.
The transaxle has 6 forward gears and 1

reverse gear.

BK0223400US.book 65

The individual gears are selected automati- Set the selector lever in the gate to When the selector lever cannot be
cally, depending on the position of the gear operate.
selector lever, the speed of the vehicle and the shifted from the P (PARK) posi-
position of the accelerator pedal. tion
WARNING N00563101044
Always press the brake pedal when shift- When the selector lever cannot be shifted
ing the selector lever into a gear from the from the P (PARK) position to another
N (NEUTRAL) position. position while the brake pedal is pressed and
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
held down with the operation mode in ON,
5
selector lever from the N (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to anism may be malfunctioning.
jump forward or backward. Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
NOTE If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, selector lever as follows.
make sure you stop briefly at each position.
After operating, check the position in the 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
multi-information display. applied.
If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the 3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
selector lever from being moved from the tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
P (PARK) position. gently as shown to remove the cover.
For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
Set the selector lever in the gate to pedal, the selector lever may become
operate while the brake pedal is immovable.
depressed.

BK0223400US.book 66

system or A/T fluid temperature becomes
Selector lever position display abnormally high.
N00513901441
When the operation mode is put in ON, the

selector lever position is shown on the multi-
information display.
5 Type 1 Type 2
4. Depress the brake pedal with the right

foot.
5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to NOTE
the N (NEUTRAL) position while The A indicator on the selector lever posi-
pressing the screwdriver down. tion display will only blink if there is a prob-
lem with the A/T position switch.
It is not seen during normal driving.
Warning display
N00514001289
[For vehicles equipped mono-color liquid

crystal display meter]
When the selector lever position

indicator blinks
When the selector lever position indicator

blinks while you are driving, there could be a
malfunction in the automatic transmission

BK0223400US.book 67

in the multi-information display while you
CAUTION are driving, there could be a malfunction in
CAUTION
If a malfunction occurs in the A/T while If a malfunction occurs in the automatic
the automatic transaxle.
driving, the indicator will blink. transaxle while driving, the warning dis-
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
in a safe place and follow these procedures: play or the warning display will appear
[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec- on the information screen in the multi-infor-
ond), the A/T fluid is overheating.] mation display.
Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
in a safe place and follow these procedures: 5
to the P (PARK) position and open the
bonnet. Keep the engine, idling. When warning display is showing
After a while, move the selector lever into The automatic transaxle fluid is overheating.
any position other than P (PARK) position Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
and confirm that the indicator stops blinking. selector lever in the P position, and open
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator the engine hood with the engine running to
no longer blinks. allow the engine to cool down. After a while,
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected confirm that the warning display is no
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. longer showing. It is safe to continue driving
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 if the display is no longer showing. If the
seconds), the A/T safety device may be oper- warning display remains or flashes fre-
ating due to a malfunction.] quently, have your vehicle inspected by an
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi- repair facility of your choice.
ble.
When warning display is showing
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid It may be that there is something unusual
crystal display meter] happening in the automatic transaxle, caus-
ing a safety device to activate. Have your
or vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
When the warning display or the warn-
ing display appears on the information screen

BK0223400US.book 68
Selector lever positions WARNING L LOW

N00514201395 Never move the selector lever to the N
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since This position is for driving up very steep hills
P PARK you could accidentally slip it into the P and for engine braking at low speeds when
(PARK) or R (REVERSE) position, driving down steep hills.
damaging the transaxle.
This position locks the transaxle to prevent To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
the vehicle from moving. The engine can be WARNING
5 started from the P (PARK) position.
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the P (PARK) position, not in this position can be used for maximum
N (NEUTRAL) position. engine braking.
To prevent rolling, always keep your foot Be very careful not to shift into L
R REVERSE
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in (LOW) suddenly.
N (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- Sudden engine braking may cause the
Move the lever to this position only after the ing into or out of N (NEUTRAL) posi- tires to skid.
vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion. Select this position according to the road
conditions and vehicle speed.
CAUTION
Never shift into the P (PARK) or R D DRIVE
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in Sports mode
motion. If the lever is shifted into the P This position is used for most city and high- N00514401456
(PARK) or R (REVERSE) position while way driving. The transaxle will automatically While the vehicle is stopped or being driven
the vehicle is in motion, the transaxle may be change its gear depending on road and driv- with the selector lever in the D (DRIVE) or
damaged.
ing conditions. L (LOW) position, sports mode can be
selected by pulling one of the sportronic
CAUTION steering wheel paddle shifter towards you.
N NEUTRAL In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
To prevent transaxle damage, never shift into
the D (DRIVE) position from the R ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
At this position, the transaxle is disengaged. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in paddle shifter.
It is the same as the neutral position on a motion. Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
manual transaxle and should be used when allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
the vehicle is not moving for an extended depressed.
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
BK0223400US.book 69
CAUTION NOTE
SHIFT SHIFT In sports mode, the driver must execute When the selector lever is in the D
DOWN UP upward shifts in accordance with prevailing (DRIVE) position and sports mode is
road conditions, taking care to keep the selected, the vehicle will automatically
engine speed below the red zone. return to D (DRIVE) operation if the vehi-
Repeated continuous operation of the spor- cle is stopped.
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter will con- When the selector lever is in the L (LOW)
tinuously switch shift position.
Gears may not change when the lateral pad-
position and sports mode is selected, the
vehicle will stay in sports mode and not
5
dle shifters are operated at the same time. return to L (LOW) operation even if the
vehicle is stopped.
The upward shift may be made automatically
NOTE in sports mode when the engine revolutions
rise and approach the tachometers red zone
Gears can only be selected in a forward
(the red-coloured part of the tachometer
+ (SHIFT UP) direction from 1st gear to 6th gear. To
dial).
The transaxle shifts up by one gear with reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector
lever to the R or P position. When pulling away from a standstill on a
each operation. slippery road, pull the sportronic steering
To maintain good running performance, the
wheel paddle shifter on the + (SHIFT UP)
transaxle may refuse to perform an upshift
(SHIFT DOWN) side to select 2nd gear. Pull the sportronic
when the selector lever is moved to the
The transaxle shifts down by one gear with steering wheel paddle shifter on the
+(SHIFT UP) position at certain vehicle
each operation. (SHIFT DOWN) side to shift back to 1st
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
gear.
engine, the transaxle may refuse to perform a
downshift when the lever is moved to the When the sportronic steering wheel paddle
To return to D (DRIVE) or L (LOW) shifter is operated with the selector lever in
operation, pull the sportronic steering wheel (SHIFT DOWN) position at certain vehicle
speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds the L (LOW) position, gear is not shifted
paddle shifter on the + (SHIFT UP) side for because the selectable shift range is limited.
to indicate that a downshift is not going to
longer than 2 seconds.
take place.
When returning to D (DRIVE) or L
(LOW) operation, the selector lever position
Downward shifts are made automatically Sports mode display
when the vehicle slows down. Before the N00538801180
display will change to D (DRIVE) or L vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically
(LOW) position. selected.
In sports mode, the currently selected gear is
displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display.

BK0223400US.book 70
Type 1 Type 2 Operation of the automatic CAUTION

transaxle Use the selector lever in the correct shift
N00514501369
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions.
CAUTION Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
ing shift position {D (DRIVE), L
Before selecting a gear with the engine run-
(LOW) position or sports mode} or coast
ning and the vehicle stationary, firmly
5 depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
forward in the R (REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
cle from creeping.
and steering effort could lead to an accident.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
gear is engaged, especially when the engine
pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
NOTE conditioning operating. This can damage the transaxle.
While driving in sports mode, the sports Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
mode display may change to show D and while holding down the brake pedal with the
ready to drive away.
shifting in sports mode may no longer be selector lever in the D (DRIVE) position,
Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
possible. the engine revolutions may not rise as high
all times.
This indicates that controls to drive in the as when performing the same operation with
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
D position are operating normally in order the selector lever in the N (NEUTRAL)
ment delay in case of an emergency.
to lower the temperature of the automatic position.
To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
transaxle fluid; it does not indicate a mal- the engine at high rpms when shifting from
function. Once the temperature of the auto- the P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL). Passing acceleration
matic transaxle fluid drops, shifting in the
Operating the accelerator pedal while the
sports mode will be possible again.
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will To gain extra acceleration in D (DRIVE)
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
position (when passing another vehicle) push
mature wear of brake pads.
the accelerator to the floor. The automatic
transaxle will automatically downshift.
NOTE
In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
when the accelerator is depressed all the way
to the floor.

BK0223400US.book 71
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

and then move the selector lever to the P
Waiting Continuously variable
(PARK) position.
transmission (CVT) (if so
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
lights, the vehicle can be left in gear and held When the automatic transaxle equipped)
stationary with the service brake. makes no gear change N00560201060
For longer waiting periods with the engine

The CVT will automatically and continuously
running, place the selector lever in the N If the transaxle does not change gears while
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking driving, or your vehicle does not pick up
change its gear ratio depending on road and
driving conditions. This helps achieve
5
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary enough speed when starting on an uphill smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
with the service brake. slope, it may be that there is something If your vehicle is equipped with the spor-
Prior to moving off after having stopped the unusual happening in the transaxle, causing a tronic steering wheel paddle shifter, you can
vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in safety device to activate. Have your vehicle manually shift up and shift down the trans-
D (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi- checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors mission. Refer to Sports mode on page
tion. dealer or a repair facility of your choice as 5-76.
soon as possible.
CAUTION
To avoid transaxle overheating, never try to NOTE DRIVING UPHILL
keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
When the warning display and SLOW The transmission prevents unnecessary
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake. DOWN or the warning display and upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while SERVICE REQUIRED appear on the released and ensures smooth driving.
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler- information screen in the multi-information
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a display, there could be a malfunction in the
position other than P (PARK) or N automatic transaxle. Refer to Automatic DRIVING DOWNHILL
(NEUTRAL). transaxle: Warning display on page 5-66.
According to the conditions, the transmission
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
Parking to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
help reduce your need to use the service
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- brake.
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

BK0223400US.book 72
Selector lever operation Set the selector lever in the gate to

N00560301074
operate.
As an additional safety precaution, models
equipped with a continuously variable trans- WARNING
mission have a shift-lock device that holds Always press the brake pedal when shift-
the selector lever in the P (PARK) position. ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
To move the selector lever from the P tion from the N (NEUTRAL) position.
5 (PARK) position to another position, follow When beginning to drive, do not shift the
the steps below. selector lever from the N (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
2. Move the selector lever to the desired jump forward or backward.
Except for vehicles equipped with sportronic
position. steering wheel paddle shifter
NOTE NOTE
To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
The selector lever cannot be moved from P
make sure you stop briefly at each position.
(PARK) to another position if the ignition
After operating, check the position in the
switch is set to the OFF or LOCK or
multi-information display.
ACC position, or if the key has been
removed, or the operation mode is put in If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
OFF or ACC, or if the brake pedal is not For vehicles equipped with sportronic steering the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
pressed and held down. wheel paddle shifter selector lever from being moved from the
P (PARK) position.
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati- For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
cally when the selector lever is in the D tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
the vehicle and the position of the accelerator selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.
pedal.
Set the selector lever in the gate to

operate while the brake pedal is
depressed.

BK0223400US.book 73
When the selector lever cannot be Selector lever position display

shifted from the P (PARK) posi- N00560401088
tion When the ignition switch is turned to the

N00563301059 ON position or the operation mode is put in
When the selector lever cannot be shifted ON, the selector lever position is shown on
from the P (PARK) position to another the multi-information display.
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
held down with the ignition switch at the
5
Type 1 Type 2
ON position or the operation mode in ON,
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
anism may be malfunctioning. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an foot.
repair facility of your choice. 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
selector lever as follows. the N (NEUTRAL) position while
pressing the screwdriver down.
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
applied.
2. Stop the engine if it is running. When the selector lever position
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
display blinks
N00582900031
gently as shown to remove the cover.
WARNING
To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
keep brake pedal applied with your right
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
play is blinking.

BK0223400US.book 74

If the ambient temperature is low, the selector
lever position display on the multi informa-
NOTE NOTE
While the selector lever position display is The A indicator on the selector lever posi-
tion display may blink when the selector
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently. tion display will only blink if there is a prob-
lever is placed in the D (DRIVE), Ds
lem with the CVT position switch.
(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), L It is not seen during normal driving.
(LOW) or R (REVERSE) position immedi-
ately after the engine has been started. This Warning display
indicates that the transmission requires warm- N00560501076
CAUTION
5 ing up. While the display is blinking, the [For vehicles equipped mono-color liquid
If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
vehicle will not move, because the transmis- crystal display meter] driving, the indicator will blink.
sion keeps disengaging until the warm up is In this case, immediately park your vehicle
completed even if the selector lever is placed When the selector lever position in a safe place and follow these procedures:
in the D, Ds, L or R position. [If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-
indicator blinks ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]
When the selector lever position display is Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
blinking, perform the following procedure: When the selector lever position indicator turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
blinks while you are driving, there could be a to the P (PARK) position and open the
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right malfunction in the automatic transmission bonnet. Keep the engine, idling.
foot and place the selector lever in the system or CVT fluid temperature becomes After a while, move the selector lever into
N (NEUTRAL) position for several abnormally high. any position other than P (PARK) position
seconds. and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.
2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then It is safe to continue driving if the indicator
no longer blinks.
place the selector lever in the D
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks
(DRIVE), Ds (DOWNSHIFT & intermittently, have your vehicle inspected
SPORTY DRIVING), L (LOW) or R by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
(REVERSE) position. If the selector lever [If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2
position display stops blinking, the warm seconds), the CVT safety device may be
up is completed and the transmission will operating due to a malfunction.]
function normally. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
1 and 2 above. ble.

BK0223400US.book 75

[For vehicles equipped with color liquid
CAUTION CAUTION
After a while, confirm that the warning Never shift into the P (PARK) or R
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
or display is no longer showing. It is safe to
motion. If the lever is shifted into the P
continue driving if the display is no longer
(PARK) or R (REVERSE) position while
showing. If the warning display remains or
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
flashes frequently, have your vehicle
When the warning display or the warn- may be damaged.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
ing display appears on the information screen
in the multi-information display while you
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your 5
choice.
are driving, there could be a malfunction in
[When warning display is showing]
N NEUTRAL
the CVT.
It may be that there is something unusual
happening in the CVT, causing a safety At this position, the transmission is disen-
CAUTION device to activate. Have your vehicle gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi a manual transaxle and should be used when
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your the vehicle is not moving for an extended
driving, the warning display or the
choice as soon as possible. length of time during driving, such as in a
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display. traffic jam.
In this case, follow these procedures: Selector lever positions
[When warning display is showing] N00560601080 WARNING
The continuously variable transmission Never move the selector lever to the N
(CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con- P PARK (NEUTRAL) position while driving since
trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem- you could accidentally slip it into the P
perature, causing the engine revolutions and (PARK) or R (REVERSE) position,
vehicle speed to decrease, In this case, take
This position locks the transmission to pre-
damaging the transmission.
one of the following procedures. vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
Slow down your vehicle. be started from the P (PARK) position. stopped on a slope, the engine should be
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the started in the P (PARK) position, not in
selector lever in the P (PARK) position, R REVERSE N (NEUTRAL) position.
and open the engine hood with the engine
running to allow the engine to cool down.
Move the lever to this position only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.

BK0223400US.book 76

Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
WARNING L LOW
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
depressed.
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in This position is for driving up very steep hills
N (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- and for engine braking at low speeds when
ing into or out of N (NEUTRAL) posi- driving down steep hills.
tion. SHIFT SHIFT
DOWN UP
WARNING
5 D DRIVE
This position can be used for maximum
engine braking.
This position is used for most city and high- Be very careful not to shift into L
way driving. The transmission will automati- (LOW) suddenly.
cally and continuously change its gear ratio Sudden engine braking may cause the
depending on road and driving conditions. tires to skid.
Select this position according to the road
conditions and vehicle speed.
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the D (DRIVE) position from the R
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
Sports mode (for vehicles
motion. equipped with sportronic steer- + (SHIFT UP)
Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
ing wheel paddle shifter tion.
N00560701081
Ds DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY While the vehicle is stopped or being driven (SHIFT DOWN)
DRIVING (except for vehicles with the selector lever in the D (DRIVE), Transmission shifts down once by each oper-
equipped with sportronic steering sports mode can be selected by pulling one of ation.
wheel paddle shifter) the sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
towards you. To return to D (DRIVE) operation, pull the
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on
Use when engine braking is needed, or for the + (SHIFT UP) side for longer than 2 sec-
high-power sport drive. ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter. onds.

BK0223400US.book 77

When returning to D (DRIVE) operation,
the selector lever position display will change
NOTE Type 1 Type 2
To maintain good running performance, the
to D (DRIVE) position.
transmission may refuse to perform an
upshift when the sportronic steering wheel
CAUTION paddle shifter is moved to the +(SHIFT
Upward shifts do not take place automati- UP) position at certain vehicle speeds.
cally in sports mode. The driver must make Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine,
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, making sure the engine rpm
the transmission may refuse to perform a
downshift when the sportronic steering
5
remains below the red zone on the tachome- wheel paddle shifter is moved to the
ter. (SHIFT DOWN) position at certain vehicle
Repeated continuous operation of the spor- speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter will con- to indicate that a downshift is not going to
tinuously switch shift position. take place. Operation of the CVT
Shift ranges may not change when the lateral Downward shifts are made automatically N00560801053
paddle shifters are operated at the same time. when the vehicle slows down. Before the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically CAUTION
selected. Before selecting a position with the engine
Also, the vehicle will automatically return to
NOTE D (DRIVE) operation if the vehicle is
running and the vehicle stationary, firmly
Shift ranges can only be selected in a for- depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
stopped. cle from creeping.
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or When the selector lever is in the L (LOW)
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
position, the sport mode is not selected even CVT is engaged, especially when the engine
the R or P position. if you operate the sportronic steering wheel speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
paddle shifter. conditioning operating.
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
Sports mode display ready to drive away.
N00560901067
Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
all times.
In sports mode, the currently selected shift Using the left foot could cause driver move-
range is displayed on the information screen ment delay in case of an emergency.
in the multi-information display. To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
the P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL).

BK0223400US.book 78
CAUTION NOTE Parking

Operating the accelerator pedal while the In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will when the accelerator is depressed all the way To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- to the floor. plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
mature wear of brake pads. and then move the selector lever to the P
Use the selector lever in the correct shift (PARK) position.
position in accordance with driving condi- Waiting
5 tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv- When the CVT makes no speed
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
ing shift position {D (DRIVE), DS change
(DOWN SHIFT & SPORTY DRVING), L lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
(LOW) position or sports mode} or coast position and held stationary with the service
forward in the R (REVERSE) position. brake. If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal For longer waiting periods with the engine your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
and steering effort could lead to an accident. running, place the selector lever in the N when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking that there is something unusual happening in
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary the transmission, causing a safety device to
This can damage the CVT. activate. Have your vehicle checked at an
with the service brake.
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Prior to moving off after having stopped the
while holding down the brake pedal with the repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-
selector lever in the D (DRIVE) position, vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
D (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi- ble.
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with tion.
the selector lever in the N (NEUTRAL)
position. CAUTION
To avoid transmission overheating, never try
Passing acceleration to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
To gain extra acceleration in D (DRIVE)
Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
position (when passing another vehicle) push
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
automatically downshift. position other than P (PARK) or N
(NEUTRAL).

BK0223400US.book 79
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Drive mode Function

[For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq- If the parking brake lever is pulled up while This mode is for driving in
uid crystal display meter] the vehicle is moving, the front-rear distribu- slippery conditions, such as
When the selector lever position indicator tion of driving torque control will turn OFF snow covered roads or on
blinks while you are driving, there could be a which will allow the rear wheels to lock eas- sand.
malfunction in the automatic transmission ier. 4WD LOCK
Large traction torque is dis-
system or CVT fluid temperature becomes
tributed to the rear wheels to
abnormally high.
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid
assist in getting out of slip- 5
Drive mode pery areas.
When the warning display and SLOW
Select the drive mode from the following 3 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
DOWN or the warning display and types to suit the driving conditions. ing skills.
SERVICE REQUIRED appear on the Carefully read the 4-wheel drive operation
information screen in the multi-information Drive mode Function section on page 5-85 and take care to drive
display, there could be a malfunction in the safely.
CVT. Refer to Continuously variable trans- This is most fuel efficient
mission (CVT): Warning display on page mode
5-74. 4WD ECO Normal operation is 2WD, Drive mode-selector
but 4WD will engage in the N00548401020
event of wheel slip. The drive mode can be switched by pressing

Electronically controlled All driving is in 4WD and the drive mode switch while the ignition is in
4WD system (if so equipped) the distribution of traction the ON position or the operation mode in
torque to each wheel is ON.
N00548301032 4WD AUTO
automatically controlled
The electronically controlled 4WD system depending on the driving
helps improve acceleration and vehicle stabil- conditions.
ity by controlling the front-rear distribution of
driving torque using the electronic control
coupling in the rear differential assembly.

BK0223400US.book 80
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
Drive mode indicator Drive mode Display

N00549401030
Normally the indicator illuminates when the

operation mode put in ON, and then the drive 4WD ECO
mode is displayed a few seconds after the
engine is started.
The status of each drive mode display is as
5 follows.
4WD AUTO
Drive mode indicator
If you press the switch, you can change the mono-color
Drive Mode color liquid
drive mode in the order of 4WD ECO, 4WD liquid crys-
crystal dis-
AUTO, 4WD LOCK, 4WD ECO. tal display
play meter 4WD LOCK
meter
CAUTION 4WD ECO 4WD ECO 4WD-E
Do not operate the drive mode-selector with 4WD AUTO 4WD AUTO
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
in similar conditions. The vehicle could 4WD LOCK 4WD LOCK LOCK
lunge in an unexpected direction.
Driving on dry, paved roads in 4WD On vehicles with color liquid crystal display
LOCK mode causes increased fuel con- meter, the drive mode is displayed as an inter-
sumption and noise. rupt display on the information screen in the
multi information display when the drive
mode is switched.
NOTE After a few seconds, the information screen
The drive mode can be switched while driv- returns from the drive mode display to the
ing or stopped. previous screen.

BK0223400US.book 81
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped)

ON, the drive mode will be changed to 4WD
CAUTION CAUTION ECO mode.
If the selected drive mode indicator begins If the drive mode indicator (4WD) is blink-
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the
blinking, the drive mode will automatically ing, a problem has occurred with the elec-
drive mode will be returned to 4WD AUTO
switch to protect the drive-system compo- tronically controlled 4WD. A warning will
nents. A warning will also be displayed in also be displayed in the information screen mode.
the information screen in the multi informa- in the multi information display. Refer to the ECO mode switch on page
tion display. 5-184.
Warning display (color liquid crystal dis-
Warning display (color liquid crystal display) 5
play)
NOTE
If the drive mode is switched in any mode
after the drive mode is switched in 4WD
ECO, the drive mode will not be changed
even if the ECO mode switch is switched
OFF.
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
blinking, you may resume normal driving. For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq-
For vehicles equipped with mono-color liquid crystal display meter, drive mode indica- S-AWC (Super-All Wheel
uid crystal display meter, drive mode indicator (4WD-E, LOCK) is blinking at the
tor (4WD-E, LOCK) is blinking same time.
Control) (if so equipped)
alternately Make sure that all four tires are the same N00541301062
specified size, type, and brand, and have no

S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics
significant difference in the amount of wear.
control system that helps enhance driving
Otherwise, the electronically controlled
4WD system may not work properly, and the performance, cornering performance, and
4WD system warning (overheating or ser- vehicle stability over a wide range of driving
vice required) may displayed. conditions through integrated management of
the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC
(Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.
When the ECO mode switch is
ON
N00576600020
While the drive mode is in the 4WD AUTO

position, if the ECO mode switch is switched

BK0223400US.book 82

the drive power difference of the left and
CAUTION Active Yaw Control (AYC) right wheels and the braking force when the
Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-
vehicle does not turn in response to steering
AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of The AYC is a system, with a left-right differ- input, such as when the steering wheel is
physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-
ential limiting function and yaw control func- turned quickly or when driving on slippery
tem, like any other system, has limits and
tion, that controls the left-right road.
cannot help you to maintain traction and con-
trol of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reck- driving/braking force by managing the AFD*
(Active Front Differential), the brake, the
5 less driving can lead to accidents. It is the
EPS.
CAUTION
drivers responsibility to drive carefully.
Control of the braking force does not
This means taking into account the traffic, *: AFD (Active Front Differential)
enhance the stopping performance of the
road and environmental conditions. The Differential assembly that limits the front vehicle, therefore, pay careful attention to
left-right differential speed by operating elec- the safety of your surroundings when driv-
tronic control clutch arranged in the transfer ing.
Electronically Controlled 4WD assembly.
The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys- Left-right differential limiting S-AWC drive mode
tem that improves acceleration performance function N00542401086
and stability performance by controlling Select the drive mode from the following four
front-rear distribution of driving torque with The left-right differential limiting function is types to suit the driving conditions.
operating the electronic control coupling a function that enhances driving performance
arranged in the rear differential assembly. and vehicle stability by preventing idle spin- S-AWC
ning of a wheel when driving on slippery drive Function
NOTE road or when the road surfaces of left and mode
If the parking brake lever is pulled up while right wheels are different. This is the most fuel efficient
the vehicle is moving, the front-rear distribu- mode. Normal operation is in
tion of driving torque control will turn OFF
which will allow the rear wheels to lock eas-
Yaw control function AWC ECO 2WD, but 4WD performance
will be provided under slippery
ier.
The yaw control function is a function that conditions.
enhances vehicle cornering performance and
vehicle stability with management of vehicle
turning power (yaw moment) by controlling

BK0223400US.book 83

S-AWC S-AWC drive mode display
drive Function N00583100030
mode
This mode can be used on both
dry and wet roads. The distri-
bution of driving/braking
NORMAL
torque to each wheel is auto-
matically controlled according 5
to the driving condition.
This mode is for driving on
SNOW slippery road surfaces, such as If you press the switch, you can change the
snow-covered roads. drive mode in the order of AWC ECO, NOR- Example: AWC ECO mode is selected.
This mode is for driving where MAL, SNOW, LOCK, AWC ECO.
maximum traction is required.
LOCK This mode is suitable for driv- CAUTION The currently selected drive mode is dis-
ing on rough roads or driving Do not operate the drive mode-selector with played on the multi-information display.
in mud, sand or fresh snow. the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or In addition, when the drive mode is changed,
in similar conditions. The vehicle could the selected mode appears on the interrupt
4-wheel drive operation requires special driv- lunge in an unexpected direction. display screen of the information screen in
ing skills. Driving on dry, paved roads in LOCK the multi-information display.
Carefully read the 4-wheel drive operation mode causes increased fuel consumption and The drive mode display will appear on the
section on page 5-85 and take care to drive noise. information screen for a few seconds, and
safety. then the original screen will return.
S-AWC drive mode-selector NOTE

The drive mode can be switched while driv-
N00583000042
ing or stopped.
The drive mode can be switched by press the
switch while the operation mode in ON.

BK0223400US.book 84
CAUTION CAUTION
If the selected drive mode indicator begins Make sure that all four tires are the same
blinking, the drive mode will automatically specified size, type, and brand, and have no
switch to protect the drive-system compo- significant difference in the amount of wear
nents. A warning will also be displayed in for all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC sys-
the information screen in the multi informa- tem may not work properly, and a 4WD sys-
tion display. tem warning (overheating or service
5 Warning display
required) may be displayed.
S-AWC operation display

N00542501058 Yaw control function display
The S-AWC operation status can be displayed The amount of the yaw moment is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor- as a bar graph.
Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops mation display. A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the
blinking, you may resume normal driving. To display the status, press the multi-informa- vehicles center of gravity
If the drive mode indicator (4WD) is blink- tion meter switch to change the information B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment
ing, a problem has occurred with the S- about the vehicles center of gravity
screen.
AWC. A warning will also be displayed in
Refer to Information screen (when the oper-
the information screen in the multi informa- Differential limiting function display
tion display. ation mode in ON) on page 5-132.
The strength of the differential limiting
Warning display operation (between front-rear wheels and
Display example between left-right wheels) is displayed in
section E of the meter as a bar graph.
The S-AWC operation status is displayed.
WARNING
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho- Always concentrate on your driving first.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis-
tractions while driving can lead to an acci-
dent.

BK0223400US.book 85
4-wheel drive operation

tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
When the ECO mode switch is covered roads and when moving out of mud.
NOTE
ON But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or Driving on rough roads can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
N00576700021 towing in rough conditions.
sure all scheduled maintenance and service
While the drive mode is in the NORMAL It is particularly important to note that 4- has been done, and that you have inspected
position, if the ECO mode switch is switched wheel drive may not give sufficient hill your vehicle. Pay special attention to the
ON, the drive mode will be changed to climbing ability and engine braking on steep condition of the tires, and check the tire pres-
AWC ECO mode. slopes. You should try to avoid driving on
If the ECO mode switch is switched OFF, the steep slopes.
sures.
Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the
5
drive mode will be returned to NORMAL Also, you must exercise caution when driving operator for any damage or injury caused or
mode. on sand and mud and when driving through liability incurred by improper and negligent
Refer to the ECO mode switch on page water because sufficient traction may not be operation of a vehicle. All techniques of
available in certain circumstances. vehicle operation depend on the skill and
5-184.
experience of the operator and other partici-
Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas
pating parties. Any deviation from the rec-
where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or
NOTE ommended operating instructions above is at
mud. their own risk.
If the drive mode is switched in any mode
after the drive mode is switched in AWC Note that the stopping distance required of
ECO, the drive mode will not be changed WARNING the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
even if the ECO mode switch is switched Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi- from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
OFF. cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim- When driving on a snow-covered road or a
its to the system and ability to maintain slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you
control and traction. Reckless driving may keep a sufficient distance between your vehi-
cle and the one ahead of you.
4-wheel drive operation lead to accidents. Always drive carefully,
taking account of the road conditions. The driving posture should be more upright;
N00530601182
Improperly operating this vehicle on or adjust the seat to a good position for easy
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for off-pavement can cause an accident or steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
use on pavement. rollover in which you and your passengers the seat belt.
But its unique 4 -wheel drive system allows could be seriously injured or killed. After driving on rough roads, check each
you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads, Follow all instructions and guidelines in part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar the owners manual. with water. Refer to the Inspection and
Keep your speed low and do not drive maintenance following rough road opera-
locations.
faster than conditions. tion section and Vehicle care and Mainte-
Not only does this ensure better handling on nance sections.
dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-
BK0223400US.book 86
4-wheel drive operation
CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

Setting the drive mode-selector to 4WD The use of snow tires is recommended. If any of the following conditions occur
LOCK (Electronically controlled 4WD) or Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, while the vehicle is being driven, immedi-
LOCK (S-AWC) position to drive on dry avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- ately park your vehicle in a safe place and
paved road will increase fuel consumption, ing (downshifting). follow these procedures:
with possible noise generation. If the engine coolant temperature display
flashes on the information screen in the
5 CAUTION multi-information display or the engine
Turning sharp corners Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration power drops suddenly.
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- Refer to Engine overheating on page 8-4.
trol of the vehicle could be lost.
When turning a sharp corner in 4WD If the warning display and SLOW
LOCK (Electronically controlled 4WD) or DOWN or the warning display and
LOCK (S-AWC) position at low speed, a
SERVICE REQUIRED appear on the
slight difference in steering may be experi- Driving on sandy or muddy information screen in the multi-information
enced similar to feeling as if the brakes were roads display.
applied. This is called tight corner braking Refer to Warning display on page 5-66,
and results from each of the four tires being at Set the drive mode-selector to 4WD LOCK 5-74.
a different distance from the corner. The phe- (Electronically controlled 4WD) or LOCK
nomenon is typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. (S-AWC) and then gradually depress the
If this occurs, either straighten out the steer- accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the WARNING
ing wheel or change to another mode. pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant When attempting to rock your vehicle out
of a stuck position, be sure that the area
as possible, and drive at low speed.
around the vehicle is clear of people and
On snowy or icy roads physical objects. The rocking motion may
CAUTION cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
Set the drive mode-selector to 4WD Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
AUTO, 4WD LOCK (Electronically con- on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor- age to nearby people or objects.
trolled 4WD) or SNOW (S-AWC) in accor- mal road surfaces, the engine and other
dance with the road conditions, and then drive-system components are put under
gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
face. This could lead to accidents.
smooth start.

BK0223400US.book 87
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

Check the depth of the water and the terrain Check that the vehicle has not been dam-
NOTE before attempting to drive through it. Drive aged by rocks, gravel, etc.
Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
slowly to avoid creating excessive water Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
and sharp turning; such operations could
splashing. Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
depressing the brake pedal in order to dry
If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a CAUTION out the brakes. If the brakes still do not
rocking motion. Move the selector lever Never drive through water that is deep
function properly, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
alternately between the D (DRIVE) and
R (REVERSE) positions while pressing
enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust
ity of your choice as soon as possible to
5
pipe. Do not change the selector lever posi-
lightly on the accelerator pedal. tion while driving through water. have the brakes checked.
Driving on rough road can cause rust on the Frequent driving through water can Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; ging the radiator core.
as possible after such use. consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors After driving through water, check the
dealer or a repair facility of your choice and engine, transaxle and differential oil. If
take the necessary measures to prepare, the oil or grease is milky or cloudy
inspect, and repair the vehicle.
Climbing/descending sharp because of water contamination, it must
After driving through water, apply the brakes
grades to be sure they are functioning properly. If
be replaced with new oil.
the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
Check the inside of the vehicle. If water
erly, dry them out by driving slowly while entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect Inspect the headlights. If water is in the
climbing ability and engine braking on steep
each part of the vehicle carefully. headlight housing, have it drained at an
slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi-
cle.
Inspection and maintenance
Driving through water following rough road opera-
N00537800085 tion
If the electrical circuits become wet, further N00530700085
operation of the vehicle will be impossible; After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
therefore, avoid driving through water unless ditions, be sure to perform the following
absolutely necessary. If driving through water inspection and maintenance procedures:
is unavoidable, use the following procedure:

BK0223400US.book 88
Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles
Cautions on the handling of CAUTION CAUTION

4-wheel drive vehicles Always use tires of the same size, type, and
brand that have no wear differences. Using
Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
N00530801214
tires of different size, type, brands or degree or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem- damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing.
Tires and wheels perature and result in possible damage to the If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
driving system. Further, the drive train will C or Type D equipment.
5 Since the driving torque can be applied to the
be subject to excessive loading, possibly
leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or
Even in 4WD ECO (Electronically con-
trolled 4WD) or AWC ECO (S-AWC)
four wheels, the driving performance of the other serious failures. drive mode, the vehicle cannot be towed
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is with the front or the rear wheels on the
greatly affected by the condition of the tires. ground.
Pay close attention to the tires. Towing

Install only the specified tires on all Jacking up a 4-wheel drive
wheels. Refer to Tires and wheels on vehicle
page 11-7.
Be sure all four tires and wheels are the
same size and type. WARNING
When it is necessary to replace any of the Do not crank the engine while jacking up
tires or wheels, replace all four. the vehicle.
All tires should be rotated before the wear The tire on the ground may turn and the
difference between the front and rear tires vehicle may roll off the jack.
is recognizable.
Good vehicle performance cannot be

expected if there is a difference in wear
between tires. Refer to Tire rotation on
page 9-20.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

BK0223400US.book 89
Service brake
Service brake Power brakes WARNING

N00517500275 N00517600364 If the power assist is lost or if either brake
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes hydraulic system stops working properly,
take your vehicle to an authorized Mit-
Brake pedal for more braking force with less brake pedal
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
effort.
of your choice immediately.
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, Your brakes are designed to operate at full
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
resulting in poor brake response and prema-
used. Brake pad wear alarm 5
ture wear of the brake pads.
When driving down a long or steep hill, use If the power assist is not being used, the effort N00550700124
engine braking by downshifting. needed to press the brake pedal is greater. The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
If you should lose the power assist for some metallic squeal when the brake pads have
reason, the brakes will still work. worn down enough to need service.
WARNING If the power brake unit or either of the two If you hear this sound, have the brake pads
Do not leave any objects near the brake brake hydraulic systems stops working prop- replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; erly, the rest of the brake system will still dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
doing so could prevent the full pedal
work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
stroke that would be necessary in an
quickly.
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
You will know this has happened if you find
WARNING
be operated freely at all times. Make sure Driving with worn brake pads will make it
the floor mat is securely held in place. you need to press the brake down farther, or
harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
CAUTION play in the multi-information display come
Hill start assist (if so equipped)
It is important not to drive the vehicle with on.
N00562601097
your foot resting on the brake pedal when
braking is not required. This practice can WARNING The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
result in very high brake temperatures, pre- Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
mature lining wear, and possible damage to Keep the engine running whenever your
the brakes.
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the braking force for about 2 second when you
engine while driving, the power brake move your foot from the brake pedal to the
booster will stop working and your brakes
accelerator pedal.
will not work as well.

BK0223400US.book 90
Brake assist system

3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill Warning display
CAUTION start assist gradually will decrease the
Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill
start assist is activated, the vehicle may NOTE
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- The hill start assist is activated when all of
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily the following conditions are met.
5 loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip- The engine is running. CAUTION
pery. If the warning is displayed, the hill start
(The hill start assist will not be activated
The hill start assist is not designed to keep while the engine is starting or immediately assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes after the engine is started.) Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
for more than 2 seconds. engine.
The selector lever is in any position other
When facing uphill, do not rely on using the than P (PARK) or N (NEUTRAL). Restart the engine and check whether the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position indicator/display goes out, in which case the
The vehicle is completely stationary, with
as an alternative to depressing the brake the brake pedal depressed. hill start assist is again working normally.
pedal. If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
The parking brake is released.
Doing so could cause an accident. quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
The hill start assist will not operate if the
Do not turn the ignition switch to the OFF, immediately, but the vehicle should be
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
LOCK or ACC position while the hill inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
brake pedal is released.
start assist is operating. The hill start assist Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
could stop operating, which could result in The hill start assist also operates when
reversing on an uphill slope.
an accident.
Warning display Brake assist system

To operate N00567301099
N00562801103
N00562700075
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- The brake assist system is a device assisting
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
tem, the following display/indicator will turn drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
brake pedal.
on. firmly such as in emergency stop situations
2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
and provides greater braking force.
assist will maintain the braking force
applied while stopping for approximately
- ASC indicator If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
2 seconds. brakes will be applied with more force than
usual.

BK0223400US.book 91
Anti-lock braking system

Operation of anti-lock braking system is
CAUTION NOTE not restricted situations where brakes are
The brake assist system is not a device When the anti-lock brake system warning
applied suddenly. This system may also
designed to exercise braking force greater light or only active stability control warning
prevent the wheels from locking when
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a light illuminate, the brake assist system in
sufficient distance between vehicles in front not functioning. you drive over manholes, steel roadwork
of you without relying too much on the brake plates, road markings, or any uneven road
assist system. surface.
Anti-lock braking system When the anti-lock braking system is in
N00517900240 use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
5
NOTE The anti-lock braking system helps prevent ing and hear a unique sound. It may also
Once the brake assist system is operational, the wheels from locking up when braking. feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
it maintains great braking force even if the This helps maintain vehicle drivability and In this situation, simply hold the brake
brake pedal is lightly released. steering wheel handling. pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
To stop its operation, completely remove brake, which will result in reduced
your foot from the brake pedal. braking performance.
The brake assist system may become opera- Driving hints
tional when the brake pedal is fully
depressed even if it has not been depressed When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden CAUTION
suddenly. braking), steering is slightly different The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
When the brake assist system is in use while from normal driving conditions. Use the accidents. It is your responsibility to take
driving, you may feel as if the depressed steering wheel carefully. safety precautions and to drive carefully.
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small Always keep a safe distance from the To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
motions in conjunction with the operation vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking same size and the same type.
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake system, leave a greater braking distance
assist system is operating normally and does
when:
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
Driving on gravel or snow-covered NOTE
depress the brake pedal.
roads. A whining sound is emitted from the engine
You may hear an operation noise when the compartment when driving immediately
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed Driving on uneven road surfaces.
after starting the engine. These are the nor-
while stationary. This does not indicate a mal sounds the anti-lock braking system
malfunction and the brake assist system is makes when performing a self-check. It does
operating normally. not indicate a malfunction.

BK0223400US.book 92
Anti-lock braking system

However, if the warning light / display do
NOTE CAUTION not disappear, or if they come on again
The anti-lock braking system can be used Any of the following indicates that the anti-
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
after the vehicle has reached a speed over lock braking system is not functioning and
cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops only the standard brake system is working.
working when the vehicle slows below 3 (The standard brake system is functioning Motors dealer or repair facility of your
mph (5 km/h). normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle choice as soon as possible.
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
5 Anti-lock braking system warn- a repair facility of your choice.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
If the anti-lock braking system
ing light / display position or the operation mode is put in ON,
warning light / display and brake
N00531601684 the warning light does not come on or it warning light / display illuminate
Warning light
remains on and does not go off at the same time
The warning light comes on while driving
The warning display appears while driving Warning light
Warning display
If the warning light / display
illuminate while driving Warning display
N00531701614
If only the anti-lock braking sys-

If there is a malfunction in the system, the tem warning light/display illumi-
anti-lock braking system warning light will nate
come on and the warning display will appear
on the information screen in the multi-infor- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
mation display. ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- Test the system by restarting the engine
ing system warning light only comes on when and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
the ignition switch is turned to the ON (20 km/h) or higher. The anti-lock braking system and brake force
position or the operation mode is put in ON If the warning light / display then remains distribution function may not work, so hard
and goes off a few seconds later. off during driving, there is no abnormal braking could make the vehicle unstable.
condition.

BK0223400US.book 93
Electric power steering system (EPS)

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Electric power steering sys- NOTE
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair tem (EPS) During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
facility of your choice. N00568401084
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
The power steering system operates while the space), a protection function may be acti-
NOTE engine is running. It helps reduce the effort vated to prevent overheating of the power
The anti-lock braking system warning light needed to turn the steering wheel. steering system. This function will make the
and brake warning light illuminate at the The power steering system has mechanical steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
5
same time and the warning displays appear steering capability in case the power assist is
alternately on the information screen in the wheel for a while. When the system has
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
multi-information display. cooled down, the steering effort will return
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- to normal.
cle, but you will notice it takes much more If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle is stationary with the headlights on, the
After driving on icy roads cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi headlights may become dim. This behavior
N00529201090 Motors dealer or a repair facility of your is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove choice. their original brightness after a short while.
any snow and ice which may have be left
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an WARNING
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is Electric power steering system
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the moving. Stopping the engine would make warning display
cables located at each wheel. the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
Warning lamp
Front Rear
Warning display

BK0223400US.book 94
Active stability control (ASC)

If there is a malfunction in the system, the Traction control function P.5-94
warning light will come on and the warning Skid control function P.5-94
NOTE
When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
display will appear on the information screen
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
in the multi information display. CAUTION ing sound from the engine compartment.
Under normal conditions, the warning light Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC This indicates that the system is operating
come on when the ignition switch is turned to cannot prevent the natural laws of physics normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
the ON position or the operation mode is from acting on the vehicle. This system, like When the anti-lock braking system warning
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has
5 started.
any other system, has limits and cannot help
you to maintain traction and control of the
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-

ing can lead to accidents. It is the drivers Traction control function
CAUTION responsibillty to drive carefully, This means N00559200021
If the warning display appears while the taking into account the traffic, road and envi- On slippery surfaces, the traction control
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected ronmental conditions.
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
Be sure to use the same specified type and ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
possible. It may become harder to turn the start moving from a stopped condition. It also
ASC may not work properly.
steering wheel. provides sufficient driving force and steering
Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
performance as the vehicle turns while press-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
may stop functioning properly. ing the acceleration pedal.
Active stability control
(ASC) CAUTION
N00559100147
NOTE When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
An operation noise may be emitted from the road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
The Active stability control (ASC) takes engine compartment in the following situa- the vehicle at moderate speeds.
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys- tions. The sound is associated with checking
tem, traction control function and skid control the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
function to help maintain the vehicles control may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you Skid control function
and traction. Please read this section in con- depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
N00559300019
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak- tion.
ing system, traction control function and skid When the ignition switch is set to the ON The skid control function is designed to help
control function. position. the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
When the vehicle is driven for a while after slippery roads or during rapid steering
Anti-lock braking system P.5-91 the engine is turned on.

BK0223400US.book 95
Active stability control (ASC)

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine ASC OFF indicator
output and the brake on each wheel.
CAUTION -
This indicator will turn on when the
For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch
ASC is turned off with the ASC
should be operated when your vehicle is
NOTE stopped. OFF switch.
The skid control function operates at speeds Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. normal circumstances. CAUTION
When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
operating, which means that the road is slip- 5
ASC OFF switch NOTE pery or that your vehicles wheels are begin-
N00559401264 Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower.
the stability control function and the traction If the temperature in the braking system con-
The ASC is automatically activated when the
control function. tinues to increase due to continuous brake
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
When moving out of mud, sand or fresh control on a slippery road surface, the
tion. You can deactivate the system by press- snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
ing down the ASC OFF switch for 3 indicator will blink. To prevent the brake
allow the engine speed to increase. In such system from overheating, the brake control
seconds or longer. situations, temporarily turning off ASC with of the traction control function will be tem-
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica- the ASC OFF switch will make it easier to porarily suspended. The engine control of
tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, move out your vehicle. the traction control function and normal
momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; If you continue to press the ASC OFF brake operation will not be affected.
switch after the ASC is turned off, the mis- Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the
the indicator is turned off. taken operation protection function will temperature in the braking system has come
activate and the ASC will turn back on.
down, the indicator will be turned off and
the traction control function will start operat-
ing again.
ASC operation display or ASC
OFF indicator
N00559501223
ASC operation display/ASC indicator

-
The display/indicator will blink when
the ASC is operating.

BK0223400US.book 96
Cruise control (if so equipped)
NOTE CAUTION Cruise control (if so equipped)

The indicator may come on when you The system may be malfunctioning. N00518301626
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
start the engine. This means that the battery
engine. Restart the engine and check whether Cruise control is an automatic speed control
voltage momentarily dropped when the
engine was started. It does not indicate a
the display/indicator goes out. If they go out, system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
there is no abnormal condition. If they do not vated at speeds from about 25 mph
malfunction, provided that the display goes
go out or if they turn on frequently, it is not (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
out immediately.
5 When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-
necessary to stop the vehicle immediately,
but you should have your vehicle inspected
speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
lower, making it more likely that the dis- a repair facility of your choice as soon as CAUTION
play/indicator will blink. possible. When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ASC warning display Towing ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
N00546601129 N00546301070
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
CAUTION
If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the ignition
on.
switch in the ON position or the operation
mode in ON and only the front wheels or NOTE
- ASC indicator only the rear wheels raised off the ground, Cruise control may not be able to keep your
the ASC may operate, resulting in an acci- speed on uphills or downhills.
- ASC OFF indicator dent. When towing the 2WD vehicle with the Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch You may use the accelerator pedal if you
in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position or want to stay at your set speed.
Warning display the operation mode in ACC or OFF. When Your speed may increase to more than the set
towing the vehicle with the rear wheels speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
raised, keep the ignition switch in the ACC the brake to control your speed. As a result,
position or the operation mode in ACC. the set speed driving is deactivated.
Refer to Towing on page 8-14.

BK0223400US.book 97

The SET indicator appears on the infor-
Cruise control switches To activate mation display in the meter cluster. (For
N00518401395
vehicles equipped with color liquid crys-
1. With the operation mode in ON, press the
tal display meter)
CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
to turn on the cruise control. The indica-
tor/indicator display in the meter cluster
will come on.
5
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- SET - switch NOTE
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the When you release the SET - switch (B), the
desired speed. vehicle speed will be set.
C- RES + switch Indicator
Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the original set speed. To increase the set speed
D- CANCEL switch N00518501354
Used to deactivate the set speed driving. Indicator display There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
NOTE
When operating the cruise control switches,
RES + switch
press the cruise control switches correctly. 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
The set speed driving may be deactivated speed, then push down and release the Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while
automatically if two or more switches of the SET - switch (B) when the indicator/indi- driving at the set speed, and your speed will
cruise control are pressed at the same time. cator display is illuminated. The vehicle then gradually increase.
will then maintain the desired speed.

BK0223400US.book 98

When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the SET - switch (B) for less than
To decrease the set speed
about 1 second and release it.
N00518601283
Each time you push down the SET - switch
To increase your speed in small amounts, There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. (B), your vehicle will slow down by about 1
push up the RES + switch (C) for less than mph (1.6 km/h).
about 1 second and release it. SET - switch
Each time you press the RES + switch (C),
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
Brake pedal
Push down and hold the SET - switch (B)
faster.
while driving at the set speed, and your speed While driving at the set speed, use the brake
will slow down gradually. pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
Accelerator pedal When you reach your desired speed, release then push down the SET - switch (B) and
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now release the switch momentarily to set a new
While driving at the set speed, use the accel- set. desired cruising speed.
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.

BK0223400US.book 99
NOTE
To temporarily increase or In some driving conditions, the set speed To deactivate
decrease the speed driving may be deactivated. If this happens, N00518801575
N00541701066
refer to To activate on page 5-97 and The set speed driving can be deactivated as
repeat the speed setting procedure.
follows:
To temporarily increase the speed
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
To temporarily decrease the speed switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would off.)
normally. When you release the pedal, you Press the CANCEL switch (D).
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
will return to your set speed. Depress the brake pedal.
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
push up the RES + switch (C).
Refer to To resume the set speed on page
5-100.

BK0223400US.book 100
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
CAUTION
When the set speed driving is deactivated
When your speed slows to about 10 mph automatically in any situation other than
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
because of a hill, etc.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
When your speed slows to about 25 mph switch to turn off the cruise control and have
(40 km/h) or less.
5 When the active stability control (ASC)
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
starts operating. (if so equipped) your choice.
Refer to Active stability control (ASC)
on page 5-94.
Under either of the following conditions,
To resume the set speed however, using the switch does not allow you
WARNING N00518901345 to resume the previously set speed. In these
Although the set speed driving will be If the set speed driving is deactivated by the situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
deactivated when shifting to the N condition described in To deactivate on
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the page 5-99, you can resume the previously set The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
selector lever to the N (NEUTRAL) speed by push up the RES+ switch (C) while switch is pressed.
position while driving.
driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) The operation mode is put in OFF.
You would have no engine braking and Indicator go off.
or higher.
could cause a serious accident.
The SET indicator appears on the informa-
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

tion display in the meter cluster. (For vehicles Adaptive Cruise Control
equipped with the color liquid crystal display
vated as follow: meter)
System (ACC) (if so equipped)
N00576800048
When the engine speed rises and
approaches the tachometers red zone (the ACC maintains a set speed with no need for
red-coloured part of the tachometer dial). you to use the accelerator pedal. Using a sen-
sor (A), the system also measures the relative
speed and distance between your vehicle and
a vehicle in front, and maintains a set follow-
ing distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front by automatically decelerating


your vehicle if it becomes too close to the 3- RES + switch
vehicle in front.
WARNING Used to resume the control function
Before using the ACC, read this entire sec-
The cruising set speed can be set from 25 after cancelling the ACC or the conven-
tion to understand the limitations of this
mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180 km/h). The tional cruise control.
system. Failure to follow instructions
distance can be selected from three levels. could result in an accident. Also used to increase the set speed.
If the vehicle in front decelerates, the ACC Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is 4- CANCEL switch
will automatically apply limited braking to not a collision avoidance system or an Used to cancel the control function of
maintain the distance, and if the front vehicle the ACC or the cruise control.
then accelerates, the ACC will automatically
automatic driving system. It is designed to
use only limited braking and is never a 5- ACC distance switch
5
accelerate your vehicle up to the set speed. If substitute for your safe and careful driv- Used to set or change the following dis-
your vehicle is approaching too close to the ing. Always be ready to apply the brakes tance between your vehicle and a vehi-
front vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a warn- manually. cle in front.
ing is shown in the multi information display.
When the ACC detects no vehicle ahead, the NOTE
set speed will be maintained. Cruise control switch Operate the individual switches correctly and
Conventional cruise control mode without the N00577000021
one after another.
distance control can also be selected. The ACC may be turned off or its control
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic function may be cancelled if two or more
braking. switches are pressed concurrently
ACC Indicators
N00577100035
While the ACC is turned on, indicators for

the ACC are shown in the multi information
display.
1- ACC ON/OFF switch
Used to turn on and off the ACC sys-
tem.
2- SET - switch
Used to set a desired speed or to reduce
the set speed.


State How to use ACC
Display
Stand by Active N00577200023
Vehicle in
To turn on ACC
front detected
When the operation mode is in the ON
position, press the ACC ON/OFF switch.
5
5-Following distance indicator:
Indicating the following distance.
1- ACC indicator: Two states: Stand by and Active
Indicating that the ACC is turned on. When a front vehicle is detected while
2- Control state indicator: the ACC is activated, the Active fol-
Indicating that ACC is activated. lowing distance indicator shown in the
3- Set speed indicator: illustration below will illuminate.
Indicating the set speed. When a front vehicle is detected while
If the set speed is not set, --- is the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
shown. canceled, the Stand by following dis-
4- Front vehicle indicator: tance indicator will illuminate.
Indicating when the ACC detects a
vehicle ahead. The ACC indicators will appear in the multi
When a front vehicle is detected while Following State information display.
the ACC is activated, the Active front distance set-
vehicle indicator shown in the illustra- ting symbol Stand by Active
tion below will illuminate.
When a front vehicle is detected while Long
the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
canceled, the Stand by front vehicle Middle
indicator will illuminate.
Short

NOTE To activate ACC control

Every time the operation mode is turned to
the OFF position, the ACC is turned off. With the ACC turned on, push down the
SET - switch while driving, and when your
vehicle reaches your desired speed, release
To turn off ACC the SET - switch. The ACC will activate
and initiate the speed control to maintain the
Press the ACC ON/OFF switch to turn off set speed. 5
the ACC. You can set the speed anywhere from approx-
imately 25 mph (40 km/h) to 110 mph (180
km/h).
While a vehicle in front is being detected and
your vehicle speed is between approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), you
can activate the ACC. In this case, the set
speed will be set at 25 mph (40 km/h).
The ACC cannot otherwise be activated while
your vehicle is traveling less than 25 mph (40
km/h) or greater than 110 mph (180 km/h).
The set indicator comes on, the set speed is

indicated and the following distance indicator NOTE
NOTE changes to the active display. Also a buzzer When any of the following conditions are
The ACC can be turned off even while the present, the ACC will not activate.
will sound.
ACC is active. When your vehicle speed is lower than
Every time the operation mode is turned off, approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or greater
the ACC is turned off and the set speed is than 110 mph (180 km/h).
erased. When your vehicle is driven at speeds
between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h) and the ACC is not
detecting a vehicle in front.
When ASC is in the OFF position.

NOTE When ACC detects a vehicle in

While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated. front within the set distance
When the selector lever is in positions other N00581400039
than D (DRIVE) and Ds (DOWN-
SHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING). The ACC will maintain the distance to the
While the brake pedal is depressed. front vehicle and will apply the brakes auto-
While the parking brake is engaged. matically when the system judges braking is
necessary. The distance can be selected from
5 When the ACC system has judged that the
three levels.
performance for detecting a front vehicle is
degraded.
NOTE
When an abnormality in the ACC system
If the brake pedal is not depressed within 2
has been detected.
seconds after your vehicle has been stopped
by the ACC, a warning buzzer will sound,
When ACC detects no vehicle the above warning will be shown in the multi
information display to alert the driver, and
in front within the set distance the ACC control will be canceled.
N00581300025
When depressing the brake pedal while the
The speed of your vehicle will be maintained automatic brake is applied, the brake pedal
at the speed you have set. The speed can be will feel firm. This is normal. Depress the
set between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) When the front vehicle stops, the ACC will brake pedal harder to apply greater braking
and 110 mph (180 km/h). automatically apply the brakes to stop your force.
vehicle. During the automatic braking, operation
A few seconds after your vehicle has stopped, sounds may be heard. This is normal.
NOTE the ACC will release the brakes and your
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed on vehicle will start to move or creep slowly.
a down slope, the system will automatically You must apply the brakes to keep your vehi- WARNING
apply the brake to maintain the vehicle set
cle stationary. Never leave the vehicle while it is being
speed.
stopped by the ACC.
When the ACC no longer detects a vehicle in

front, the buzzer will sound, the vehicle sym-
bol in the display will disappear and your


vehicle will slowly accelerate to the set
speed.
WARNING WARNING
When driving on a curve. When the ACC is not being used, turn off
the system to avoid unexpected ACC acti-
vation.
Never operate the ACC from outside the
vehicle.
The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
and/or give the approach alarm in the fol-
lowing cases.
5
When the vehicle in front has changed its When an object other than a vehicle,
course or lane, if a stationary vehicle such as a pedestrian, is in front.
appears in front your vehicle, the ACC When a malfunction is detected in the
WARNING will not decelerate your vehicle. system.
Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
speed in the following situations. Apply in the following cases, but will give the
the brake, if necessary, to slow down.
Approach alarm approach alarm.
When your vehicle no longer follows the
N00576900036 When the front vehicle is stationary or
vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway exit or While the ACC is activated, if your vehicle is moving at an extremely slow speed.
when your vehicle or the vehicle in front approaching too closely to the vehicle in When your brake system has a problem,
changes its lane. front, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a such as overheating.
buzzer and displaying a message. Apply the The ACC may not be able to maintain the
set speed or the distance to a vehicle in
brakes to maintain the appropriate distance to
front and may not alert the driver, if the
the vehicle in front.
system cannot detect the front vehicle
properly. Typical situations include:
When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
close distance.
When a vehicle in front is not completely
in your path.
When a vehicle in front is towing a
trailer.
When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in
front.

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

When a vehicle in front is a truck loaded When driving on a winding road. To maintain proper performance of the ACC:
with freight that protrudes rearward Always clean the surface of the radar sen-
from the cargo bed. sor.
When the height of a vehicle in front is Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-
extremely low or the road clearance of rounding area.
the vehicle is extremely high. Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or
5 When driving on a road with alternating
up and down surfaces.
its surrounding area.
Do not paint the radar sensor.
When driving on a curve. Never use the ACC in the following situa- Do not install a grill guard.
When driving on a bumpy or rough road. tions: Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur-
When driving in a tunnel. In heavy traffic. rounding area.
When driving in construction zones. On winding roads. Always use tires of the same size, same
When the rear of your vehicle is weighed On slippery roads, such as icy, snow-cov- type, and same brand, and which have no
down with the weight of passengers and ered or dirt roads. significant wear differences.
luggage In adverse weather conditions, such as Do not modify the vehicles suspension.
For up to two minutes after starting driv- rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
ing. On steep downslopes.
When driving in curved sections of road When the inclination of a road fre- To increase the set speed
including their entrance/outlet or run- quently changes. N00581500027
ning beside a closed lane in a traffic work
When the approach alarm frequently
or similar zone. There are two ways to increase the set speed.
sounds.
When your vehicle is towed or is towing
another vehicle. By using the RES + switch:
When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers. The set speed will increase by 1 mph (1
When tire inflation pressures are not km/h) every time you push up the RES +
adequate. switch while the ACC is activated. If you
When the temporary spare tire is being hold the switch pushed up, the set speed
When the surface of the sensor is covered used.
with dirt, snow, ice, etc. increases in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments.
When the radar sensor and/or its sur-
When a front vehicle or an oncoming rounding area are damaged or deformed.
vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.


switch and release the accelerator pedal; the
new speed is then set in the system.
To decrease the set speed
N00581600028
There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
By using the SET - switch:
The set speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 5

km/h) every time you push down the SET -
switch while the ACC is activated. If you
hold the switch pushed down, the set speed
NOTE decreases in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments.
There is some time lag until the vehicle
begins accelerating to the new set speed after
the set speed has been changed. WARNING
The set speed can be changed even while The ACC braking control and approach
your vehicle is following a vehicle in front alarm functions will not work while the
using the ACC. In this case, however, accelerator pedal is depressed.
although the set speed itself is increased,
your vehicle will not accelerate.
When the switch is held, a buzzer will sound NOTE
every time the set speed changes The set speed indicator in the multi informa-
tion display will show --- while the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
By using the accelerator pedal: If the SET - button is not pushed down
while depressing the accelerator pedal, your NOTE
vehicle speed will return to the set speed, There is some time lag until the vehicle
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
after the accelerator pedal is released. When begins decelerating after the set speed has
while driving with the ACC control working, been changed.
the accelerator pedal is released, the ACC
you can accelerate the vehicle beyond the braking control and approach alarm func-
presently set speed. tions may not immediately work.
When the vehicle speed reaches your desired
speed, push down and release the SET -

NOTE NOTE NOTE

The set speed can be changed even while The ACC control will not resume after The set speed indication on the display turns
your vehicle is following a vehicle in front releasing the brake pedal. to --- when the accelerator pedal is
using the ACC. In this case, however, depressed. This indication remains as long as
although the set speed itself is decreased, the pedal is in a depressed position.
your vehicle will not decelerate. In certain conditions, the braking control and
To temporarily accelerate the
When the switch is held, a buzzer will sound alarming functions of ACC may not work for
vehicle
5 every time the set speed changes
N00582800027
a short while after releasing the accelerator
pedal.
By using the brake pedal: Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem-
porarily accelerate the vehicle. Releasing the
By depressing the brake pedal while the ACC
pedal automatically slows down the vehicle To cancel ACC control
to the set speed and ACC restarts its control. N00581700045
is activated, the ACC control is canceled and
your vehicle speed will decrease. There are two ways to cancel the ACC con-
At the point where the vehicle speed reaches trol.
your desired speed, push down and release
By pressing the CANCEL switch.
the SET - switch; the new speed is then set
By depressing the brake pedal.
in the system.
WARNING
The ACC braking control and approach
alarm functions will not work while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.


This can occur when
NOTE
You can also cancel the ACC control by In adverse weather conditions, such as
pressing the ACC ON/OFF switch. If this rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
switch is pressed while the ACC is ON, Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
the ACC will be turned off.
adhere to the surface of the radar sensor.
A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
When the ACC is canceled, the SET indi- splashing water, snow or dirt.
cator goes off and the following distance indi- Driving on a nonbusy road with a few 5
cator turns to the standby display. The front vehicles and obstacles in front.
When your vehicle stops.
vehicle indicator also turns to the standby The brake pads are overheating.
When the ASC is turned off.
display when a front vehicle is detected.
While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.
When the selector lever is in a position If the display keeps showing the message,
other than D (DRIVE) and Ds there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal-
(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING). function. Contact your authorized Mitsubishi
When the parking brake is engaged. Motors dealer.
When the ACC system detects an abnormal-

When the ACC system determines that its
ity in the system, the ACC system will be
performance has been degraded, a buzzer will
turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message
sound and a message will be displayed in the
will be displayed in the multi information dis-
multi information display.
play. If the message remains after the opera-
In any of the situations listed below, the ACC tion mode has been turned to the OFF
control is automatically canceled, a buzzer position and then turned back to the ON
sounds and a message is shown in the multi- position, contact your authorized Mitsubishi
information display. Motors dealer.

NOTE NOTE
While the parking brake is engaged. Actual distance will vary depending on your
When the ACC system has judged that the vehicle speed and the front vehicle speed.
performance for detecting a front vehicle is The distance will become longer when the
degraded. vehicle speeds are higher.
When an abnormality in the ACC system
has been detected. The following distance indicator shows the
5 level of the following distance:
To change the following dis- Long
To resume the control tance
N00581800033
N00581900021
After the ACC control has been canceled with With the ACC turned on, the distance
the ACC turned on, the ACC control can be between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead can Middle
resumed by pushing up and releasing the be selected from three levels by pushing the
RES + switch. ACC distance switch. Each time the ACC
distance switch is pushed, the following dis-
NOTE tance will change from Long to Middle, Short
When any of the following conditions are to Short, and return to Long again.Every
present, the ACC control cannot be resumed. time the ACC is turned to ON, the following
When your vehicle speed is lower than distance is reset to Long.
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
than 110 mph (180 km/h).
When your vehicle is driven at speeds To activate conventional cruise
between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) control
and 25 mph (40 km/h) and the ACC is not N00582000029
detecting a vehicle in front.
Press and hold the ACC ON/OFF switch
When ASC is in the OFF position.
while the operation mode is in the ON posi-
While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.
tion. A buzzer will sound and the multi infor-
When the selector lever is in positions other
than D (DRIVE) and Ds (DOWN- mation display will show the following
SHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING). indicator.
While the brake pedal is depressed.

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) (if so equipped)

this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may Forward Collision Mitiga-
cause undesired operation. tion System (FCM) (if so
The conventional cruise control is turned off equipped)
when the operation mode is tuned off. CAUTION N00577300040
For operation of the cruise control, refer to Changes or modifications not expressly
Cruise control on page 5-96. approved by the manufacturer for compli- The Forward Collision Mitigation System
ate the equipment.
(FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a
collision with a vehicle straight ahead of your
5
NOTE
The conventional cruise control does not vehicle. The FCM uses a radar sensor (A) to
sound or display the approach alarm, will not determine the distance to a vehicle in front
adjust your vehicle speed, and does not con- and relative speed to that vehicle. The FCM is
trol the distance between your vehicle and a not designed as an automatic driving system
vehicle in front. or as a collision avoidance system.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle
straight ahead in your path and the FCM
General information judges that there is the risk of a collision, the
N00582100020 system will give audible and visual warnings.
FCC ID:OAYARS3-B (for vehicles sold in When the FCM judges that a collision with
the U.S.A) the vehicle straight-ahead is imminent, the
IC: 4135A-ARS3B (for vehicles sold in the system will automatically apply moderate
Canada) braking to warn you to apply the brakes
immediately.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC When the FCM judges that a collision with
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt the vehicle straight-ahead is highly unavoid-
RSS standard(s). able, the system will apply emergency brak-
Operation is subject to the following two con- ing to reduce the severity of the collision and,
ditions. if possible, to avoid the collision.
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic
this device may not cause harmful inter- braking.
ference.

Forward collision warning FCM braking function

function N00577700057
N00577400025 When the FCM judges that a collision with

If the system judges that there is a risk of the vehicle straight-ahead is imminent, the
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front, FCM will automatically apply moderate brak-
this function warns you of the potential haz- ing to warn the driver to apply the brakes
ard with visual and audible alarms. immediately.
5 When this function is triggered, a buzzer If the FCM judges that the collision is highly
sounds and, at the same time, a BRAKE unavoidable, it will automatically apply
message appears on the information screen of emergency braking to reduce the severity of
the multi-information display. the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-
WARNING The FCM will also prepare to provide quick lision.
Before using the FCM, read this entire brake response and greater brake force when When the FCM applies emergency braking, a
section to fully understand the limitations you apply the brakes. buzzer sounds and a warning message is dis-
of this system. Failure to follow instruc- played in the information screen of the multi-
tions could result in an accident. information display.
The FCM is designed to help avoid certain
frontal collisions or reduce the crash
speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-
tute for your safe and careful driving.
Under certain circumstances, the system
may not operate or may not detect cor-
rectly a vehicle in front. When your vehi-
cle is approaching a vehicle too closely,
take all necessary actions to avoid a colli-
sion, such as braking and steering, regard- NOTE
less of whether the FCM is activated or If the FCM detects that the driver is making
not. Never rely on the FCM to prevent a steering and/or acceleration inputs to try and WARNING
collision. avoid a collision, the forward collision warn- If the ASC is turned off, the FCM braking
ings may stop. function will not operate. Refer to Active
stability control on page 5-94.


If the brake pedal is not depressed within When a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of When driving on a road with alternating
2 seconds after your vehicle has been your vehicle. up and down steep slopes.
stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer When the vehicle in front is moving at a When driving on a curve.
will sound and the brakes activated by the speed much lower than your vehicles When driving on a bumpy or rough road.
FCM will automatically be released. speed. When driving in a tunnel.
Apply the brakes as necessary to keep Braking function will not work in the fol- When the system recognizes drivers
your vehicle stationary. lowing situations. steering, accelerating, braking or gear 5
Your vehicle is driving at approximately shifting actions as evasive actions to
19 mph (30 km/h) or faster while the avoid collision.
NOTE vehicle in front is stationary or moving When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
When depressing the brake pedal while auto- extremely slow. down with the weight of passengers and
matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will ASC is OFF. luggage
feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake The forward collision warning function For up to two minutes after starting driv-
pedal harder to apply greater braking force. and/or the FCM braking function may not ing.
During the automatic braking, operating activate in certain situations. Some of In adverse weather conditions, such as
sounds may be heard. This is normal. these include: rain, snow or fog.
When a vehicle cuts into your path at a When the surface of the sensor is covered
close distance. with dirt, snow and ice, etc.
WARNING When a vehicle ahead is moving at low When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming
The FCM will not activate and will not speed. vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
provide either warning or braking in cer- When a vehicle ahead is not completely When the system recognizes drivers
tain situations. Some of these include: in your path. steering or accelerating actions as evasive
When the selector lever is in the P When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer. actions to avoid collision, FCM control
(PARK), the R (REVERSE), or the When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in and alarm functions may be canceled.
N (NEUTRAL) position. front. In certain situations, though there is little
When your vehicle speed is extremely When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded or no risk of a collision, the FCM may
low, less than approximately 2 mph with freight that protrudes rearward activate. Examples include:
(2km/h). from the cargo bed. When overtaking a vehicle.
When an object other than a vehicle, When the height of a vehicle ahead is When driving on a curve.
such as a pedestrian, is in front. extremely low or its road clearance is
When the FCM has detected a problem extremely high.
in the system.

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

When there is a road side object (B) that When a vehicle in the next lane becomes Do not install a grill guard.
reflects the radar sensor signal, such as a positioned directly in front of your vehi- Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur-
road sign. cle due to winding road conditions. rounding area.
Always use tires of the same size, same
type and same brand, and which have no
significant wear differences.
5 Do not modify the vehicles suspensions.
FCM ON/OFF switch

N00577800045
When approaching a gate, a railroad The FCM should be tuned off if any of fol-
crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge, lowing situations occur: This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM
manhole lid or a speed bump. When the tires are not properly inflated. and also to select the distance which will trig-
When driving under an overpass or When the emergency spare tire is used. ger the forward collision warning function.
pedestrian bridge. When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
When driving in a narrow tunnel. cle tows another vehicle.
When driving in a parking structure. When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
When approaching a slope where the When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
incline changes significantly. mometer or free rollers.
When trying to stop your vehicle very When the area where the radar sensor is
close to a vehicle or an object in front. installed has been damaged or deformed.
When passing a vehicle or an object
closely.
CAUTION
To maintain proper performance of the FCM;
Always clean the surface of the radar sen-
sor.
Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-
rounding area.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or
its surrounding area.
Do not paint the radar sensor.

To turn on/off the FCM system To change forward collision warn- NOTE
ing distance The distance which will trigger the FCM
Every time the operation mode is turned to braking function cannot be adjusted.
ON, the FCM will automatically be turned The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-
on. gers the forward collision warnings can be When a problem is detected
To turn off the FCM, press and hold the FCM selected from two levels, NEAR or FAR.
switch. A buzzer will sound and the FCM To change the distance mode, push the FCM When the FCM system determines that its
OFF message and indicator will appear ON/OFF switch. Every time the switch is performance has been degraded, the forward
5
in the multi-information display. pushed, the distance mode will be switched. collision warning function and the FCM brak-
The selected distance mode is shown on the ing function will become inoperative.
information screen of the multi-information This can occur when
display.
When NEAR is selected Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
adhere to the surface of the radar sensor.
In adverse weather conditions, such as
rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
splashing water, snow or dirt.
To turn on the FCM again, press and hold the
Driving on a nonbusy road with a few
FCM switch. A buzzer will sound, the FCM When FAR is selected
vehicles and obstacles in front.
OFF message and the indicator will go The brake pads are overheating.
off, and a current distance mode for the for-
ward collision warning will be shown in the FCM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE
multi-information display. message will appear and the FCM OFF
indicator will be lit on the information screen
of the multi-information display.
NOTE When the radar sensor performance returns,
Actual distance which triggers the forward the FCM functions will resume operation.
collision warnings will vary depending on
your vehicle speed and the front vehicle
speed. The distance will become longer
when the vehicle speeds are higher.

Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) (if so equipped)
CAUTION
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ate the equipment.
5
NOTE General information
The FCM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAIL- N00580900024
ABLE message may temporarily appear on
FCC ID:OAYARS3-B (for vehicles sold in
the information screen when the radar cannot
detect a vehicle or object within range. This
the U.S.A)
is not a malfunction. When a vehicle or an IC: 4135A-ARS3B (for vehicles sold in the
object comes within range, the FCM func- Canada)
tion will resume and the message will go off.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys- RSS standard(s).
tem, the FCM! and the FCM SERVICE Operation is subject to the following two con-
REQUIRED message will appear, the FCM ditions.
OFF indicator will be lit on the information
screen of the multi-information display and this device may not cause harmful inter-
Lane Departure Warning
the FCM will automatically be turned off. ference received. System (LDW) (if so equipped)
If the message remains even after the opera- this device must accept any interference N00577900033
tion mode is tuned to OFF and then back to received including interference that may
ON, please contact your authorized Mit- The Lane Departure Warning system (LDW)
cause undesired operation.
subishi Motors dealer. is a driving aid system to help prevent unin-
tentional lane departure. The LDW is
designed to read lane markers by using a
camera (A) under certain conditions. The
LDW will give you both visual and audible


warnings when your vehicle is leaving or has
left the lane.
WARNING
Before using the LDW, read this entire
section to understand the limitations of
this system. Failure to follow instructions
could result in an accident.
Turning on the LDW

N00578000028
5
Every time the operation mode is turned to
ON, the LDW will automatically be turned
on and the LDW indicator will appear on
the information screen of the multi-informa- NOTE
tion display, When you set the operation mode to OFF
with the system OFF, the system will be
restored ON. (LDW 1 mode)
You can also select the LDW 2 mode
which makes always the LDW system in
OFF state.
1. Press the LDW switch, and the system is
placed in the OFF state.
2. Press and hold the LDW switch for more
than approximately 10 seconds. The
LDW 2 indicator appears on the multi
Turning off the LDW 3. Press the LDW switch, and the LDW
N00581000035 indicator on the top-right of the multi
WARNING To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch. information display goes out.
Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is The LDW indicator on the information To return to the LDW 1 mode, put the sys-
not a collision avoidance system and is not tem in OFF state, press and hold the LDW
screen of the multi-information display will
a substitute for your safe and careful driv- switch for more than approximately 10 sec-
then go out.
ing. onds. The LDW 1 indicator appears on the
To return the LDW to ON, press the LDW multi information display.
switch again.

Operation of the LDW WARNING

N00581100023 When driving in an extremely narrow
The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of lane.
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is When the distance between your vehicle
and a vehicle in front is short.
travelling and issuing an audible warning
When driving into the sun light.
when your vehicle begins to leave that travel
When driving on curves.
lane. When operating, the LDW indicator
5 on the multi-information display will be When driving on bumpy roads.
When driving in construction zones.
changed to indicator (green). The LDW When passing through a place where the
will not operate, however, and the LDW NOTE brightness suddenly changes, such as at
indicator will be appeared if any of following The warnings will not continue for more than the entrance to or exit of a tunnel.
conditions have occurred: 3 seconds, even if your vehicle continues When the headlights of an oncoming
leaving the lane. vehicle are very bright.
The vehicle speed is less than 38 mph (60 When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
km/h). down with the weight of passengers and
The turn signal lever is being operated or WARNING luggage.
has been operated in the past 7 seconds. The LDW will not function when no lane When the headlights of your vehicle are
The hazard warning light is being oper- marker exists, such as at an intersection not clean or are not properly aimed.
ated or has been operated in the past 7 or near a toll booth. When the front windshield is not clean.
seconds. The LDW may not be able to detect the When the front windshield wipers do not
The brake pedal is being depressed. lane correctly in the following situations clean the windshield properly.
and the LDW may not give warnings or
may give false warnings:
Lane departure warning When lane markers are not clearly visi- CAUTION
N00581200037
ble. To maintain proper function of the LDW:
While the LDW indicator in the informa- When the road surface is shiny. Always keep the windshield and the head-
tion display is lit in green, if your vehicle is When old lane markers remain on the lamps clean.
leaving or has left the lane, a buzzer will road surface. Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on
sound intermittently, LANE DEPARTURE When the lane markers are double lines the front windshield in front of the LDW
will appear in the information display and or the shape of the lane markers are camera
complicated. Avoid applying a shock or load to the LDW
the indicator will be flashing in amber.
camera.

CAUTION Tire pressure monitoring

Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the
LDW camera.
system
N00530201540
Use only Mitsubishi Motors genuine Parts
when replacing the windshield wipers. The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
NOTE system only indicates when a tire is signifi- 5
When driving conditions are not suitable to cantly under-inflated.
use the LDW, turn off the LDW. NOTE
The warning message can be cleared tempo-
rarily by setting the LDW switch to OFF.
System problem warning
N00578100029
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual LDW deactivation due to fault
warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm. If the LDW is deactivated due to a malfunc-
tion in the system, the alarm shown below is
LDW camera is too hot displayed. Contact your authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer for inspection of the sys-
The alarm shown below is displayed if the tem.
system becomes temporarily unavailable due
WARNING
The compact spare wheel does not have a
to the high temperature of the LDW camera.
tire inflation pressure sensor.
After the camera has cooled down, the system When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
will automatically return to operation. sure monitoring system will not work
properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.


warning light normally illuminates and goes
NOTE NOTE off a few seconds later.
The tire pressure monitoring system is not a For details, please contact your authorized
substitute for regularly checking tire infla- Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for
tion pressures. the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures Type 1
the warning light will remain illuminated
as described in Tires on page 9-15.
while the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
tion or the operation mode is put in ON.
5 installed in the illustrated location.
On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
Refer to If the warning light / display illumi-
the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet nates while driving on page 5-122 and take
and washer (C) with a new one when the the necessary measures.
tire is replaced.
On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has NOTE
the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber In addition, the warning display is displayed
Type 2
valve (D) with new one when the tire is
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
replaced.
mation display.
Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem warning light / display
N00532701334
When the ignition switch is turned to the

ON, the tire pressure monitoring system


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
CAUTION NOTE and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
If the tire pressure monitoring system warn- In addition, the warning display is displayed
cles handling and stopping ability. Please
ing light does not illuminate when the igni- on the information screen in the multi-infor-
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
tion switch is turned to the ON position or mation display.
the operation mode is put in ON, it means proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers
that the tire pressure monitoring system is responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
not working properly. Have the system sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. low tire pressure telltale.
5
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
sharp turning and high-speed driving. should be checked monthly when cold and the system is not operating properly. The
If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres- inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the with the low tire pressure telltale.
monitoring system warning light will blink vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. When the system detects a malfunction, the
for approximately 1 minute and then remain (If your vehicle has tires of a different size telltale will flash for approximately one min-
continuously illuminated. The warning light than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
will issue further warnings each time the
ute and then remain continuously illuminated.
or tire inflation pressure label, you should This sequence will continue upon subsequent
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
determine the proper tire inflation pressure vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
for those tires.) exists.
off after few minutes driving. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
If it then goes off during driving, there is no been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or
problem. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended.
However, if the warning light does not go pressure telltale when one or more of your TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is tires is significantly under-inflated. of reasons, including the installation of
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. tale illuminates, you should stop and check
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
system may be preventing the monitoring of
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
the warning light appears while driving,
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
high-speed driving.


allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
NOTE NOTE
Once adjustments have been made, the warn- To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
If the warning light / display driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
illuminates while driving 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is
N00532801511 warning light remains illuminated after not covered by your warranty.
1. If the tire pressure monitoring system you have been driving for about 20 min-
5 warning light illuminates, avoiding hard utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tire.
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and sure, one or more of the tires may have a Such a spray could damage the tire inflation
high speeds. You should stop and adjust puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a pressure sensors.
the tires to the proper inflation pressure as puncture, have it repaired by an autho- Have any puncture repaired by an authorized
soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
the same time. Refer to Tires on page possible.
9-15.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
NOTE WARNING work normally in the following circum-
If the warning light / display illuminates stances:
In addition, the warning display is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor- while you are driving, avoid hard braking,
sharp steering maneuvers and high A wireless facility or device using the
mation display. same frequency is near the vehicle.
speeds.
When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
Driving with an under-inflated tire
sure, do not apply excessive force to the
adversely affects vehicle performance and and/or on the wheels.
valve stem to avoid breakage.
can result in an accident. The tire inflation pressure sensors battery
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
is dead.
valve stem. Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could CAUTION wheels are being used.
get into the valve, resulting in damage to the If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
tire inflation pressure sensor. the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire tion pressure sensors are being used.
Do not use metal valve caps, which may could lead to an accident. Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion The warning light / display may not illumi- rized by the vehicle are used.
and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen- nate immediately in the event of a tire blow- Compact spare tire is fitted as a road
sors. out or rapid leak. wheel.


A window tint that affects the radio wave 3. Hold down the multi information display
signals is installed.
CAUTION switch for about 3 seconds or more. The
The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
setting changes to the selected tire ID set.
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
NOTE sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- the sensors.
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
large variations in ambient temperature, the
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light / display come on)
Tire ID set change 5
N00584300026
when the ambient temperature is relatively
low. If the warning light / display comes on, In case that 2 sets of tire inflation pressure
adjust the tire inflation pressure. sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the
valid tire ID set can be changed by following
procedure.
Whenever the tires and wheels 4. The valid tire ID set is changed, and the
[For vehicles equipped with color liquid crys- number of the tire pressure monitoring
are replaced with new ones tal display meter] system (TPMS) SET indicator is changed.
N00532900081
1. Operate the multi information display

If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure NOTE
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be switch to switch the information screen to
Each time this procedure is done, the tire ID
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring the menu screen.
set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 )
system. Have tire and wheel replacement per- Refer to Multi information display
The tire ID set is NOT changed, in case that
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors switch on page 5-129. only 1 set of ID is registered.
dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire Refer to Changing the function settings
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel on page 5-140.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- [For vehicles equipped with mono-color liq-
replacement is not done by an authorized
uid crystal display meter]
Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by play switch to select (tire
your warranty. ID set change). 1. Transit the display by multi information
display switch until the tire pressure mon-
itoring system (TPMS) SET indicator is
displayed.


2. Hold down the multi information display
switch for 10 seconds or more. (A beep is
General information Rear-view camera (if so
N00533001233
heard.) equipped)
(Although the reset execution starts at Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- N00546201213
holding down the switch for 3 seconds, ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
keep holding down the switch continu- Communications Commission (FCC) Rules When the selector lever is in the R
ously.) (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry (REVERSE) position with the ignition switch
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). in the ON position, or the operation mode
5 This device complies with part 15 of FCC is put in ON, the rear-view image will be dis-
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt played on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi-
RSS standard(s). Communication System or the DISPLAY
Operation is subject to the following two con- AUDIO.
ditions. When the selector lever is shifted out of the
R (REVERSE) position, the rear-view
This device may not cause harmful inter- image will go off.
ference.
This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
WARNING
Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
3. The valid tire ID set is changed, and the cause undesired operation.
to clear the area behind your vehicle.
number of the tire pressure monitoring Always check visually behind and all
system (TPMS) SET indicator is changed. CAUTION around your vehicle for persons, animals,
Changes or modifications not expressly obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to
do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
NOTE approved by the manufacturer for compli-
injury or death.
Each time this procedure is done, the tire ID ance could void the users authority to oper-
ate the equipment. The rear-view camera is an aid system for
set is changed. (1 - 2 - 1 - 2 ) backing up, but it is not a substitute for
The tire ID set is NOT changed, in case that your visual confirmation.
only 1 set of ID is registered. The view on the screen is limited, and
objects outside the view, such as under the
bumper or around either corner of the
bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.

Location of rear-view camera Reference lines on the screen CAUTION

The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at lens. As a result, images and distances shown
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
the left side of the liftgate handle. on the screen are not exact.
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
Actual distance may be different from dis-
Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
5
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the width are based on a level, flat road surface.
vehicle body. In the following cases, objects shown on the
Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- screen will appear to be farther off than they
tance from the rear bumper. actually are.
When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)
When there is an upward slope at the back.
(Case2)
CAUTION
If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
Case 1
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.
To avoid damaging the camera;
Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
it by using an abrasive compound.
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
Do not disassemble the camera.
rear bumper
Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
Do not spray the camera and its surround- A- Actual objects
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) B- Objects shown on the screen
ings with high-pressure water.
Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.

Instrument cluster
Case 2 Instrument cluster

N00519001402
Type 1
5 A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
CAUTION NOTE
The reference lines for distance and vehicle Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
width are intended to indicate the distance to Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically Type 2
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. by sensors.
They may not indicate correct distance On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
depending on the shape of an obstacle. Communication System, it is possible to
For example, when there is an object behind change the display language of the screen.
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting For details, please refer to the separated
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference owners manual for Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
lines on the screen will indicate that point A munication System.
is the farthest point and point B is the closest Under certain circumstances, it may become
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B difficult to see an image on the screen, even
are actually the same distance from the vehi- when the system is functioning correctly.
cle, and point C is farther off than point A 1- Tachometer P.5-127
In a dark area, such as at night.
and B.
When water drops or condensation are on
the lens.
When sun light or headlights shine directly
into the lens.

Instrument cluster
2- Multi Information display (Type
1:Color liquid crystal display type)
Type B CAUTION
The red zone indicates an engine speed
P.5-128
beyond the range of safe operation.
Information screen display list (Type 1)
P.5-155 Select the correct selector position to control
Multi Information display (Type the engine speed so that the tachometer indi-
2:Mono-color liquid crystal display cator does not enter the red zone.
type) P.5-146
3- Speedometer P.5-127
5
4- Rheostat illumination button (Type 1) Meter illumination control
P.5-127 (Vehicle equipped with the
5- Multi information display switch (Type
2) P.5-147 multi information display -
Tachometer Type 1)
N00519201303
Speedometer The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
N00554901248
N00519101272 Each time you press this button, there is a

minute. This allows the driver to determine sound and the brightness of the instruments
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in the most efficient selector position and engine changes.
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour speed combinations.
(km/h). This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
performance.
Type A
1- Brightness level
2- Rheostat illumination button

Multi Information display - Type 1

3- Door ajar warning display screen
NOTE Multi Information display - P.5-134
You can adjust to 8 different levels for when
the front side-marker lights are illuminated
Type 1 4- Odometer P.5-135
N00555001347
and when they are not.
If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic The multi information display displays warn-
light control, the light switch is in a position ings, the odometer, trip odometer, service
other than the OFF position and it is suffi- reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel
5 ciently dark outside the vehicle, the meter
illumination switches automatically to the
remaining, outside temperature, selector lever
position, average and momentary fuel con-
adjusted brightness. sumption, driving range, average speed, etc.
The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned to It is also possible to change elements such as
the OFF or LOCK position or the opera- the language and units used on the multi
tion mode is put in OFF.
If you press and hold the button for longer
than about 2 second when the front side- [With ignition switch or operation mode in
marker lights are illuminated, the brightness OFF]
level changes to the maximum level. Press-
ing and holding the button for longer than
about 2 second again returns the brightness
level to the previous level.
Communication System, the map screen
color of Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
System may not be switched to nighttime
setting when the meter illumination bright-
ness level is at the maximum.
1- Warning display screen P.5-134

2- Information screen P.5-130
Interrupt display screen P.5-133


[With ignition switch or operation mode in ON]
1- Drive mode indicator display screen (if 9- Engine coolant temperature display
P.5-134
NOTE
so equipped) P.5-80 The fuel units, outside temperature units,
2- S-AWC drive mode display screen (if 10- Odometer P.5-135
display language, and other settings can be
so equipped) P.5-83 11- Cruise control display screen (if so changed.
3- equipped) P.5-96 Refer to Changing the function settings on
Warning display screen P.5-134
12- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) page 5-140.
4- Forward Collision Mitigation System
display screen (if so equipped)
(FCM) OFF display screen (if so
P.5-100
equipped) P.5-111
13- ECO indicator P.5-139 Multi information display
5- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) dis-
14- Fuel remaining display screen
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-116
P.5-135 switch
6- ECO mode indicator display screen N00555101205
15- Outside temperature display screen
P.5-184 Each time the multi information display
P.5-135
7- Information screen P.5-130 switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the
8- Selector lever position display multi information display changes between
P.5-66, 5-73 information such as warnings, trip odometer,

average and momentary fuel consumption,
distance range, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi
information display by operating the multi
information display switch.
Information screen (With the ignition switch in OFF or LOCK position or the operation mode in
OFF)
N00555301177
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display


1- Trip odometer P.5-135
3- ECO score display P.5-139
4- Service reminder P.5-136
5- Redisplay of a warning display screen P.5-134
Information screen (With the ignition switch is turned from the OFF or LOCK position to the
ON position or the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON) 5
N00555801202
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or the operation mode is put in ON, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When the inspection time has arrived

1- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF
2- System check screen P.5-137
3- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON

Information screen (With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON)
N00556201232
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display

3- Driving range display P.5-138
ECO drive assist display P.5-139
4- Average fuel consumption display
P.5-138
ECO drive assist display P.5-139
5- Average speed display P.5-138
Momentary fuel consumption display P.5-139
6- ECO score display P.5-139
7- S-AWC operation display (if so equipped) P.5-84


9- Function setting screen P.5-140
10- Redisplay of a warning display screen P.5-134
NOTE
While driving, the service reminder are not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch. Always stop the vehicle in a safe place
before operating.
While driving, the function setting screen is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.
Always park the vehicle in a safe place, firmly apply the parking brake and put the selector lever into the P (PARK) position before operating the func-
tion setting screen.
5
Refer to Changing the function settings on page 5-140.
When there is information to be announced, such as a system fault, the tone sounds and the screen display is switched.
Refer to Interrupt display screen on page 5-133.
Interrupt display screen Returning to the display screen

N00556301217 from before the warning display
Warning display Even if the cause of the warning display is

not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
When there is information to be announced,
play.
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
the information screen is switched to the If you press the multi information display
warning display screen. switch, the display screen switches to the
Refer to the warning list and take the neces- screen display from before the warning and
sary measures.
Refer to Warning display list on page the warning (A) is displayed.
5-156.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.

NOTE warning display screen Door ajar warning display

Warning display screens with a or
N00555201222
screen
This is displayed when you press the multi N00529700014
mark displayed in the upper right of the
information display switch and return from
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi information dis-
the warning display screen to the previous
play switch as follows. screen.
This mark is also displayed if there is another
5 : Press lightly.
warning other than the one displayed.
: Press for about 2 seconds or more. When the cause of the warning display is If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
eliminated, the warning goes out automat- pletely closed, this displays the open door or
ically. liftgate.
Redisplay of a warning display If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
screen NOTE
km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone will
N00579600021 sound 4 times to inform you that a door is
When the warning is displayed, the warn- ajar.
When the warning is displayed, if you ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
lightly press the multi information display information screen.
switch a few times, the warning display Refer to Information screen (with the igni-
CAUTION
screen you switched from is redisplayed. tion switch in OFF or LOCK position or Always make sure that the warning display
the operation mode in OFF) on page 5-130. goes out before beginning to drive.
Refer to Information screen (with the igni-
Other interrupt displays tion switch or the operation mode in ON) on
N00579700022
page 5-132. Engine coolant temperature
The operation status of each system is dis-
display
played on the information screen.
N00578200020
For further details, refer to the appropriate
page in the warning display list. Shows the engine coolant temperature.
Refer to Other interrupt displays on page If the coolant becomes hot, will blink.
5-167. Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
temperature display while you are driving.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

If the engine is overheating, will blink. It may take several seconds to stabilize the On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
display after refilling the tank. rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
and take the required measures. Refer to the operation mode in ON, the remaining
Engine overheating on page 8-4. fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel Outside temperature display
level.
screen
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the N00556501118
5
Fuel remaining display screen vehicle. (Refer to Filling the fuel tank on Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
N00556601180 page 3-3.)
Shows the amount of fuel remaining.
NOTE
The display setting can be changed to the
Fuel remaining warning display
preferred units (F or C).
N00578300021
Refer to Changing the function settings on
When the fuel level runs low, the information page 5-140.
screen switches to the interrupt display of the Depending on factors such as the driving
fuel remaining warning display and the mark conditions, the displayed temperature may
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If vary from the actual outside temperature.
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible.
Odometer
N00574901026
F- Full Shows the total distance traveled.

E- Empty
Trip odometer
CAUTION N00575001024
Running out of gas could damage the cata- Shows the distance traveled between two
lytic converter. If the warning display points.
appears, refuel as soon as possible.


Usage examples for trip odometer , trip Service reminder NOTE
odometer N00556701237 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
It is possible to measure two currently Displays the approximate time until the next km) and the time in units of 1 month.
traveled distances, from home using recommended periodic inspection. --- is
trip odometer and from a particular displayed when the inspection time has 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
point on the way using trip odometer arrived. tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
. subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
5 NOTE of your choice to have the system
checked.
The service reminder time can be modified
To reset the trip odometer by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to At that time, when the ignition switch is
Severe maintenance schedule in your vehi- switched from the OFF or LOCK
To return the display to 0, hold down the cles Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For position to the ON position or the oper-
multi information display switch for about 2 further information, please contact your ation mode is changed from OFF to ON,
seconds or more. Only the currently dis- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the warning display is displayed for a few
played value will be reset. seconds on the information screen.
Example
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
odometer will be reset.
Both trip odometers and can

count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers. 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/ displays the time until the next periodic
kilometers. inspection.
When disconnecting the battery terminal,
the memories of trip odometer displays
1. Shows the time until the next periodic To reset
and are cleared, and their displays inspection.
return to 0.0 miles/kilometers. The --- display can be reset while the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.


When the display is reset, the time until the 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
next periodic inspection is displayed and the press the multi information display
NOTE
When --- is displayed, after a certain dis-
warning display is no longer displayed when switch, the screen switches from --- to
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
the ignition switch is switched from the CLEAR. After that, the time until the
play is reset and the time until the next
OFF or LOCK position to the ON next periodic inspection is shown. periodic inspection is displayed.
position or the operation mode is changed If you accidentally reset the display, consult
from OFF to ON. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
1. When you lightly press the multi informa-

assistance.
5
tion display switch, the information
screen switches to the service reminder System check screen
display screen. N00578400022

ON, the system check screen is displayed for
about 4 seconds. If there is no fault, the infor-
mation screen is displayed.
CAUTION If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
The customer is responsible for making sure ing display.
that regular inspections and maintenance and Refer to Warning display list on page
periodic inspections and maintenance are 5-156.
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
to display and make it flash. (If there NOTE
is no operation for about 10 seconds with The --- display cannot be reset while the NOTE
this indicator flashing, the display returns ignition switch or the operation mode is in The system check screen display varies
to the previous screen.) ON. depending on your equipment.

Driving range display Average fuel consumption dis- NOTE

N00575201026
play Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
Shows the approximate driving range (how N00575301027
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
many more miles or kilometers you can This displays the average fuel consumption sumption display.
drive). When this driving range falls below from the last reset to the present. The display setting can be changed to the
30 miles (50 km), --- is displayed. There are 2 types of mode settings of manual preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
Refuel as soon as possible. reset and automatic reset.
5 Refer to Changing the reset mode for aver-
L/100km or km/L}.
NOTE age fuel consumption and average speed on page 5-140.
The driving range is determined based on the page 5-141.
fuel consumption data. This may vary For information on how to change the aver- Average speed display
depending on the driving conditions and hab- age fuel consumption display setting, refer to N00578500023
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a Changing the function settings on page
rough guideline. 5-140. This displays the average speed from the last
When you refuel, the driving range display is reset to the present.
updated. There are 2 types of mode setting of manual
However, if you only add a small amount of NOTE reset and automatic reset.
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. The average fuel consumption display can be Refer to Changing the reset mode for aver-
Fill to a full tank whenever possible. reset separately in both auto reset mode and age fuel consumption and average speed on
When your vehicle is stopped on an manual reset mode.
page 5-141.
extremely steep hill, the driving range value --- is displayed when the average fuel con-
For the method for changing the average
may, change. This is due to the movement of sumption cannot be measured.
speed display setting, refer to Changing the
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any The initial (default) setting is Auto reset
function settings on page 5-140.
breakdown. mode.
The display setting can be changed to the Average fuel consumption may vary depend-
preferred units (miles or km). ing on the driving conditions (road condi- NOTE
Refer to Changing the function settings on tions, how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel The average speed display can be reset sepa-
page 5-140. consumption may differ from the fuel con- rately in both auto reset mode and manual
sumption displayed, so treat the fuel con- reset mode.
sumption displayed as just a rough guideline. --- is displayed when the average speed
cannot be measured.
The initial (default) setting is Auto reset
mode.

NOTE NOTE
The display setting can be changed to the The display setting can be changed to the ECO drive level
preferred units (mph or km/h). preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
Refer to Changing the function settings on L/100km or km/L}.
page 5-140. Refer to Changing the function settings on
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase page 5-140.
from memory the manual reset mode or auto It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
Low High
reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play.
page 5-140.
5
Momentary fuel consumption ECO indicator

display N00568701032
NOTE
N00578600024 This indicator will be displayed when fuel- The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- efficient driving is achieved. vehicle is driven with the selector lever in
the D (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is
tion is shown with a bar graph.
driven in the sport mode (for vehicles
The mark in the momentary fuel gauge ECO Drive Assist equipped with sportronic steering wheel pad-
shows the average fuel consumption. N00578700038 dle shifter).
When the momentary fuel consumption sur- This function displays how fuel-efficiently
passes the average fuel consumption, the you are driving under different driving condi-
momentary fuel consumption is displayed tions. ECO Score
with a green bar graph. The ECO drive assist display will change as N00578800026
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using ECO score indicates the points you have
fuel consumption above the average fuel con- the accelerator in a way well matched with scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
sumption, it can help you drive with the better the vehicle speed. ber of leaves as follows:
fuel consumption.
[When the ignition switch or the operation
NOTE mode is ON]
When the momentary fuel consumption can- The display shows the score you achieved in
not be measured, a bar graph is not shown. the last several minutes.


[When the ignition switch is turned to the Refer to Information screen on page
OFF or LOCK position or the operation 5-132.
NOTE
To return the menu screen to the function set-
mode is put in OFF]
ting screen, press and hold the multi infor-
The display shows the overall ECO score the
mation display switch (for about 2 seconds
function has counted from the time when the or more).
ignition switch is turned to the ON position If no operations are made within about 30
to the time when it is turned to the OFF or seconds of the menu screen being displayed,
LOCK or ACC position, or from the time
5 when the operation mode is set to ON to CAUTION
the display returns to the function setting
screen.
the time when it is set to OFF. For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
While driving, even if you operate the multi
information display switch, the function set- 4. Select the item to change on the menu
ting screen is not displayed. screen and change to the desired setting.
ECO drive level
For further details on the operation meth-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- ods, refer to the following sections.
to switch from the setting mode screen to Refer to Changing the reset mode for
the menu screen. average fuel consumption and average
Low High speed on page 5-141.
Refer to Changing the fuel consumption
display unit on page 5-142.
Refer to Changing the temperature unit
on page 5-143.
Refer to Changing the display language
Changing the function settings on page 5-143.
N00556801238 Refer to Changing the language on Mit-
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place. subishi Multi-Communication System or
Fully apply the parking brake and move Bluetooth 2.0 interface to match the
the selector lever into the P (PARK) multi information display (if so
position. equipped) on page 5-144.
2. When you lightly press the multi informa- Refer to Operation sound setting on
tion meter switch, the information screen page 5-144.
switches to the function setting screen.


Refer to Changing the time until REST 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
REMINDER is displayed on page Manual reset mode
5-145. to switch from the setting mode screen to If you press and hold the multi informa-
Refer to Changing the turn signal sound the menu screen. tion meter switch when the average fuel
on page 5-145. Refer to Changing the function settings consumption and average speed are dis-
Refer to Changing the momentary fuel on page 5-140. played, these calculations will be reset to
consumption display on page 5-145. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- zero.
Refer to Tire ID set change on page play switch to select AVG (average fuel
5-123. consumption and average speed setting).
When the following operation is per-
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
5
Refer to Returning to the factory set- matically from manual to auto.
tings on page 5-146.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key]
If the battery is disconnected, these function
Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
settings are reset from memory and is auto- tion from the ACC, LOCK or OFF
matically to the factory settings (except the position.
tire ID set).
You can not select an item that is displayed [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
dimly on the menu. key]
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
Changing the reset mode for aver- play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
age fuel consumption and average to switch in sequence from A or 1 (Auto Auto reset mode
speed reset) M, 2 or P (Manual reset) A or
1 (Auto reset). When the average fuel consumption and
N00557001240
The setting is changed to the selected average speed are being displayed, if you
You can change the mode condition for the hold down the multi information display
reset condition.
average fuel consumption and average speed switch, these calculations will be reset to
display to Auto reset or Manual reset. zero.


When the engine switch or the operation 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Changing the fuel consumption
mode is in the following conditions, the play switch to switch to select the units.
average fuel consumption display and the display unit 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
N00557101166
average speed display will automatically play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
reset. The fuel consumption display unit can be to change the setting to the selected unit.
changed. The distance, speed, and amount
[Except for vehicles equipped with the units are also changed to match the selected
F.A.S.T.-key] fuel consumption unit. NOTE
5 The ignition switch has been set to the The display units for the driving range, the
ACC, LOCK or OFF position for 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- average fuel consumption, the average speed
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) and the momentary fuel consumption are
about 4 hours or more.
changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
to change from the setting mode screen to
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- the menu screen.
odometer will remain unchanged.
key] Refer to Changing the function settings
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The operation mode has been in ACC or on page 5-140. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
OFF for about 4 hours or more. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
play switch to select AVG UNIT (fuel
NOTE consumption display unit setting).
The distance and speed units are also changed
The average fuel consumption display and in the following combinations to match the
average speed display can be reset separately
selected fuel consumption unit.
in both auto reset mode and manual reset
mode.
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
Distance Speed
Fuel
from memory the manual reset mode or auto (driving (average
economy
reset mode setting for the average speed dis- range) speed)
play and average fuel consumption display. mpg (US) mile (s) mph
mode.
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km /L km km /h
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- L /100 km km km /h
to display AVG UNIT (fuel consump-
tion display unit setting).
Changing the temperature unit NOTE

N00557201154 On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
The temperature display unit can be switched. Communication System, the temperature
value of the air conditioner screen of Mit-
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- subishi Multi-Communication System is
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) switched in conjunction with outside temper-
to switch from the setting mode screen to ature display unit of the multi information
the menu screen. display.
However, F or C are not shown to the
5
Refer to Changing the function settings
air conditioner screen.
on page 5-140.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- the unit setting is erased and is automatically
play switch to select (temperature set to F (C).
unit setting).
to display LANGUAGE (language set-
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- Changing the display language ting).
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) N00557301184 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
to switch in from C to F, or from F to
The language of the multi information display play switch to select the desired language.
C.
can be changed. 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
perature unit. 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- to change the setting to the selected lan-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) guage.
NOTE to change from the setting mode screen to
The temperature value on air conditioner the menu screen. NOTE
panel is switched in conjunction with outside Refer to Changing the function settings If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
temperature display unit of the multi infor- on page 5-140. the language setting is erased and is automat-
mation display.
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- ically set to ENGLISH.
However, F or C are not shown to tem-
perature display of an air conditioner.
play switch to select LANGUAGE (lan- If --- is selected in the language setting, a
guage setting). warning message is not displayed when there
is a warning display or interrupt display.

Changing the language on Mit- NOTE

subishi Multi-Communication When A or 1 (language cooperation:
System or Bluetooth 2.0 interface enabled) has been selected, the language for
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System
to match the multi information
(if so equipped) or Bluetooth 2.0 interface
display (if so equipped) is automatically changed to
N00529801302 the language selected for the multi informa-
5 The language used in Mitsubishi Multi-Com- tion display.
However, this changing function may not
munication System (if so equipped) or Blue-
work depending on the language selected
tooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped) can be for the multi information display.
changed automatically to the same language When M, 2 or P (language cooperation:
as that shown in the multi information dis- disabled) has been selected, the language
play switch to switch from A/1 (language
play. for Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
cooperation: enabled) to M/2/P (language
cooperation: disabled), or from M/2/P to tem (if so equipped) or Bluetooth 2.0
interface (if so equipped) is not automati-
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) A/1. The setting is changed to the selected
cally changed to match the language
to switch from the setting mode screen to condition.
selected for the multi information display.
the menu screen. Refer to Changing the The language on the audio systems display
function settings on page 5-140. NOTE does not automatically change when you
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- If the battery is disconnected, the language select A or 1 (language cooperation:
play switch to select (language cooperative control is automatically set to enabled) in the language cooperation control.
cooperative control). A or 1 (language cooperation: enabled).
The language cooperation setting can be Operation sound setting
switched in the following manner. N00557401156
You can turn off the operation sounds of the

multi information display switch and rheostat
illumination button.

to switch from the setting mode screen to
the menu screen.

Refer to Changing the function settings 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
on page 5-140. play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- to switch from the setting mode screen to to switch from the setting mode screen to
play switch to select (operation the menu screen. the menu screen.
sound setting). Refer to Changing the function settings Refer to Changing the function settings
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- on page 5-140. on page 5-140.
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
play switch to select ALARM (rest time
to switch from ON (operation sound on)
setting).
play switch to select . (changing the 5
to OFF (operation sound off), or from turn signal sound)
OFF to ON. 3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The setting is changed to the selected con- play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
dition. to display ALARM (rest time setting). to switch from 1 (turn-signal sound 1) to 2
4. Lightly press the multi information dis- (turn-signal sound 2), or from 2 to 1.
NOTE play switch to select the time until the dis- The setting changes to the selected turn
play appears. signal sound.
the operation sound setting is erased and is 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
automatically set to ON (operation sound play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
on). to change the setting to the selected time. Changing the momentary fuel con-
The operation sound setting only deactivates sumption display
the operation sound of the multi information NOTE N00563601049
display switch and rheostat illumination but- If the battery is disconnected, the memory of It is possible to change the bar graph setting
ton. The warning display and other sounds the unit setting is erased and is automatically of the momentary fuel consumption display.
cannot be deactivated. set to the OFF.
The drive time is reset when the ignition 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
switch is in the LOCK or OFF position play switch (for about 2 seconds or more)
Changing the time until REST or the operation mode is in OFF. to switch from the setting mode screen to
REMINDER is displayed the menu screen.
N00557501160 Refer to Changing the function settings
The time until the display appears can be
Changing the turn signal sound on page 5-140.
changed.
N00563501080 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
It is possible to change the turn signal sound. play switch to select . (changing
the momentary fuel consumption display)


NOTE
Average fuel consumption and average
to switch from ON (with the green bar
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
graph) to OFF (without the green bar
Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
graph), or from OFF to ON.
or (L/100 km)
The setting changes to the selected bar
Temperature unit: F (Fahrenheit) or {C
graph setting. (Celsius)}
5 Display language: ENGLISH
Returning to the factory settings Cooperative language setting: A (language
N00557601217 cooperation: enabled)
Many of the function settings can be returned Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound 1- Frozen road warning P.5-149
on)
to their factory settings. 2- Information display P.5-147
REST REMINDER display: OFF
3- Selector lever position display
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
P.5-66, 5-73
play switch (for about 2 seconds or more) Momentary fuel consumption with the
to switch from the setting mode screen to green bar graph: ON
5- Fuel remaining display P.5-150
the menu screen. The tire ID set cannot be returned to the fac-
tory settings.
Refer to Changing the function settings
on page 5-140. NOTE
2. Lightly press the multi information dis- Multi Information display - When the ignition switch is in the OFF
play switch to select RESET (return to position, the selector lever position display,
the factory settings).
Type 2 fuel remaining display and frozen road warn-
N00555001291
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- ing are not displayed.
play switch (for about 5 seconds or more), The multi information display displays the
the buzzer sounds and all of the function odometer, trip odometer, service reminder,
settings are returned to the factory set- fuel remaining, outside temperature, selector
tings. lever position, average fuel consumption,
driving range, etc.
NOTE It is also possible to change elements such as

The factory settings are as follows. the units used on the multi information dis-
play.

Information display
N00574801038
Each time you lightly press the multi information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer 6- Average fuel consumption display P.5-149

2- Trip odometer 7- Outside temperature display P.5-149
3- Trip odometer 8- Service reminder (distance) P.5-150
4- Meter illumination control P.5-148 9- Service reminder (month) P.5-150
5- Driving range display P.5-148 10- Tire pressure monitoring system display P.5-123
NOTE
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display, outside temperature display and tire pres-
sure monitoring system display are not displayed.
While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi information display switch.

Odometer Both trip odometers and can NOTE

count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
N00574901039 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9 tively for when the front side-marker lights
The odometer indicates the total distance the miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/ are illuminated and when they are not.
vehicle has traveled. kilometers. Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
When disconnecting the battery terminal, the segment display of the brightness level
Trip odometer the memories of trip odometer displays decreases one by one.
5 N00575001037 and are cleared, and their displays If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the lamp switch is in a
The trip odometer indicates the distance trav- return to 0.0 miles/kilometers.
position other than the OFF position, the
eled between two points. meter illumination switches automatically to
Meter illumination control the adjusted brightness, depending on the
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip N00578900030 brightness outside the vehicle.
odometer Each time you press and hold the multi infor- The brightness level of the instruments is
It is possible to measure two currently stored when the ignition switch is turned to
mation display switch for about 2 seconds or
traveled distances, from home using the OFF position.
more, there is a sound and the brightness of
trip odometer and from a particular the instruments changes.
point on the way using trip odometer
.
Driving range display
N00575201039
This displays the approximate driving range

(how many more miles or kilometers you can
To reset the trip odometer drive). When the driving range falls below
approximately 30 miles (50 km), --- is dis-
To return the display to 0, hold down the played.
multi information display switch for about 2
seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
played value will be reset.
NOTE
The driving range is determined based on the
Example 1- Brightness level fuel consumption data. This may vary
2- Multi information display switch depending on the driving conditions and hab-
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
odometer will be reset. rough guideline.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

When you refuel, the driving range display is The average fuel consumption display can be The display setting can be changed to the
updated. reset separately for the auto reset mode and preferred units (F or C).
However, if you only add a small amount of for the manual reset mode. Refer to Changing the function settings on
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. --- is displayed when the average fuel con- page 5-152.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible. sumption cannot be measured. Depending on factors such as the driving
When your vehicle is stopped on an The initial (default) setting is Auto reset conditions, the displayed temperature may
extremely steep hill, the driving range value
may, change. This is due to the movement of
mode. vary from the actual outside temperature.
5
Average fuel consumption may vary depend
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any on the driving conditions (road conditions,
breakdown. how you drive, etc.). The actual fuel con- Frozen road warning
The display setting can be changed to the sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
N00579000025
preferred units (miles or km). tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
Refer to Changing the function settings on displayed as just a rough guideline. If the outside air temperature drops below
page 5-152. Disconnecting the battery cable will erase approx. 37 F (3 C), the alarm sounds and
from memory the manual reset mode or auto the outside air temperature warning symbol
reset mode setting for the average fuel con- (A) flashes for about 10 seconds.
Average fuel consumption dis- sumption display.
play The display setting can be changed to the
N00575301030 preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.
This displays the average fuel consumption Refer to Changing the function settings on
from the last reset to the present. page 5-152.
The reset mode conditions for the average
fuel consumption display can be switched
between Auto reset and Manual reset. Outside temperature display
For information on how to change the aver- N00556501121
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
Changing the function settings on page
5-152.


There is a danger the road might be icy, even If fuel is added with the ignition switch in Running out of gas could damage the cata-
when this symbol is not flashing, so please the ON position, the remaining fuel dis- lytic converter.
take care when driving. play may incorrectly indicate the fuel level. If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel as possible.
tank filler door is located on the left side of
Fuel remaining display the vehicle. (Refer to Filling the fuel tank
5 N00556601193
on page 3-3.) NOTE
On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch Fuel remaining warning display rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
N00578300034
is in the ON position.
When the remaining fuel level runs low (one
segments displayed), the last segment of the Service reminder
fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is N00556701240
turned to the ON position. Displays the approximate time until the next
When the remaining fuel level very runs low recommended periodic inspection. --- is
(no segments displayed), and the bar displayed when the inspection time has
graph flash. arrived.
If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
as possible. NOTE
The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
1- Full to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
0- Empty Severe maintenance schedule in your vehi-
cles Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
further information, please contact your
NOTE
It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.

To reset
The --- display can be reset while the igni-

tion switch is in the OFF position.

tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the service 5
reminder display.
1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection. CAUTION
The customer is responsible for making sure
NOTE that regular inspections and maintenance and
Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100 periodic inspections and maintenance are
km) and the time in units of 1 month. performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
2. This informs you that a periodic inspections.
tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility 2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
of your choice to have the system play switch for about 2 seconds or more to NOTE
checked. make the spanner mark start flashing. (If The --- display cannot be reset while the
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an there is no operation for about 10 seconds ignition switch is in the ON position.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it with flashing, the display will revert to its When --- is displayed, after a certain dis-
displays the time until the next periodic original indication.) tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
inspection. 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly play is reset and the time until the next
press the multi information display periodic inspection is displayed.
switch, the screen switches from --- to If you accidentally reset the display, consult
cLEAr. After that, the time until the an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
assistance.
next periodic inspection is shown.


2. Each time you press the multi information Auto reset mode
Changing the function settings display switch for 2 seconds or more on
N00556801209
driving range display, you can switch When the average fuel consumption is
The Average fuel consumption reset mode, reset mode for average fuel consumption. being displayed, if you hold down the
Fuel consumption unit and Temperature (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset multi information display switch, these
unit setting can be modified as desired, mode) calculations will be reset to zero.
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- When the ignition switch has been set to
tion. the ACC or OFF position for about 4
5 hours or more, the average fuel consump-
CAUTION tion display will automatically reset.
The driver should not operate the display
while the vehicle is in motion. NOTE
When operating the system, stop the vehicle The average fuel consumption display can be
in a safe area. reset separately for the auto reset mode and
for the manual reset mode.
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
Changing the reset mode for aver- from memory the manual reset mode or auto
age fuel consumption reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
sumption display.
N00575501029 Manual reset mode
You can change the mode condition for the
When the average fuel consumption is mode.
average fuel consumption display to Auto
being displayed, if you hold down the
reset or Manual reset.
multi information display switch, these
1. When you lightly press the multi informa- calculations will be reset to zero. Changing the fuel consumption
tion display switch a few times, the infor- When the ignition switch is turned to the display unit
mation display switches to the driving ON position from the ACC or OFF N00557101179
range display. position, the mode setting changes auto- The fuel consumption display unit can be
Refer to Information display on page matically from manual to auto. changed. The distance and amount units are
5-147. also switched to match the selected fuel con-
sumption unit.


NOTE NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of The temperature value on air conditioner
mation display switches to the average
the unit setting is erased and it returns auto- panel is switched in conjunction with outside
fuel consumption display.
matically to factory setting. temperature display unit of the multi infor-
Refer to Information display on page mation display.
5-147. The distance units is also changed in the fol- However, F or C are not shown to tem-
2. Press and hold the multi information dis- lowing combinations to match the selected perature display of an air conditioner.
play switch for about 5 seconds or more
until buzzer sound is heard twice.
fuel consumption unit. On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
Communication System, the temperature
5
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- Fuel Distance value of the air conditioner screen of Mit-
play switch to switch in sequence from consumption (driving range) subishi Multi-Communication System is
km/L L/100 km mpg switched in conjunction with outside temper-
km/L km ature display unit of the multi information
km/L.
L/100 km km display.
However, F or C are not shown to the
mpg mile (s) air conditioner screen.
Changing the temperature unit

N00557201167
The temperature display unit can be switched.

mation display switches to the outside
temperature display.
NOTE Refer to Information display on page
The display units for the driving range, the 5-147.
average fuel consumption are changed, but 2. Each time you press the multi information
the units for the indicating needle (speedom- display switch for 2 seconds or more on
eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the outside temperature display, you can
service reminder will remain unchanged. switch from F to C or from C to F unit
of outside temperature display.

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list (multi information display - Type 1)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list (multi information display -
Type 1)
N00557701058
Indicator and warning light list

N00557801310
1- Position indicator P.5-172 6- LED headlight warning light (if so 11- Engine malfunction indicator (SER-
2- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) P.5-180 VICE ENGINE SOON or Check
equipped) P.5-172 7- Active stability control (ASC) indicator engine light) P.5-173
3- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning P.5-95 12- Seat belt reminder/warning light
lights P.5-172 8- Active stability control (ASC) OFF P.4-22
4- High beam indicator P.5-172 indicator P.5-95 13- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
5- Charging system warning light 9- Anti-lock braking system warning light ing light P.5-120
P.5-174 P.5-92 14- Brake warning light P.5-173
10- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 15- Information screen display list
warning light P. 4-39 P.5-155
Information screen display list

N00557901092
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to Warning display list on page 5-156.
Refer to Navigation information display on page 5-166.
Refer to Other interrupt displays on page 5-167. 5
NOTE
In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicles electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.

Warning display list

N00558001263
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

You have forgotten to remove the key from the igni- Remove the key.
tion switch. Refer to Key reminder system on page 5-34.
5
You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to Light auto-cutout function (headlights and
other lights) on page 5-179.
There is a malfunction in the LED headlights. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system.
Refer to LED headlight warning light on page
5-180.
Immobilizer is registered. Refer to Customer key programming (Except for vehi-

cles sold in Canada) on page 5-6.
Refer to Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada) on page 5-28.

There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key) on page 5-12.
There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer. (Anti- Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
theft starting system). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.

The F. A. S. T. -key is not detected. Insert the F. A. S. T. -key into the key slot. Refer to
If the F. A. S. T. -key is not operating properly on
page 5-26.
You have forgotten to remove the F. A. S. T. -key Remove the F. A. S. T. -key from the key slot.
5 from the key slot.
The steering wheel is locked. Press the engine switch while turning steering wheel.
Refer to Steering wheel lock on page 5-62.
The engine switch is pressed to stop the engine and Place the selector lever in the P (PARK) position
the selector lever is in a position other than the P to put the operation mode in OFF.
(PARK) position.
The drivers door is opened with the steering wheel Refer to Steering wheel lock on page 5-62.
unlocked.
There is a fault in the EPS. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Refer to Electric power steering system (EPS) on
page 5-93.

The brake fluid level is low. Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect it.
There is a fault in the brake system. If the light still illuminates after the inspection, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Refer to Brake warning display on page 5-175.
There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking system. Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving, park
the vehicle in a safe place, and take corrective mea- 5
sures. Refer to Anti-lock braking system warning
on page 5-92.
The tire pressure in one of the tires (except spare Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System on page
tire) is low. 5-120.
There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System on page
tem. 5-120.
One of the doors or the liftgate is not completely Close the door or liftgate.
closed. Refer to Door ajar warning display screen on page
The open door is displayed. 5-134.
The engine hood is open. Close the engine hood.

Refer to Engine hood on page 9-3.

There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti- Put the operation mode in OFF, and then start the
theft starting system). engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice.
The drivers door is open when the operation mode Put the operation mode in OFF.
5 is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to Changing the operation mode on page
5-19.
There is a fault in the steering wheel lock. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
There is a fault in the electrical system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
checked.
The engine is overheated. Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
measures.
Refer to Engine overheating on page 8-4.
The automatic transaxle or CVT fluid temperature is Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
increased. measures.
Refer to Automatic transaxle on page 5-64.
Refer to Continuously variable transmission
(CVT) on page 5-71.

The seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch Wear your seat belt properly.
or operation mode is in ON. Refer to Seat belt warning on page 4-22.
There is a fault in the fuel system. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system 5
checked.
The vehicle is being driven with the parking brake Release the parking brake. Refer to Brake warning
still applied. display on page 5-175.
There is a fault in the engine oil circulation system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
checked.
Refer to Oil pressure warning display on page
5-176.
There is a fault in the charging system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to Charging system warning display on page
5-176.

There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the pre-tensioner Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked, immediately.
Refer to SRS airbag/Pre-tensioner system warning
on page 4-39.
There is a fault in the Active stability control (ASC). Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
5 repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Active stability control (ASC) on page
5-94.
There is a fault in the Hill start assist. Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Refer to Hill start assist on page 5-89.
There is a fault in the electronically controlled 4WD Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD system on
page 5-79.
There is a fault in the S-AWC system. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) on
page 5-81.

There is a fault in the automatic transaxle or CVT. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Automatic transaxle on page 5-64.
Refer to Continuously variable transmission
(CVT) on page 5-71.
The electronically controlled 4WD system is hot. Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD system on 5
page 5-79.
The S-AWC system is hot. Refer to S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) on page
5-81.
The fuel is running low. Refuel as soon as possible.

Refer to Fuel remaining display screen on page
5-135.
The outside temperature is 37 F (3 C) or less. Be careful driving on frozen ground.

The ground may be frozen even when this warning is
not displayed, so drive carefully.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) has Increase the following distance by depressing the
detected the approach of the vehicles in front. brake pedal or marking other decelerating control.
Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC):
Approach alarm on page 5-105.
The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) Take appropriate action such as depressing the brake
has detected the danger of collision. to avoid collision.
Refer to Forward collision warning function on
page 5-112.

The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) Depress the brake pedal as soon as your vehicle
detected a stop of the vehicle in front and stopped comes to a stop.
your vehicle, but the brake will be released soon. Refer to When ACC detects a vehicle in front
within the set distance on page 5-104.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control Refer to How to use ACC on page 5-102.
5 is automatically canceled and the system is placed in
the standby state.
Conditions for the start of control are not met, the

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) can not start
the control.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) can not

start the control because the speed is out of speed
range.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) can not

start the control because not detected the approach of
the vehicles in front.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is tem-

porarily unavailable due to conditions such as the
adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
This is not a malfunction.

There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise Control Sys- Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tem (ACC). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to When ACC detects a vehicle in front
within the set distance on page 5-104.
There is a fault in the Forward Collision Mitigation Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
System (FCM). repair facility of your choice to have the system 5
checked.
Refer to FCM ON/OFF switch: When a problem is
detected on page 5-114.
FCM braking function of the Forward Collision Mit- Refer to FCM braking function on page 5-112.
igation System (FCM) has been activated.
The Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) is

temporarily unavailable due to conditions such as the
adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
This is not a malfunction.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has detected Refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page
that your vehicle is about to leave or has left the lane. 5-116.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is temporarily

unavailable due to too high of a temperature of the
LDW camera.

There is a fault in the Lane Departure Warning Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
(LDW). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page
5-116.
5 Navigation information display (if NOTE

so equipped) Please read this section and also the separate
Direction of vehicle travel owners manual for Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
N00579100026
(Example) munication System.
Communication System, the following infor-
mation on navigation will be displayed when
Destination
guidance location such as junction and desti-
nation is approached after you set the destina-
tion and started the route guidance.
Ferry terminal
Tollbooth
Intermediate destination
(Example)
1- Guidance display 2- Remaining distance display

Shows the direction of vehicle travel Shows the distance to the location
and the guidance location. where the guidance is displayed.

Other interrupt displays

N00558201308
Screen System operation status Reference

When starting the engine, the selector Place the selector lever in the P
lever is in a position other than the P (PARK) position, depress and hold the
(PARK) or the N (NEUTRAL) posi- brake pedal with the right foot, and then
tion, or you pressed the engine switch press the engine switch to start the 5
without depressing the brake pedal. engine.
Refer to Starting and stopping the
engine on page 5-24.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.

When 4WD ECO drive mode is Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD
selected with the drive mode selector. system on page 5-79.
When 4WD AUTO mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.
When 4WD LOCK mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.

When AWC ECO mode of S-AWC is Refer to S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
selected. trol) on page 5-81.
When NORMAL mode of S-AWC is

5 selected.
When SNOW mode of S-AWC is

selected.
When LOCK mode of S-AWC is

selected.
When the ECO mode is activated. Refer to ECO mode switch on page 5-184.

When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to FCM ON/OFF switch on page
System (FCM) is activated or the timing 5-114.
of an alarm is changed.
When the Forward Collision Mitigation

System (FCM) is deactivated. 5
When the operation mode of the Lane Refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW):
Departure Warning (LDW) is switched. Turning off the LDW on page 5-117.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Do this
Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to Service reminder on page 5-136.

The rest time can be set.
Screen Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to Changing the function settings on page 5-140.
5 The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a
rest.
In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous
display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
The buzzer sounds 3 times.
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position or the operation mode
is put in OFF.
The multi information display switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).

Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type 2)
Indicator and warning light package (multi information display - Type 2)

N00519801891
1- Position indicator P. 5-172 9- 4WD ECO mode indicator (if so 18- Low coolant temperature indicator
2- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) P.5-79 (blue) P. 5-172
equipped) P. 5-172 10- 4WD LOCK mode indicator (if so 19- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
3- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning equipped) P.5-79 P. 5-95
lights P. 5-172 11- LED headlight warning light (if so 20- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
4- Cruise control indicator P. 5-96 equipped) P.5-180 indicator P. 5-95
5- Door-ajar warning light P. 5-175 12- High beam indicator P. 5-172 21- Anti-lock braking system warning light
6- For details, refer to Steering wheel 13- ECO mode indicator P.5-184 P. 5-92
lock on page 5-23. (if so equipped) 14- ECO Drive Assist P. 5-172 22- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
7- For details, refer to Warning activa- 15- Oil pressure warning light P. 5-174 warning light P. 4-39
tion on page 5-20. (if so equipped) 16- Charging system warning light 23- Engine malfunction indicator (SER-
8- Electric power steering system warning P. 5-174 VICE ENGINE SOON or Check
light P.5-93 17- High coolant temperature warning light engine light) P. 5-173
(red) P. 5-175

Indicators
24- Seat belt reminder/warning light
Front fog light indicator (if so ECO Drive Assist (Vehicle
P. 4-22
25- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- equipped) equipped with the multi infor-
ing light P. 5-120 N00520200175 mation display - Type 2)
26- Brake warning light P. 5-173 N00579200030
This indicator comes on while the front fog
27- Multi information display P. 5-146 This function displays how fuel-efficiently
lights are on.
you are driving under different driving condi-
5 Indicators Position indicator
tions.
N00519900127
The ECO drive assist display will change as
N00551300026
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
This indicator light illuminates while the the accelerator in a way well matched with
Turn signal indicators/Hazard position lights are on. the vehicle speed.
warning lights
Low coolant temperature indi-
N00520000216
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- ECO drive level
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn cator - blue (Vehicle equipped
signal lever is used. with the multi information dis-
play - Type 2)
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- N00575601020
ing flasher switch is pressed. Low High
This indicator comes on in blue while the
coolant temperature is low.
NOTE
If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if
the indicator stays on without flashing, check NOTE
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or When the indicator goes out, this should be
turn signal connection. used as a rough indication of when the heat- NOTE
ing starts working. The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
vehicle is driven with the selector lever in
the D (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is
High beam indicator driven in the sport mode (for vehicles
N00520100086 equipped with sportronic steering wheel pad-
A blue light comes on when the headlights dle shifter).
are on high beam.
Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock (SERVICE ENGINE SOON
braking system warning light are illuminated
at the same time, the braking force distribu- or Check engine light)
Brake warning light and buzzer tion function will not operate, so the vehicle N00520501814
N00520401536
may be destabilized during sudden braking This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
This light comes on when the ignition switch under the following conditions. nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
is turned to the ON position (engine off) or When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
emissions, engine control system or auto- 5
the operation mode is put in ON. matic transaxle control system/continuously
When the engine is started, the light should released.
variable transmission (CVT) control system.
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also When the brake warning light stays on
If a problem is detected in one of these sys-
displayed in the multi information display. while driving.
tems, this indicator illuminates or flashes.
The warning light also illuminates after start- If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
ing the engine under the following condi- ON position or the operation mode is put in
a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit-
tions. subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of ON, this indicator normally comes on and
your choice as soon as possible. goes off after the engine has started.
When the parking brake is still applied.
The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
When the brake fluid level is low. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
following manner when brake performance
When the brake system circuit is not is deteriorated. filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
working properly. Confirm that the vehicle slows down when indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
you press down on the brake pedal harder ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
mph (8 km/h) and parking brake applied, a may go all the way to the floor. until you hear clicking sounds.)
buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the Should the brakes fail, use engine braking If this indicator does not go off after several
parking brake is not properly release. to reduce your speed and slowly apply the seconds or lights up while driving, have the
parking brake. system checked as soon as possible at an
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
is fully released and brake warning light is stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
off.

Warning lights

Driving for a long time with the engine mal- Do not disconnect the battery cable when the If the warning light stays on while the engine
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (SERVICE is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON or Check engine light) is as soon as possible and contact an authorized
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
ity. The engine electronic control module stores of your choice to have the system checked.
If this indicator does not come on when the critical OBD information (especially exhaust
5 ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
Oil pressure warning light
the system checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob- (Vehicle equipped with the
choice. lems. multi information display -
If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
Type 2)
N00520701278
high speeds. Charging system warning light
During vehicle operation with the indicator
N00520601323
This light comes on when the engine oil pres-
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you sure is below normal. If the light stays on
depress the accelerator pedal. This light comes on in the event of a malfunc- while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi- tion in the charging system or when the igni- sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion switch is turned to the ON position the low oil pressure is corrected.
more firmly than usual since the engine (engine off) or the operation mode is put in
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- ON. On vehicle equipped with the multi
cle with an automatic transaxle or CVT has a information display - Type 1, a warning is CAUTION
stronger tendency to creep forward. also displayed in the multi information dis- If this light comes on when the engine oil
play. When the engine is started, the light level is not low, have your vehicle checked at
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
should go out. Check to make sure that the
light has gone out before driving.
This warning light does not show the amount
of oil in the crankcase. This can only be
determined by checking the oil level with the
dipstick with the engine turned off.

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
High coolant temperature Door-ajar warning light and Information screen display
warning light - red (Vehicle buzzer (Vehicle equipped with (Vehicle equipped with the
equipped with the multi infor- the multi information display - multi information display -
mation display - Type 2) Type 2) Type 1)
N00575701021 N00520901339
N00558301048
This light comes on in red if the coolant tem- This light comes on when any door or the lift-
perature becomes excessively high. gate is open or not completely closed. Brake warning display 5
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
N00558401153
CAUTION mph (8 km/h) and any door or the liftgate is
If the light comes on during vehicle opera-
open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to
tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly inform the driver that any door or the liftgate
overheating. Continued driving could make is not properly shut.
the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and take appropriate action. CAUTION
(Refer to Engine overheating on page 8-4.)
Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
warning light is off. being driven with the parking brake still
applied. The warning light in the instrument
NOTE cluster only comes on when the parking brake
The high coolant temperature warning light NOTE is applied.
may illuminate when the vehicle has been
When the interior light auto-cutout function
driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
is been activated, the light goes out automat- CAUTION
ically after about 30 minutes. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
problem. It should stop if you keep the
Refer to Interior light auto-cutout function parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
engine running for a while or continue driv-
(dome light and other lights) on page 5-228. resulting in ineffective braking and possible
ing the vehicle.
brake failure.
If this warning is displayed, release the park-
ing brake.

Information screen display (Vehicle equipped with the multi information display - Type 1)
CAUTION Oil pressure warning display

Confirm that the vehicle slows down when N00558701101
you press down on the brake pedal harder

than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
may go all the way to the floor.
When the ignition switch is turned to the Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
ON position or the operation mode is put in to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
5 ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the If the engine oil pressure drops while the
displayed. stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. engine is running, the warning display is dis-
The warning light in the instrument cluster
played on the information screen in the multi
also illuminates.
Charging system warning dis- information display.
CAUTION play
If this warning stays on and does not go out N00558601113
CAUTION
If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- ing is displayed, the engine may overheat
and damage may result.
your choice. If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
If the brake warning display, brake warning
If there is a fault in the charging system, the as soon as possible and check the engine oil
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same warning display is displayed on the informa- level.
time, the braking force distribution function tion screen in the multi information display. If this warning display comes on when the
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta- engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle
The warning light in the instrument cluster
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
also illuminates.
braking and high-speed driving. Park the dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair CAUTION
facility of your choice. If warnings are displayed while the engine is NOTE
The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the running, park your vehicle in a safe place as The oil pressure warning display does not
following manner when brake performance soon as possible and contact an authorized show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
is deteriorated. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility checked using the dipstick.
of your choice to have the system checked.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Combination headlights and Type 1 Vehicles equipped with daytime running

lights
dimmer switch Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
N00522501834 [When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released]
Headlights
The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
NOTE
nated 5
Do not leave the headlights and other lights nated
on for a long period of time when the engine
Tail, front and rear side-marker lights,
is not running. The battery will run down.
license plate, instrument panel lights
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
and downlight on
becomes foggy. This is the same as when Headlights and other lights on
window glass mists up on a humid day, and The combinations of switch operations and
does not indicate a problem. When the light illuminated lights differ in accordance with
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. the following conditions. NOTE
However, if water collects inside the light,
Once the daytime running light come on,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Except for vehicles equipped with day- they do not go out until the ignition switch is
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
time running lights turned to the OFF or ACC position or
choice.
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
OFF All lights off ACC.
Parking, tail, front and rear side-

marker lights, license plate, instru- [When the engine is not running, or when the
ment panel lights and downlight on engine is running but the parking brake is not
released]
Headlights and other lights on
The engine starts when the lights are off.
OFF All lights off


Parking, tail, front and rear side- Parking, tail, front and rear side- NOTE
marker lights, license plate, instru- marker lights, license plate, instru- Once the daytime running light come on,
ment panel lights and downlight on ment panel lights and downlight on they do not go out until the ignition switch is
Headlights and other lights on Headlights and other lights on turned to the OFF or ACC position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC.
Type 2 Vehicles equipped with daytime running
5 lights
[When the engine is not running, or when the
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. engine is running but the parking brake is not
[When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released] released]
The engine starts when the lights are off.

OFF
nated
OFF All lights off
Headlights and other lights turn on
nated (when it is light outside the
AUTO and off automatically in accor-
vehicle)
AUTO dance with outside light level.
and off automatically in accor- Parking, tail, front and rear side-
dance with outside light level. marker lights, license plate, instru-
ment panel lights and downlight on
The combinations of switch operations and nated Headlights and other lights on
illuminated lights differ in accordance with Tail, front and rear side-marker
the following conditions. lights, license plate, instrument
Except for vehicles equipped with day- panel lights and downlight on
time running lights Headlights and other lights on
OFF All lights off

AUTO and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.


The ignition switch is turned to the OFF
NOTE or ACC position or the key is removed
The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
from the ignition switch and the drivers
trol can be adjusted.
door is opened.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
can be used to make the adjustment. ACC and the drivers door is opened. 5
details. If the following operation is performed
Do not place anything on the automatic light with the combination headlights and dim-
sensor (A), and do not clean with a glass NOTE mer switch in the or position,
cleaner. If the lights do not turn on or off with the the lights automatically turn off after
switch in the AUTO position, manually about 3 minutes.
operate the switch. Have the system checked
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or [Except for vehicles equipped with the
a repair facility of your choice. F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF
or ACC position or the key is removed
Light auto-cutout function from the ignition switch and the drivers
(headlights and other lights) door is not opened.
N00532601580
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
If the following operation is performed
key]
with the combination headlights and dim-
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
mer switch in the or position, ACC and the drivers door is not opened.
the lights automatically turn off.
NOTE
Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic [Except for vehicles equipped with the
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to F.A.S.T.-key]
the windshield.


[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
NOTE Type 1
engine]
The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
If the drivers door is opened with the opera-
vated.
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. operation mode is changed to OFF while the
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
Multi-Communication System, adjustments you to turn off the lights.
5 can be made using screen operations. For
further details, refer to the separate owners
Type 2
In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
manual. ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn
the light switch to the OFF position to stop
the tone.
When you want to keep the lights
on: Dimmer (high/low beam
change)
If the combination headlights and dimmer NOTE N00549901178
switch is turned to the or posi- If the warning light illuminates, there may be To change the headlights from high beam to
tion again after the engine is turned off, the a malfunction in the unit. Contact an autho-
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
about 3-minute auto-cutout function rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice to have the system
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low
described above will not work. The lights (the beam as a courtesy whenever there are
checked.
parking lights, tail lights and license plate oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
matically. light in the instrument cluster indicates when
Headlight reminder buzzer
the headlights are on high beam.
N00549801236
LED headlight warning light (if [When using a key to start the engine]
so equipped) If the drivers door is opened with the key in
N00584500028 the OFF or LOCK or ACC position or
removed from the ignition switch while the
This warning light will illuminate when there
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
is a malfunction in the LED headlights.
you to turn off the lights.

Welcome light NOTE

N00563201117 For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
This function turns on the front side-marker dealer.
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after
the UNLOCK button on the remote control
transmitter is pressed when the combination Refer to the separate owners manual for
headlights and dimmer switch is in the OFF
or AUTO position (for vehicles equipped
details.
5
with the automatic light control). On vehicles
equipped with the automatic light control Coming home light
(except for vehicles equipped with LDW), the N00547301110
welcome light function will operate only This function turns on the headlights in the
Headlight flasher when it is dark outside the vehicle. low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
N00550001209 the ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
You can flash the high beams by pulling the NOTE LOCK position or the operation mode is
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will put in OFF.
While the welcome light function is operat-
go back to normal when you let go. While the ing, perform one of the following operations
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on 1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
to cancel the function.
the instrument panel. mer switch to the OFF or AUTO
Push the LOCK button on the remote con-
trol transmitter.
position (for vehicles equipped with the
automatic light control).
NOTE Turn the combination headlights and dim-
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
You can flash the high beams by pulling the mer switch to the or position.
LOCK position or put the operation
lever toward you, even if the light switch is Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
mode in OFF. Also, if a key was used to
off. tion or put the operation mode in ON.
start the engine, remove the key from the
If you turn the lights off with the head lights It is possible to modify functions as follows:
ignition switch.
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights The headlights can be set to come on in the
low beam setting. 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
are automatically returned to their low-beam
setting when the light switch is next turned The welcome light function can be deacti- switch to the OFF or LOCK position
vated. or putting the operation mode in OFF, pull
to the position.
the turn signal lever toward you.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

beam. The greater the number on the head-
NOTE light leveling switch knob, the lower the
Turn the combination headlights and dim-
beam will point.
mer switch to the or position Set the switch to the appropriate position so
or put the operation mode in ON. that the headlight beam is level with the road.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
5 The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
4. The headlights will come on in the low For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After dealer.
the headlights go off, the headlights can On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
be turned on again in the low beam setting Communication System, screen operations
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn can be used to make the adjustment.
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds Refer to separate owners manual for details.
of turning the ignition switch to the WARNING
OFF or LOCK position or putting the Headlight leveling switch (if To avoid distraction while driving, always
operation mode in OFF. To turn on the perform headlight adjustments before
headlights again after 60 seconds of turn- so equipped)
vehicle operation.
ing the ignition switch to the OFF or N00537101115
LOCK position or putting the operation The direction of the headlight beam (the
mode in OFF, repeat the process from step direction in which the light shines) alters NOTE
1. according to the number of people and the Start adjusting when the knob is at the 0
load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle position (when the beam is at its highest).
NOTE if it is too high due to the number of people Keep the knob in the 0 position except
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head- when using the knob to lower the headlight
While the coming home light function is
beam angle.
operating, perform one of the following lights glare does not distract the drivers of
Always return the knob to the 0 position
operations to cancel the function. approaching vehicles. First set the light
when the load is removed and the people
Pull the turn signal lever toward you. switch to the position, then turn the have left the vehicle.
headlight leveling switch knob to lower the
Turn signal lever
Turn signal lever NOTE NOTE

N00522601529 A light in the instrument panel flashes to It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
show when the front and rear turn signal ing buzzer as the turn signal lights flash.
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
lights are working properly. [Vehicle equipped with the multi information
turn, hold the lever in the lane change posi- If this light flashes faster than usual, check display - type 1]
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal- Refer to Changing the turn-signal sound
when you let go. Use the full position (2) functioning connection in the signal. on page 5-145.
when making a normal turn. The lever will
return to the neutral position when the turn is
If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
[Vehicle equipped with the multi information
display - type 2]
5
complete. There may be times when the lever burned out bulb in the panel. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
does not return to the neutral position. This Have the system inspected by your autho- dealer for details.
usually happens when the steering wheel is rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
turned only slightly. You can easily return the facility of your choice.
lever by hand. It is possible to modify functions as follows:
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
function for lane changes.
then release it, the turn signal lights and the
Adjust the time required to operate the
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
lever for the 3-flash function.
flash three times.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, adjustments
can be made using screen operations. For
further details, refer to the separate owners
manual.

Hazard warning flasher switch
Hazard warning flasher ECO mode switch NOTE

switch N00579300028 Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can
select normal operation of the air condi-
N00522701328 ECO mode is an eco-driving support system
tioner.
which automatically controls the engine, air For further information, please contact your
conditioning system, 4WD system (if so authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
equipped) and S-AWC (if so equipped) to
improve fuel efficiency.
5 Refer to Electronically controlled 4WD sys-
tem on page 5-79.
Front fog light switch (if so
Refer to S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con- equipped)
trol) on page 5-81. N00522801420
Refer to Automatic climate control air con-

ditioner on page 7-5. The front fog lights illuminate only when the
headlights are on low beam.
If you press the flasher switch, the front and The ECO mode starts working by pressing Turning the knob in the direction of the ON
rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and the ECO mode switch when the ignition position turns on the front fog lights as well
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an switch or operation mode is in ON. as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
emergency warning system and should not be Push the switch again and the ECO mode will turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for cancel. the OFF position.
emergencies. While the ECO mode is working, an ECO The knob will return to the neutral position
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers mode indicator will be turned on. when it is released.
will keep working after the ignition switch is
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
NOTE
If the flashers are used for several hours, the
battery will run down. This could make it
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.

Wiper and washer switch
NOTE Windshield wipers

If the headlights are switched to high beam,
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
minate again when the headlights are NOTE
switched back to low beam. To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
If the light switch is rotated to the OFF or window wiper will automatically perform
position while the front fog lights are several continuous operations if the selector
illuminated, they will automatically turn off. lever is put in the R position while the
windshield wipers are operating.
5
They can be turned back on again by rotating
the combination headlights and dimmer Refer to Rear window wiper and washer
on page 5-189.
switch back to position, and turning MIST- Misting function
the knob in the direction of the ON posi- The wipers will operate once.
tion.
Except for vehicle with rain sensor OFF- Off
Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
LO- Slow
The windshield wiper and washer can be HI- Fast
operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode is in ON or ACC.
Wiper and washer switch If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do To adjust intermittent intervals
N00523001722 not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper With the lever in the INT (speed sensitive
CAUTION motor may be damaged. intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
If the washer is used in cold weather, the tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may knob (A).
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.


released. This operation is useful when it is
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the MIST
position.
1- Fast MIST- Misting function

2- Slow The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
INT- Auto-wiper control
NOTE Rain sensor
The speed-sensitive-operation function of The wipers will automatically oper-
the windshield wipers can be deactivated. ate depending on the degree of wet-
For further information, please contact your Vehicle with rain sensor ness on the windshield.
authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer LO- Slow
or a repair facility of your choice. On vehi-
The windshield wipers can be operated with HI- Fast
cles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
munication System, screen operations can be
used to make the adjustment. ON or ACC.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or Rain sensor (if so equipped)
Refer to separate owners manual for details.
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
Can only be used when the ignition switch or
Misting function the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
the operation mode is in ON.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
The misting function can be used when the If the lever is put in the AUTO position, the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain
ON or ACC. (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
wipers will operate automatically.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper
Keep the lever in the OFF position if the
lever is raised to the MIST position and
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.

Wiper operation under these conditions can If your hands get trapped, you could suffer
scratch the windshield and damage the wip- injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be
NOTE
The wipers may automatically operate when
ers. sure to turn the ignition switch to the OFF
things such as insects or foreign objects are
or LOCK position or put the operation
affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
mode in OFF, or move the lever to the OFF sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
position to deactivate the rain sensor. Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
5
lever to the LO or HI position.
To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
operation of the wipers does not take place
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
even if the lever is put in the AUTO posi-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
lever to the OFF position.
ambient temperature is about 32 F (0 C) or
lower. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
when replacing the windshield glass.
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put
CAUTION any water-repellent coating on the wind-
With the ignition switch or the operation shield. The rain sensor would not be able to To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
mode in ON and the lever in the AUTO detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
position, the wipers may automatically oper- might stop working normally. With the lever in the AUTO (rain sensor)
ate in the situations described below. In the following cases, the rain sensor may position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
When cleaning the outside surface of the be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B).
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
When cleaning the outside surface of the a repair facility of your choice.
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
sensor. val despite changes in the extent of rain.
When using an automatic car wash. When the wipers do not operate even
A physical shock is applied to the wind- though it is raining.
shield.
A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor.


Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the MIST position and released
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
MIST position.
5
+- Higher sensitivity to rain

-- Lower sensitivity to rain
Windshield washer
N00504601354
NOTE The windshield washer can be operated with
Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
the ignition switch or the operation mode in
can be changed to intermittent operation,
ON or ACC.
either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
speed sensitive. The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
For further information, please contact your windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer The wipers will operate once if the lever is When the wipers are not in operation or in
or a repair facility of your choice. moved to the AUTO position and the knob intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi- (C) is turned in the + direction when the toward you, the wipers will operate several
Communication System, screen operations ignition switch or the operation mode is in times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
can be used to make the adjustment. ON.
details.
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once.

Intelligent washer INT- The wiper operates continuously for

several seconds then operates inter-
mittently at intervals of about 8 sec-
By releasing the lever soon after pulling it
onds.
toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
several times while the wipers are operating
rear window glass while the knob is
several times.
turned fully in either direction.
Intelligent washer will stop operating with
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the
any operation of the lever.
wiper will automatically operate 2 or
5
3 times.
Rear window wiper and washer
NOTE
N00523201418 NOTE
The rear window wiper and washer can be The rear window wiper will automatically
It is possible to modify functions as follows: operated when the ignition switch or the perform several continuous operations if the
Intelligent washer can be activated. operation mode is in ON or ACC. selector lever is put in the R position while
Refer to Intelligent washer on page the windshield wipers or the rear window
5-189. Turn the knob to operate the rear window wiper is operating.(automatic operation
The wipers can be set to operate again after wiper. mode)
about 6 seconds. After the automatic operation, the rear win-
These functions are not activated when the dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
vehicle is shipped from the factory. in the OFF position. If the knob is in the
To activate or deactivate these functions, INT position, the rear window wiper will
please contact your authorized Mitsubishi return to the intermittent operation.
Motors dealer. It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi- perform the automatic operation only if the
Communication System, screen operations selector lever is put in the R position while
can be used to make the adjustment. the rear window wiper is operating with the
Refer to the separate owners manual for knob in the INT position.
details. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
OFF- Off

Wiper deicer switch (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Wiper deicer switch (if so

If the knob is in the OFF position, turn the Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
equipped)
knob to the INT position twice quickly to dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
N00584400027
operate the rear window wiper continuously. wiper blades prematurely.
(continuous operation mode) Before using the wipers in cold weather, The electric rear window defogger switch can
Turn the knob to the OFF position to stop check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
the rear window wiper continuous operation.
be operated when the engine is running.
frozen to the windshield or rear window.
When the front wipers have frozen to the
5 The wiper intermittent operation time can be
adjusted.
Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
could cause the wiper motor to burn out. windshield at the parked positions, turning on
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors If the moving wipers become blocked part- this switch will heat the windshield to make
dealer for details. way through a sweep by ice or other deposits the wipers operable. Press the electric rear
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop window defogger switch and the deicer will
Multi-Communication System, adjustments operating to prevent the motor from over- operate.
can be made using screen operations. For heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a
further details, refer to the separate owners safe place, turn the ignition switch to the
manual. OFF position or put the operation mode in
NOTE
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos- The wiper deicer is activated/deactivated,
engine compartment. its. depending on the operation of the rear win-
Check the fluid level regularly and refill if Because the wipers will start operating again dow defogger. Refer to Electric rear win-
necessary. (Refer to Washer fluid on page after the wiper motor cools down, check that dow defogger switch on page 5-190.
9-12.) the wipers operate before using them.
Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
Precautions to observe when onds at a time. Do not operate the washer Electric rear window defog-
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
using wipers and washers the pump may fail. ger switch
N00523501277 During cold weather, add a recommended N00523701468
washer solution that will not freeze in the The rear window defogger can be used when
CAUTION washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer the engine is running.
If the washer is used in cold weather, the may not work or may be damaged. The indicator light (A) will come on when
washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might Replace the wiper blades when they are you press the electric rear window defogger
freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass worn. Use the proper size replacement
switch. Electric current will flow through the
with the defroster before using the washer. blades. For further information, please con-
heating wires on the rear window to help
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer. clear away moisture or frost.

Horn switch
CAUTION NOTE
Do not place stickers, tape, or other items It is possible to change the setting to make
that are attached with adhesive over the grid the rear window defogger operate automati-
wires on the rear window. cally when ambient temperature becomes
When cleaning the inside rear window, use a low while the engine is running, even if you
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid do not push the rear window defogger
wires. switch.
It operates automatically only once after
turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-
5
NOTE tion or putting the operation mode in ON.
If you choose this setting, the door mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with door mirror
heater (if so equipped) and wiper deicer (if
After about 15 to 20 minutes of operation, the heater, mist can also be removed from the
so equipped) will also operate automatically
system will shut off automatically. outside rearview mirrors when the rear win-
at the same time.
To switch the defogger OFF before 15 to 20 dow defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to
minutes have passed, press the switch again. Door mirror heater on page 5-59.)
The indicator light will go out and the defog- On vehicles equipped with the wiper deicer,
when the rear window defogger switch is
ger will turn off. Communication System, screen operations
pushed, the windshield becomes warm and
If you need the defogger for more than 15 to can be used to make the adjustment.
the wipers become operable. (Refer to
20 minutes, press the switch again. This will Refer to the separate owners manual for
Wiper deicer switch on page 5-190.)
add 15 to 20 more minutes. details.
CAUTION Horn switch

The rear window defogger is not designed to N00523801195
melt snow. Remove any snow manually

To honk the horn, press around the mark
before using the rear window defogger.
on the steering wheel.
Use the rear window defogger only after the
engine has started and is running. Be sure to
turn the defogger switch off immediately
after the window is clear to save on battery
power.

Link System (if so equipped)

Refer to Listen to Bluetooth Audio on page The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
7-41. tion function, which allows you to make
hands-free calls by simple switch operations
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of and voice command operations using a
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. defined voice tree.
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface can be used

Link System End User License when the ignition switch or the operation
5 Agreement mode is in ON or ACC.
N00563801025
You have acquired a device that includes soft- Before you can use the Bluetooth 2.0 inter-
ware licensed to Mitsubishi Motors Corpora- face, you must pair the Bluetooth device
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
Link System (if so equipped) and Bluetooth 2.0 interface. Refer to Con-
automotive experience business unit), and
N00563701112 their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a necting the Bluetooth 2.0 interface and
complete list of these 3rd party products and Bluetooth device on page 5-199.
The Link System takes control of the devices
their end user license agreements, please go
connected via the USB input terminal or the Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
to the following website.
Bluetooth 2.0 interface; the system allows http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis- BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
the connected device to be operated by using closure.pdf
the switches in the vehicle or voice com-
WARNING
mands.
See the following section for details on how Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so Although the Bluetooth 2.0 interface
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
to operate. equipped) choose to use the cellular phone while
N00563901260 driving, you must not allow yourself to be
Refer to Bluetooth 2.0 interface on page distracted from the safe operation of your
5-192. The Bluetooth 2.0 interface allows for mak- vehicle. Anything, including cellular
Refer to USB input terminal on page 5-215. ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle phone usage, that distracts you from the
Refer to Listen to an iPod on page 7-33. using a Bluetooth compatible cellular safe operation of your vehicle increases
Refer to Listen to Audio Files on a USB phone. It also allows the user to play music, your risk of an accident.
Device on page 7-35. Refer to and comply with all state and
Refer to To play iPod/USB memory device saved in a Bluetooth music player, from the local laws in your area regarding cellular
tracks via voice operation on page 7-38. vehicles speakers. phone usage while driving.

Bluetooth 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE Steering control switch and

If the ignition switch or the operation mode For detail of the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, microphone
is left in ACC, the accessory power will refer to the following website: N00564001109
automatically turn off after a certain period [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
of time and you will no longer be able to use You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. The accessory America website.
power comes on again if the ignition switch [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
or the engine switch is operated. Refer to
ACC power auto-cutout function on page
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site.
5
5-19 and 5-60. Please read and agree to the Warning about
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies,
the websites mentioned above may connect
if the Bluetooth device has a dead battery
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
or the device power is turned off.
Motors website.
Hands-free calls will not be possible if your http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
phone does not have service available. ucts/index.html
If you place the Bluetooth device in the Software updates by cellular phone/digital
vehicles third seat or luggage compartment, audio device manufacturers may
you may not be able to use the Bluetooth change/alter device connectivity.
2.0 interface. 1- Volume up button
Steering control switch and microphone 2- Volume down button
Some Bluetooth devices are not compatible
P.5-193 3- SPEECH button
with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
Voice recognition function P.5-195 4- PICK-UP button
You can confirm the Link System software
Useful voice commands P.5-196 5- HANG-UP button
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
Speaker enrollment function P.5-197 6- Microphone
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
briefly) within 10 seconds. Connecting the Bluetooth 2.0 interface and
the Bluetooth device P.5-199
Volume up button
Operating a music player connected via Blue-
tooth P.5-205
Press this button to increase the volume.
How to make or receive hands-free calls
P.5-205
Phonebook function P.5-207


If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
Volume down button PICK-UP button
nition mode, the voice recognition mode
Press this button when an incoming call is will be deactivated.
Press this button to decrease the volume.
received to answer the telephone.
NOTE
SPEECH button NOTE When you press the SPEECH button (except
When not receiving incoming calls, pressing for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Press this button to change to voice recog-
5 nition mode.
the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
While the system is in voice recognition System, will activate the voice recognition of tion System) to enter voice recognition mode
mode, Listening will appear on the the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. with a cellular phone paired to the system,
audio display. current information on the cellular phone,
such as remaining battery life, signal
When another call is received during a
NOTE strength or roaming, will be displayed on
call, press this button to put the first caller the audio display.*
On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
Multi-Communication System, pressing the
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec- In such circumstances, you can press the information to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc- button briefly to switch between callers. Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
cessfully activated). To use the voice You will switch to the first caller and the
by the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, only if it is
recognition of the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, other caller will be put on hold. possible to use those services with your cel-
press the PICK-UP button. To establish a three-way call in such situ- lular phone.
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode and then say
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt Join calls. Microphone
prompting and allow voice command
input. HANG-UP button Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
Pressing the button longer will deactivate phone in the overhead console, allowing you
the voice recognition mode. Press this button when an incoming call is
to make hands-free calls with voice com-
Pressing this button briefly during a call received to refuse the call.
mands.
will enable voice recognition and allow Press this button during a call to end the
voice command input. current call.
When another call is on hold, you will
switch to that call.


5. The voice guide will say English (Span-
NOTE NOTE ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
If a cellular phone is within close proximity For best performance and further reduction
correct? Say Yes.
of the microphone, it may distort the sound of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
If you say No, the system will return to
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone should be closed, lower the blower speed and
as far as possible from the microphone. refrain from conversation with your passen- Step 4.
gers while engaging the voice recognition
function. NOTE
Voice recognition function Some voice commands have alternative
commands.
The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
5
N00564101113
Depending on the selected language, some rent language, and the second message is in
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped functions may not be available. the selected language.
with a voice recognition function. Language can be changed by using the audio If many entries are registered in the vehicle
Simply say voice commands and you can per- control panel besides the following proce- phonebook, changing the language will take
dure. a longer time.
form various operations and make or receive
For details, refer to System settings on Changing the language deletes the mobile
hands-free calls.
page 7-45. For DISPLAY AUDIO and Mit- phonebook imported to the Bluetooth 2.0
subishi Multi-Communication System, refer interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
With the Bluetooth 2.0 interface, voice rec-
to the separate owners manuals. to import it again.
ognition is possible for US English, North
American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-
anese. The factory setting is English. Selecting the language 6. When the voice guide says English
(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
NOTE the language change process will be com-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
If the voice command that you say differs
pleted and the system will return to the
from the predefined command or cannot be main menu.
recognised due to ambient noise or some nication System).
other reason, the Bluetooth 2.0 interface 2. Say Setup.
will ask you for the voice command again up 3. Say Language.
to 3 times.
4. The voice guide will say Select a lan-
guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
nese. Say the desired language.
(Example: English)


With the confirmation function activated, you passcode in order to use all functions of the
Useful voice commands are given more opportunities than normal to
N00564200016
Bluetooth 2.0 interface, except for recep-
confirm a command when making various tion.
settings to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. This
Help function Setting the passcode
allows you to decrease the possibility that a
N00564301027
setting is accidentally changed.
Use the following procedure to turn on the
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped The confirmation function can be turned on
security function by setting a passcode.
5 with a help function.
If you say Help when the system is waiting
or off by following the steps below.
for a voice command input, the system will 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
tell you a list of the commands that can be vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
used under the circumstances. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
nication System).
nication System).
Canceling 2. Say Setup.
2. Say Setup.
N00564401028 3. Say Passcode.
3. Say Confirmation prompts.
There are 2 cancel functions. 4. The voice guide will say Passcode is dis-
4. The voice guide will say Confirmation
If you are at the main menu, say Cancel to abled. Would you like to enable it?
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
Answer Yes.
exit from the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.
Answer No to cancel the setting of the
If you are anywhere else within the system, Answer Yes to change the setting or
passcode and return to the main menu.
say Cancel to return to the main menu. answer No to keep the current setting.
5. The voice guide will say Please say a 4-
5. The voice guide will say Confirmation
digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
NOTE prompts are <off/on> and then the sys-
It will be required to use this system.
tem will return to the main menu.
You can return to the previous menu by say- Say a 4-digit number which you want to
ing Go Back. (if so equipped) set as a passcode.
Security function 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
N00564601105 guide will say Passcode <4-digit pass-
Confirmation function setting It is possible to use a passcode as a security code>. Is this correct? Answer Yes.
N00564501032
function by setting a passcode of your choice Answer No to return to the passcode
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface is equipped for the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. input in Step 5.
with a confirmation function. When the security function is turned on, it is
necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit

7. When the registration of the passcode is passcode. Please try again. Enter the correct 5. When the disabling of the passcode is
completed, the voice guide will say Pass- passcode. completed, the voice guide will say Pass-
code is enabled and the system will code is disabled and the system will
return to the main menu. NOTE return to the main menu.
You can reenter the passcode as many times
NOTE as you want. Speaker enrollment function
Passcode will be required to access the sys- If you have forgotten your passcode, say N00564700011
tem after the next ignition cycle. Cancel to quit the voice input mode and
then check with an authorized Mitsubishi The Bluetooth 2.0 interface can use the 5
It is required for a little time after engine
stop that the entered passcode is actually Motors dealer. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
recorded in the system. model for one person per language.
If the ignition switch or the operation mode Disabling the passcode This makes it easier for the Bluetooth 2.0
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is interface to recognise voice commands said
started immediately after engine stop, there Use the following procedure to turn off the by you.
is a case when the entered passcode is not security function by disabling the passcode. You can turn a voice model registered with
recorded in the system. At this time, please the speaker enrollment function on and off
try to enter the passcode again.
NOTE whenever you want.
System must be unlocked to disable the pass-
Entering the passcode code.
Speaker enrollment
If a passcode has been set and the security N00564801110
function is enabled, the voice guide will say 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- speaker enrollment process.
code to continue when the SPEECH button nication System) or PICK-UP button (for To ensure the best results, run through the
(except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- process while in the drivers seat, in an envi-
Communication System) or PICK-UP button nication System). ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 2. Say Setup. there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- 3. Say Passcode. cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 4. The voice guide will say Passcode is phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
number to enter the passcode. enabled. Would you like to disable it? interruption of the process.
Answer Yes. Use the following procedure for speaker
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice Answer No to cancel the disabling of enrollment.
guide will say <4-digit passcode>, Incorrect the passcode and return to the main menu.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
selector lever in the P (PARK) position
NOTE NOTE
If you do not start the speaker enrollment Completing the speaker enrollment process
and pull the parking brake lever.
process within 3 minutes after pressing the will turn on the voice model automatically.
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment The commands Help and Cancel will not
NOTE function will time out. work in this mode.
Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the The voice guide will say Speaker enroll-
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the ment has timed out. The system will then
vehicle in a safe area before attempting
5 speaker enrollment.
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
Enabling and disabling the voice
model and retraining
N00564901078
2. Press the SPEECH button (except for 5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- You can turn a voice model registered with
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for the speaker enrollment function on and off
table Enrollment commands on page
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- whenever you want.
5-215.
nication System). You can also retrain the system.
The system will register your voice and
3. Say Voice training. Use the following procedure to perform these
then move on to the registration of the
4. The voice guide will say This operation actions.
next command. Continue the process until
must be performed in a quiet environment all phrases have been registered. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
while the vehicle is stopped. See the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
owners manual for the list of required NOTE nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
training phrases. Press and release the To repeat the most recent voice training com- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
SPEECH button when you are ready to mand, press and release the SPEECH button. nication System).
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- If you press the HANG-UP button anytime 2. Say Voice training.
cel at any time. during the process, the system will beep and 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
Press the SPEECH button to start the stop the speaker enrollment process.
ment process once already, the voice
speaker enrollment process. guide will say either Enrollment is
6. When all enrollment commands have enabled. Would you like to disable or
been read out, the voice guide will say retrain? or Enrollment is disabled.
Speaker enrollment is complete. The Would you like to enable or retrain?
system will then end the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
menu.


4. When enrollment is enabled, the voice If multiple paired Bluetooth devices are 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
model is on; when enrollment is dis- available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
abled, the voice model is off. Say the music player most recently connected is auto- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
command that fits your needs. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
matically connected to the Bluetooth 2.0
Say Retrain to start the speaker enroll- nication System).
interface.
ment process and recreate a new voice 3. Say Setup.
model. (Refer to Speaker enrollment on 4. Say Pairing Options.
You can also change a Bluetooth device to
page 5-197.) 5. The voice guide will say Select one of
be connected.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.
5
Connecting the Bluetooth 2.0 To pair
Say Pair.
interface and Bluetooth device NOTE

To pair a Bluetooth device with the Blue-
N00565001281
If 7 devices have already been paired, the
Before you can make or receive hands-free voice guide will say Maximum devices
tooth 2.0 interface, use either one of the fol-
calls or play music using the Bluetooth 2.0 paired and then the system will end the
lowing 2 methods (Type 1 or Type 2). pairing process. To register a new device,
interface function, you must pair the Blue-
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
tooth device and Bluetooth 2.0 interface. Pairing procedure- Type 1 (if so process.
equipped) (Refer to Selecting a device: Deleting a
NOTE device on page 5-203.)
Pairing is required only when the device is 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
used for the first time. Once the device has selector lever in the P (PARK) position 6. The voice guide will say Please say a 4-
been paired with the Bluetooth 2.0 inter- and pull the parking brake lever. digit pairing code. Say a 4-digit number.
face, all you need is to bring the device into When the confirmation function is on, the
the vehicle next time and the device will NOTE system will confirm whether the number
connect to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface auto- You cannot pair any Bluetooth device with said is acceptable. Answer Yes.
matically (if supported by the device). The the Bluetooth 2.0 interface unless the vehi- Answer No to return to pairing code
device must have Bluetooth turned ON to cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth
selection.
connect.
device with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface,
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
location.
Up to 7 Bluetooth devices can be paired
with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.

NOTE NOTE Pairing procedure- Type 2 (if so

equipped)
Some Bluetooth devices require a specific If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot recog-
pairing code. Please refer to the device man- nize the Bluetooth device, the voice guide 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
ual for pairing code requirements. will say Pairing has timed out and the pair-
selector lever in the P (PARK) position
The pairing code entered here is only used ing process will be cancelled.
and pull the parking brake lever.
for the Bluetooth connection certification. Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
It is any 4-digit number the user would like ports Bluetooth, and try pairing it again.
5 to select. If you enter the wrong number, the voice
NOTE
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be guide will say Pairing failed and the pair- You cannot pair any Bluetooth device with
keyed into the Bluetooth
device later in the ing process will be cancelled. the Bluetooth 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
pairing process. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth
Depending on the connection settings of the it again.
device with the Bluetooth 2.0 interface,
Bluetooth device, this code may have to be confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe
entered each time you connect the Blue- 8. The voice guide will say Please say the
location.
tooth device to the Bluetooth 2.0 inter-
name of the device after the beep. You
face. For the default connection settings, can assign a desired name for the Blue-
refer to the instructions for the device. tooth device and register it as a device 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
tag. Say the name you want to register vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
after the beep. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
7. The voice guide will say Start pairing vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
procedure on the device. See the device nication System).
manual for instructions. Enter in the
NOTE
When the confirmation function is on, after 3. Say Pair Device.
Bluetooth device the 4-digit number you repeating the device tag you have said, the
have registered in Step 6. voice guide will ask Is this correct?
Answer Yes.
NOTE To change the device tag, answer No and
Depending on the Bluetooth device, it may then say the device tag again.
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-
tooth 2.0 interface. 9. The voice guide will say Pairing com-
plete, and the pairing process will end.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

The following procedure ( to ) can also The pairing code entered here is only used If you enter the wrong number, the voice
be used instead of saying Pair Device. for the Bluetooth connection certification. guide will say Pairing failed and the pair-
Replace this step 3 with the following proce- Depending on the connection settings of the ing process will be cancelled.
dure if you prefer. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
Bluetooth device, this code may have to be
it again.
Say Setup. entered each time you connect the Blue-
If your device requires a specific pairing
Say Pairing Options. tooth device to the Bluetooth 2.0 inter-
The voice guide will say Select one of face. For the default connection settings,
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer
to the device manual for pairing code
5
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list. refer to the instructions for the device. requirements and read the next section If
Say Pair. your device requires a specific pairing code
If 7 devices have already been paired, the 5. Enter in the Bluetooth device the 4-digit on page 5-202.
voice guide will say Maximum devices number that has been read out in Step 4.
paired and then the system will end the 6. The voice guide will say Please say the
pairing process. To register a new device, NOTE name of the device after the beep. You
delete one device and then repeat the pairing can assign a desired name for the Blue-
Depending on the Bluetooth device, it may
process.
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- tooth device and register it as a device
(Refer to Selecting a device: Deleting a
tooth 2.0 interface. tag. Say the name you want to register
device on page 5-203.)
If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot recog- after the beep.
4. The voice guide will say Start pairing nize the Bluetooth device, the voice guide
will say Pairing has timed out and the pair- NOTE
procedure on the device. See the device
ing process will be cancelled. When the confirmation function is on, after
manual for instructions. and then will repeating the device tag you have said, the
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
say The pairing code is <pairing code>. voice guide will ask Is this correct?
ports Bluetooth, and try pairing it again.
Answer Yes.
NOTE To change the device tag, answer No and
Some Bluetooth devices require a specific then say the device tag again.
pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
ual for pairing code requirements and read
the next section If your device requires a
specific pairing code on page 5-202 to set
the pairing code.


7. The voice guide will say Pairing Com- Answer No, the system will return to 4. After the voice guide says Please say,
plete. Would you like to import the con- Step 6. the numbers of the cellular phones and
tacts from your mobile device now? 8. The voice guide will say Do you want to device tags of corresponding cellular
Answer Yes, and the voice guide will pair a device now? Answer Yes, the phones will be read out in order, starting
say Please wait while the contacts are system will proceed to Step 3 in the pair- with the cellular phone that has been most
imported. This may take several minutes. ing process. Refer to the Pairing proce- recently connected.
Answer No to end the pairing process. dure- Type 2. Say the number of the cellular phone that
you want to connect to.
5 When the confirmation function is on, the
If your device requires a specific pairing Selecting a device
code N00565101080
system will ask you again whether the
phone that you want to connect to is cor-

If your device requires a specific pairing If multiple paired Bluetooth devices are rect. Answer Yes to continue and con-
code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or nect to the cellular phone.
the procedures below. music player most recently connected is auto- Answer No, and the voice guide will
matically connected to the Bluetooth 2.0 say Please say. Say the number of the
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for interface. phone that you want to connect to.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- You can connect to the other paired cellular
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for phone or music player by following setting NOTE
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- change procedures. You can connect to a phone at any time by
nication System). pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
2. Say Setup. number, even before all of the paired num-
To select a cellular phone
3. Say Pairing Options. N00582200034
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
4. Say Set Code. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for lar phones are read out by the system.
5. The voice guide will say Do you want vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the pairing code to be random or fixed? nication System) or PICK-UP button (for 5. The selected phone will be connected to
Say Fixed. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. The voice
6. The voice guide will say Please say a 4- nication System). guide will say <device tag> selected
digit pairing code. Say a 4-digit number. 2. Say Setup. and then the system will return to the
7. The voice guide will say Pairing code set 3. Say Select phone. main menu.
to <pairing code>.
When the confirmation function is on, the
system will confirm whether the number
said is acceptable. Answer Yes.
To select a music player 5. The selected music player will be con- If you want to delete all paired phones
N00582300035 nected to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. from the system, say All.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for The voice guide will say <device tag> 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- selected and then the system will return guide will say Deleting <device tag>
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for to the main menu. <number>. Is this correct? or Deleting
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- all devices. Is this correct?
nication System). Answer Yes to delete the phone(s).
Deleting a device
Answer No, the system will return to
2. Say Setup.
3. Say Select music player.
N00582400036
Step 4.
5
Use the following procedure to delete a
4. After the voice guide says Please say, 7. The voice guide will say Deleted, and
the numbers of the music players and paired Bluetooth device from the Blue- then the system will end the device dele-
device tags of corresponding music play- tooth 2.0 interface. tion process.
ers will be read out in order, starting with
the music player that has been most 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for NOTE
recently connected. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If the device deletion process fails for some
Say the number of the music player that nication System) or PICK-UP button (for reason, the voice guide will say Delete
you want to connect to. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- failed and then the system will cancel delet-
When the confirmation function is on, the nication System). ing the device.
system will ask you again whether the 2. Say Setup.
music player that you want to connect to 3. Say Pairing Options.
is correct. Answer Yes to continue and 4. The voice guide will say Select one of To check a paired Bluetooth
connect to the music player. the following: pair, edit, delete, or list. device
Answer No, and the voice guide will Say Delete. N00565201036
say Please say. Say the number of the 5. After the voice guide says Please say,
the numbers of the devices and device You can check a paired Bluetooth device by
music player that you want to connect to. following the steps below.
tags of corresponding devices will be read
NOTE out in order, starting with the device that
has been most recently connected. After it
You can connect to a music player at any vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
time by pressing the SPEECH button and
completes reading all pairs, the voice
saying the number, even before all of the guide will say or all.
paired numbers and device tags of corre- Say the number of the device that you
nication System).
sponding music players are read out by the want to delete from the system.
2. Say Setup.
system.


3. Say Pairing Options. 5. The voice guide will say Please say, and
4. The voice guide will say Select one of
NOTE
You can change the phone to be connected
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list. devices and device tags of corresponding
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
Say List. devices in order, starting with the Blue-
ton and then saying Select phone while the
5. The voice guide will read out device tags list is being read. tooth that has been most recently con-
of corresponding devices in order, starting You can change the music player to be connected.
with the Bluetooth device that has been nected by pressing and releasing the After all paired device tags have been
5 most recently connected.
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
SPEECH button and then saying Select
music player while the list is being read.
read, the voice guide will say Which
device, please? Say the number of the
tooth devices have been read, the system device tag you want to change.
will say End of list, would you like to Changing a device tag
start from the beginning? N00565301037 NOTE
To hear the list again from the beginning, You can change the device tag of a paired cel- You can press and release the SPEECH but-
answer Yes. lular phone or music player. ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
When you are done, answer No to Follow the steps below to change a device ately say the number of the device tag you
return to the main menu. want to change.
tag.

NOTE vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
6. The voice guide will say New name,
If you press and release the SPEECH button please. Say the name you want to regis-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for ter as a new device tag.
and say Continue or Previous while the
list is being read, the system will advance or
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the confirmation function is on, the
rewind the list. nication System). voice guide will say <New device tag>.
Say Continue to proceed to the device with 2. Say Setup. Is this correct? Answer Yes.
the next highest number or Previous to 3. Say Pairing Options. Answer No, you can say the new device
return to the phone with the previous num- 4. The voice guide will say Select one of tag you want to register again.
ber. the following: pair, edit, delete, or list. 7. The device tag is changed.
You can change the device tag by pressing Say Edit. When the change is complete, the voice
and releasing the SPEECH button and then
guide will say New name saved and
saying Edit while the list is being read.
then the system will return to the main
menu.


Receiving calls P.5-207 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
Operating a music player con- Mute function P.5-207 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
nected via Bluetooth Switching between hands-free mode and pri- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
N00565401070 vate mode P.5-207 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
For the operation of a music player connected nication System).
via Bluetooth, refer to the following sec- NOTE 2. Say Dial.
tions. Hands-free calls may not operate correctly
3. After the voice guide says Number
please, say the telephone number.
[For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM
when you place or receive the call directly
4. The voice guide will say Dialing <num-
5
from your cellular phone, instead of using
radio/CD player] ber recognized>.
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
Refer to Listen to Bluetooth Audio on page The Bluetooth 2.0 interface will then
7-41. make the call.
[For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System (MMCS)]
To make a call When the confirmation function is on, the
N00565601098 system will confirm the telephone number
Refer to the separate owners manual. again. To continue with that number,
[For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY You can make a call in the following 3 ways
answer Yes.
AUDIO] using the Bluetooth 2.0 interface: To change the telephone number, answer
Refer to the separate owners manual. No. The system will say Number
By saying a telephone number
please then say the telephone number
By using the Bluetooth 2.0 interfaces
How to make or receive hands- phonebook
again.
free calls By redialing a telephone number
N00565501097 NOTE
You can make or receive hands-free calls In the case of English, the system will recog-
Making a call by using the telephone
nise both zero and oh (Letter o) for the
using a Bluetooth compatible cellular phone number number 0.
connected to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
You can make a call by saying the telephone The Bluetooth 2.0 interface supports num-
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
number.
tooth 2.0 interface to make calls without The maximum supported telephone number
dialing telephone numbers. length is as follows:
International telephone number: + and tele-
To make a call P.5-205 phone numbers (to 18 digits).
Send function P.5-207


3. After the voice guide says Name please,
NOTE say the name you want to call, from those
NOTE
Except for international telephone number: If the name you selected has matching data
registered in the phonebook.
telephone numbers (to 19 digits). in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
number is registered under the selected loca-
proceed to Step 5. tion, the voice guide will say
Making a call using a phonebook
If there are 2 or more matches, the voice {home/work/mobile/other} not found for
You can make calls using the vehicle phone- guide will say More than one match was <name>. Would you like to add location or
found, would you like to call <returned
5 book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth
name>. If that person is the one you want
try again?
Say Try again, and the system will return
2.0 interface.
to call, answer Yes. to Step 3.
Answer No, the name of the next Say Add location and you can register an
For details on the phonebooks, refer to
matching person will be uttered by the additional telephone number under the
Phonebook function on page 5-207. selected location.
voice guide.
If the name you selected has matching data
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE number is registered under the selected loca-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for If you say No to all names read by the sys- tion, the voice guide will say
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tem, the voice guide will say Name not {home/work/mobile/other} not found for
nication System). found, returning to main menu and the sys- <name>. Would you like to try again?
2. Say Call. tem will return to the main menu. Answer Yes, and the system will return to
Step 3.
NOTE 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered Answer No, and the call will be cancelled.
If you say Call when the vehicle phone- under the name you just said, the voice Start over again from Step 1.
book and the mobile phonebook are empty, guide will proceed to Step 6.
the voice guide will say The vehicle phone- If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- 6. The voice guide will say Calling <name>
book is empty. Would you like to add a new tered that match the name you just said, <location> and then the system will dial
entry now? the voice guide will say Would you like
Answer Yes, and the voice guide will say the telephone number.
to call <name> at [home], [work],
Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.
You can now create data in the vehicle
[mobile], or [other]? Select the location
phonebook. to call.
Answer No, the system will return to the
main menu.


response to an automated system, press the Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
NOTE SPEECH button and speak 1 2 3 4 pound Mute during a call will turn ON the mute
send and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- function and mute the microphone.
system will check if the name and location of
lular phone. Saying Mute off in the same way will turn
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-
rect, answer Yes. off the mute function and cancel the mute on
To change the name or location to call, Receiving calls the microphone.
answer No. The system will return to Step N00565801045
3.
If an incoming phone call is received while Switching between hands-free 5
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in mode and private mode
Redialing ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto- N00566600014
matically turned on and switched to the The Bluetooth 2.0 interface can switch
You can redial the last number called, based incoming call, even when the audio system between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- was originally off. and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
lular phone. The voice guide announcement for the If you press the SPEECH button and say
incoming call will be output from the front Transfer call during a hands-free call, you
Use the following procedure to redial. passengers seat speaker. can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
If the CD player or radio was playing when vate mode.
the incoming call was received, the audio sys- To return to hands-free mode, press the
tem will mute the sound from the CD player SPEECH button again and say Transfer
or radio and output only the incoming call. call.
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
nication System).
on the steering wheel control switch.
2. Say Redial. Phonebook function
When the call is over, the audio system will
return to its previous state. N00566000018
Send function
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface has 2 types of
N00565700018
Mute function unique phonebooks that are different from the
During a call, press the SPEECH button to N00565900010 phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
enter voice recognition mode, then say are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile
At any time during a call, you can mute the
<numbers> SEND to generate DTMF phonebook.
vehicle microphone.
tones.
For example, if during a call you need to sim-
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a


These phonebooks are used to register tele- To register a telephone number in
phone numbers and make calls to desired
NOTE
the vehicle phonebook If the maximum number of entries are
numbers via voice recognition function. N00580500059
already registered, the voice guide will say
You can register a telephone number in the The phonebook is full. Would you like to
NOTE vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: delete a name? Say Yes if you want to
Disconnecting the battery cable will not Reading out a telephone number, and select- delete a registered name.
delete information registered in the phone- ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from If you say No, the system will return to the
5 book. the phonebook of the cellular phone. main menu.
5. When the name has been registered, the

To register by reading out a tele-
Vehicle phonebook voice guide will say home, work,
phone number
N00566101120
N00580600063
mobile, or other? Say the location for
This phonebook is used when making calls 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for which you want to register a telephone
with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- number.
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
cle phonebook per language. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated nication System). When the confirmation function is on, the
with: home, work, mobile and other. You can 2. Say Phonebook. voice guide will say <Location>. Is this cor-
register one telephone number for each loca- rect? Answer Yes.
3. The voice guide will say Select one of
If a telephone number has been registered for
tion. the following: new entry, edit number,
the selected location, the voice guide will say
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or The current number is <telephone number>,
You can register a desired name as a name for import contact. Say New entry. number please.
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle 4. The voice guide will say Name please. If you do not want to change the telephone
phonebook. Say your preferred name to register it. number, say cancel or the original number
Names and telephone numbers can be to keep it registered.
changed later on.
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all 6. The voice guide will say Number
paired cellular phones. please. Say the telephone number to reg-
ister it.

To select and transfer one phone- 2. Say Phonebook.

NOTE 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
In the case of English, the system will recog- book entry from the phonebook of
the following: new entry, edit number,
nise both zero and oh (Letter o) for the the cellular phone
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
number 0. N00580700048
import contact. Say Import contact.
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
4. The voice guide will say Would you like
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone phonebook of the cellular phone and register
to import a single entry or all contacts?
number you have just read, and then reg- it in the vehicle phonebook.
Say Single entry.
ister the number. The Bluetooth 2.0 interface will become
5
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE ready to receive transferred phonebook
istered, the voice guide will say Number Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is data.
saved. Would you like to add another parked. Before transferring, make sure that
number for this entry? the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
NOTE
To add another telephone number for a All or part of data may not be transferred,
If the maximum number of entries are
new location for the current entry, answer even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
already registered, the voice guide will say
Yes. The system will return to location tooth, depending on the compatibility of The phonebook is full. Would you like to
selection in Step 5. the device. delete a name? Say Yes if you want to
Answer No to end the registration pro- The maximum supported telephone number delete a registered name.
cess and return to the main menu. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of If you say No, the system will return to the
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first main menu.
19 digits.
NOTE If telephone numbers contain characters
When the confirmation function is on, after other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters 5. After the voice guide says Ready to
repeating the telephone number you have are deleted before the transfer. receive a contact from the phone. Only a
read, the voice guide will ask Is this cor-
For the connection settings on the cellular home, a work, and a mobile number can
rect? Answer Yes.
phone side, refer to the instructions for the be imported, the Bluetooth 2.0 inter-
Answer No to return to telephone number
cellular phone.
registration in step 6. face will receive the phonebook data from
the Bluetooth compatible cellular phone.
nication System).


6. Operate the Bluetooth compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say Adding Editing a telephone number
lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>. N00579900053
book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Answer Yes. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
Answer No, the voice guide will say vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Name please. Register a different name. nication System).
NOTE
9. The voice guide will say Numbers 2. Say Phonebook.
5 If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved. 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
nise the Bluetooth compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say Would you like the following: new entry, edit number,
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact? edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
time, the voice guide will say Import con-
Answer Yes if you want to continue import contact. Say Edit number.
tact has timed out and then the system will
with the registration. You can continue to 4. The voice guide will say Please say the
cancel the registration. In such case, start
over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step name of the entry you would like to edit,
Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing 5. or say list names. Say the name of the
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer No, the system will return to phonebook entry you want to edit.
the registration. the main menu.
NOTE
7. When the reception is complete, the voice To change the content registered in Say List names, and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
guide will say <Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
Refer to Vehicle phonebook: Listening to
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800049
the list of registered names on page 5-211.
import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or telephone
imported. What name would you like to number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
use for these numbers? You can also listen to the list of names regis- 5. The voice guide will say Home, work,
Say the name you want to register for this tered in the vehicle phonebook. mobile or other? Select and say the loca-
phonebook entry. tion where the telephone number you
want to change or add is registered.
NOTE
NOTE The system must have at least one entry.
If the entered name is already used for other system will check the target name and
phonebook entry or similar to a name used location again. Answer Yes if you want
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot to continue with the editing.
be registered.


Answer No, the system will return to Editing a name 6. The voice guide will say Name please.
Step 3. N00580100055 Say the new name you want to register.
6. The voice guide will say Number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 7. The registered name will be changed.
please. Say the telephone number you vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the change is complete, the system
want to register. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for will return to the main menu.
NOTE nication System). Listening to the list of registered names
2. Say Phonebook.
If the telephone number is already registered
5
N00580200043
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say Select one of 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
say The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
ber>. New number, please. Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
phone number to change the current number. import contact. Say Edit name. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
4. The voice guide will say Please say the nication System).
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit, 2. Say Phonebook.
number. or say list names. Say the name you want 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
When the confirmation function is on, the to edit. the following: new entry, edit number,
system will ask if the number is correct. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
Answer Yes. NOTE import contact. Say List names.
Answer No, the system will return to Say List names, and the names registered 4. Bluetooth 2.0 interface will read out the
the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer entries in the phonebook in order.
8. Once the telephone number is registered, to Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list 5. When the voice guide is done reading the
of registered names on page 5-211. list, it will say End of list, would you like
the voice guide will say Number saved
and then the system will return to the to start from the beginning? When you
main menu. 5. The voice guide will say Changing want to check the list again from the
<name>. beginning, answer Yes.
NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the When you are done, answer No to
If the location where a telephone number system will check if the name is correct. return to the previous or main menu.
was already registered has been overwritten Answer Yes if you want to continue
with a new number, the voice guide will say with the editing based on this information.
Number changed and then the system will Answer No, the system will return to
return to the main menu.
Step 4.


4. The voice guide will say Please say the 6. The system will ask if you really want to
NOTE name of the entry you would like to delete the selected telephone number(s) to
You can call, edit or delete a name that is
delete, or say list names. Say the name of go ahead with the deletion, answer Yes.
being read out.
the phonebook entry in which the tele- Answer No, the system will cancel
Press the SPEECH button and say Call to
call the name, Edit name to edit it, or phone number you want to delete is regis- deleting the telephone number(s) and then
Delete to delete it. tered. return to Step 4.
The system will beep and then execute your 7. When the telephone number deletion is
NOTE complete, the voice guide will say
5 command.
If you press the SPEECH button and say Say List names, and the names registered <name> <location> deleted and then
Continue or Previous while the list is in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer the system will return to the main menu.
being read, the system will advance or to Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list If all locations are deleted, the system will
rewind the list. Say Continue to proceed to of registered names on page 5-211. say <name> and all locations deleted
the next entry or Previous to return to the and the name will be removed from the
previous entry.
5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under
in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other
guide will say Deleting <name> <loca- associated numbers.
Deleting a telephone number
N00580300057 tion>.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If multiple telephone numbers are regis- Erasing the phonebook
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the N00580400045
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for voice guide will say Would you like to You can delete all registered information
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], from the vehicle phonebook.
nication System). or all?
2. Say Phonebook. Select the location to delete, and the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
3. The voice guide will say Select one of guide will say Deleting <name> <loca- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the following: new entry, edit number, tion>. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
import contact. Say Delete. NOTE nication System).
To delete the telephone numbers from all 2. Say Phonebook.
locations, say All. 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact. Say Erase all.


4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth 2.0 interface automatically
guide will ask Are you sure you want to
NOTE
converts from text to voice the names regis- All or part of data may not be transferred,
erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
system phonebook? Answer Yes. and creates names.
Answer No to cancel the deletion of all tooth, depending on the compatibility of
the device.
registered information in the phonebook
and return to the main menu.
NOTE Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
Only the mobile phonebook transferred from can be imported.
5. The voice guide will say You are about
to delete everything from your hands-free
the connected cellular phone can be used The maximum supported telephone number 5
with that cellular phone. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
system phonebook. Do you want to con- 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue? Answer Yes to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered 19 digits.
Answer No to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select If telephone numbers contain characters
registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change are deleted before the transfer.
6. The voice guide will say Please wait, the applicable information in the source For the connection settings on the cellular
erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then phone side, refer to the instructions for the
book and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again. cellular phone.
data in the phonebook.
To import a devices phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
When the deletion is complete, the voice
guide will say Hands-free system phone-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
book erased and then the system will
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
return to the main menu.
the cellular phone. nication System).
2. Say Phonebook.
Mobile phonebook 3. The voice guide will say Select one of
NOTE
N00566201059 the following: new entry, edit number,
Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. import contact. Say Import contact.
registered in the mobile phonebook. The already stored phonebook in the mobile 4. The voice guide will say Would you like
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored to import a single entry or all contacts?
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone. Say All contacts.


5. The voice guide will say Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice The term IC: before the radio certification
contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say Import complete and number only signifies that Industry Canada
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main technical specifications were met.
plete. Would you like to continue? menu. The antenna used for this transmitter must not
Answer Yes, transferring to the mobile be co-located or operating in conjunction
phonebook the phonebook stored in the with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
General information
cellular phone will start. users and installers must be provided with
N00566301092
Answer No, the system will return to installation instructions and transmitter oper-
5 the main menu. MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 compliance.
NOTE Your Bluetooth 2.0 interface operates on a FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
The transfer may take some time to complete radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- and found to comply with the limits for a
depending on the number of contacts. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
If the Bluetooth 2.0 interface could not be cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
connected to the Bluetooth compatible cel- Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
lular phone, the voice guide will say Unable device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
to transfer contact list from phone and then Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, use and can radiate
the system will return to the main menu. Rules. Operation is subject to the following radio frequency energy and, if not installed
If you press the HANG-UP button or press two conditions: and used in accordance with the instructions,
and hold the SPEECH button during the data may cause harmful interference to radio com-
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and This device may not cause harmful inter- munications.
the system will return to the main menu. ference. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
If an error occurs during the data transfer, all This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
will say Unable to complete the phonebook cause undesired operation. ence to radio or television reception, which
import and then the system will return to
the main menu.
can be determined by turning the equipment
If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the CAUTION off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
voice guide will say There are no contacts Changes or modifications made to this correct the interference by one or more of the
on the connected phone. equipment not expressly approved by the following measures:
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
USB input terminal (if so equipped)

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the USB input terminal (if so
receiver is connected. equipped)
Consult the dealer or an experienced N00566701100
radio/TV technician for help.
You can connect your USB memory device or
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
complies with Canadian ICES-003. memory device or iPod.
This section explains how to connect and 5
remove a USB memory device or iPod.
Enrollment commands See the following section for details on how
N00566401080
to play music files.
3. Connect a commercially available USB
Refer to Listen to an iPod on page 7-33. connector cable (C) to the USB memory
Refer to Listen to Audio Files on a USB device (B).
Device on page 7-35.
Refer to To play iPod/USB memory device
tracks via voice operation on page 7-38.
*: iPod is a registered trademark of Apple

Inc. in the United States and other countries.
How to connect a USB memory

device
N00566801114
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn 4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- the USB input terminal (D).
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
the floor console box.

How to connect an iPod NOTE

N00566901102 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple
Inc.
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF. 4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in USB input terminal (D).
5 the floor console box.
CAUTION
Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of the floor console box could other-
wise cause injuries.
NOTE CAUTION
Do not connect the USB memory device to 3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the Keep the lid of the floor console box closed
the USB input terminal directly. iPod (B). while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
The USB memory device may be damaged. tents of the floor console box could other-
When closing the floor console box, be care- wise cause injuries.
ful not to trap the USB connector cable.
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn

NOTE
When closing the floor console box, be care-
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
ful not to trap the connector cable.
tion or put the operation mode in OFF
first and perform the installation steps in
reverse.


5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
For vehicles equipped with the Blue-
ignition switch to the LOCK position or site. Please read and agree to the Warning
put the operation mode in OFF first and tooth 2.0 interface about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com-
perform the installation steps in reverse. For details about the types of connectable panies. The websites mentioned above may
devices and supported file specifications, connect you to websites other than the Mit-
subishi Motors website.
Types of connectable devices refer to the following section.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
and supported file specifica- ucts/index.html
tions Device types 5
N00567001041
N00567101130 *: iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
Devices of the following types can be con- touch, and iPhone are registered trade-
Except for vehicles equipped with the marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and
nected.
Bluetooth 2.0 interface other countries.
Model name Condition
For details about the types of connectable
devices and supported file specifications, Storage capac- NOTE
refer to the following pages and manuals. USB memory device ity of 256 Depending on the type of the USB memory
Mbytes or more device or other device connected, the con-
[For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM nected device may not function properly or
Digital audio the available functions may be limited.
radio/CD player] Models other than USB
player support- It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
Refer to Listen to an iPod on page 7-33, memory devices and
ing mass stor- ware updated to the latest version.
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device on iPods
age class You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
page 7-35 and Audio Files
the USB input terminal when the ignition
(MP3/WMA/AAC) on page 7-20. switch or the operation mode is in ON or
For these connectable device types, iPod*,
ACC.
[For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi iPod classic*, iPod nano*, iPod touch*
Do not keep your USB memory device or
Multi-Communication System (MMCS)] and iPhone*, refer to the following web-
iPod in your vehicle.
Refer to the separate owners manual. site:
It is recommended that you back up the files
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] in case of data damage.
[For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
AUDIO] America website.
Refer to the separate owners manual. [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]

Sun visors
NOTE Sun visors Vanity mirror

Do not connect to the USB input terminal N00524601363
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
reader, etc.) other than the connectable front glare while driving. To reduce side visor.
devices specified in the previous section. glare, turn the visor to the side (2). Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will
The device and/or data may be damaged. If automatically turn on the mirror light (A).
any of these devices was connected by mis-
5 take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK position or putting the
operation mode in OFF.
File specifications
N00567201056
You can play music files of the following

specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
ory device or other device supporting mass
storage class. When you connect your iPod,
playable file specifications depend on the
connected iPod.
CAUTION
If the lid of vanity mirror with light is kept
Item Condition open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi-
MP3, WMA, AAC, cles battery will be discharged.
File format
WAV
Maximum number of
levels Level 8
(including the root)
Number of folders 700
Number of files 65,535

12 V power outlets
Card holder 12 V power outlets Type 1

N00525001625
Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on
Accessories can be operated when the igni-
the sun visor. CAUTION tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or
Be sure to use a plug-in type accessory ACC.
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
same time, make sure the total power con- Floor console 5
sumption of the electrical accessories does
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover or replace the
cap. This will prevent the power outlet from
becoming clogged and short circuiting.
To use a plug-in type accessory, open the

cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug Type 2
in the power outlet.
Accessories can be operated in all ignition
NOTE switch positions or all operation modes.
If your vehicle is equipped with two 12V
power outlets, they can be used simultane-
ously.

HomeLink Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
Floor console box WARNING NOTE

Do not use HomeLink with any garage You can program a maximum of 3 devices.
door opener that lacks safety stop and To change or replace any of the 3 devices
reverse features as required by U.S. Fed- after it has been initially programmed, you
eral Regulations. A garage door opener must first erase the current settings.
which cannot detect an object in the path See Cleaning the programmed information
of a closing garage door and then auto- on page 5-224 or Reprogramming a single
5 matically stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a
HomeLink button on page 5-224.
garage door opener without these features

increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
During programming, your garage door
HomeLink Wireless Con- or gate may open or close. Make sure that
trol System (if so equipped) people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate that you are programming.
N00554301040
HomeLink Wireless Control System is a

registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
NOTE
Once HomeLink is programmed, retain the
HomeLink provides a convenient way to 1- HomeLink button 1
original transmitter for future programming
replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency procedures (for example, new vehicle pur- 2- HomeLink button 2
(RF) transmitters used to activate devices chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro- 3- HomeLink button 3
such as gate operators, garage door openers, grammed HomeLink buttons should be
entry door locks, security systems, even home erased for security purposes. Refer to
lighting. Additional HomeLink information Cleaning the programmed information on
can be found at www.homelink.com, page 5-224.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the toll-free HomeLink-Hotline at 1-
800-355-3515.

Before programming Home-

Link
N00584600029
Some garage door openers manufactured

after 1995 have rolling code protection.
To program a garage door opener
equipped with rolling code protection;
you will need to access the garage door 5
opener motor to press the motors Learn
or Smart buttons. For convenience, use
a ladder and another person to assist you.
It is recommended that a new battery be NOTE NOTE
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the You do not need to continue holding the Some hand-held transmitters may actually
device being programmed to HomeLink HomeLink button. train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches
If the indicator light does not flash, refer to (15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have
for quicker training and accurate trans-
Cleaning the programmed information on difficulty with the programming process.
mission of the radio-frequency signal.
page 5-224.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
Programming a new Home- 2. Position the end of your hand-held trans- button while watching the indicator light
Link mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away (A). Continue pressing the button until the
indicator light (A) changes from slowly
from the HomeLink button while keep-
N00584700020
flashing orange to either rapidly flashing

To program HomeLink to operate a garage ing the indicator light in view.
green (rolling code) or continuously lit
door, gate, or entry door opener, home or
green (fixed code). Now you may release
office lighting, you need to be at the same
the hand-held transmitter button.
location as the device.
1. Press the HomeLink button that you

would like to program. The indicator light
(A) will flash orange slowly.


If the device does not operate, continue
NOTE NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace this
with Programming a new HomeLink In the event that there are still programming
steps 5 to 7 to complete the program- difficulties or questions, additional Home-
Programming a new HomeLink step 3
ming of a rolling code equipped device.
with procedures noted in the Gate operator / Link information and programming videos
Canadian programming section. If the indi- 5. At the garage door opener receiver can be found online at www.homelink.com,
cator light does not change to rapidly flash- (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
ing green or continuously lit green after Learn or Smart button. This can usu- calling the HomeLink Hotline.
5 performing these steps, contact HomeLink ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
at www.homelink.com
(see the garage door opener manual to
identify the Learn button.)
Gate operator/Canadian pro-
4. Press the HomeLink button that was just 6. Firmly press and release the Learn or gramming
programmed and observe the indicator Smart button. (The name and color of N00584800021
light. the button may vary by manufacturer.) Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
If the indicator light continuously illumi- There are typically 30 seconds to initiate mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
nates green, programming is complete step 7. several seconds of transmission - which may
and your device should operate when the 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, not be long enough for HomeLink to pick
HomeLink button is pressed and hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- up the signal during programming. Similar to
released. grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
If the indicator light rapidly flashes press/hold/release sequence a second are designed to time-out in the same man-
green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds time, and, depending on the brand of the ner.
and release the programmed HomeLink garage door opener (or other rolling code The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit-
button. Repeat the press/hold/release equipped device), repeat this sequence a ter will go off when the device times out indi-
sequence a second time, and, depending third time to complete the programming cating that it has finished transmitting.
on the brand of the garage door opener process. If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
(or other rolling code equipped device), HomeLink should now activate your culties programming a gate operator or
repeat this sequence a third time to com- rolling code equipped device. garage door opener by using the Program-
plete the programming process. At this ming procedures, replace Programming a
point if your device operates, program-
new HomeLink step 3 with the following:
ming is complete.


3. Once the door has stopped, press and
NOTE release the Learn or Smart button on
If programming a garage door opener or gate
the garage door opener (refer to your
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
garage door opener owners manual for
during the cycling process to prevent pos-
sible overheating. the location of the Learn button). Both
the HomeLink garage door operation
3. Press and release - every 2 seconds indicators will flash rapidly green upon
(cycle) your hand-held transmitter until the successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
5
HomeLink indicator light changes from
slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-
Operating HomeLink
green (fixed code). Now you may release the gramming the garage door opener (refer
N00585000020
hand-held transmitter button. To operate, simply press and release the pro-
Proceed with Programming a new Home- to Programming a new HomeLink
section), both garage door operation indi- grammed HomeLink button. Activation will
Link step 4 to complete. cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat- now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage
ing that the garage door feedback has door opener, gate operator, security system,
Additional steps for program- been enabled. entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
If the indicators do not flash, perform For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of
ming a door system with feed- the device may also be used at any time.
steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-
back
Link button up to the first 10 times after
N00584900022
successful programming. Garage door feedback
The HomeLink has the capability of receiv- 2. Press and release the programmed Home- N00585200022
ing garage door status from compatible Link button to activate the door. You The HomeLink has the capability of receiv-
garage door opener systems. Check your now have 1 minute in which to complete ing garage door status from compatible
garage door opener manual for the available step 3. garage door opener systems. Refer to Addi-
feature and HomeLink compatibility. Also tional steps for programming a door system
for a listing of compatible systems contact with feedback on page 5-223.
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com Garage door status is then displayed with
indicators (A).


The HomeLink has the capability of listen- 1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink
ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2 buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-
feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range cator will change from continuous yellow
may be reduced by obstacles such as houses to rapidly flashing green.
or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle 2. Release both buttons.
speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED
message feedback from the garage door NOTE
5 opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
from the door opener, both the UP and

3. HomeLink is now in the train (or learn-
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
ing) mode and can be programmed at any
The indicators will illuminate/blink in a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
time beginning with Programming a new
response to the following conditions: tion the door was last moving.
Recall of the door state after initial feedback HomeLink step 1.
: Blinking : Illuminates is possible by simultaneously pressing either
HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and Reprogramming a single
Garage door opener closing
(orange)
3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message HomeLink button
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow- N00585400024
Garage door opener closed ing the garage door status indication of the
(green) figure above. To reprogram a HomeLink button, complete
the following.
Out of range
(red) Clearing the programmed 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
information button. Do not release the button.
Garage door opener opening 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
(orange) N00585300023
To erase programming from the 3 buttons flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
Garage door opener opened (individual buttons cannot be erased but can Link button can be released at this point.
(green)
be reprogrammed as outlined below), fol- Proceed with Programming a new
Out of range low the steps noted: HomeLink step 2.
(red)

Interior lights
NOTE CAUTION Interior lights

If you do not complete the programming of a The transmitter has been tested and complies N00525301602
new device to the button, it will revert to the with FCC and IC rules.
previously stored programming. Changes or modifications not expressly NOTE
For questions or comments, visit approved by the party responsible for com- Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
www.homelink.com, pliance could void the users authority to with the engine off may run the battery
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by operate the device. down.
calling the HomeLink Hotline. Never leave the vehicle without checking 5
This equipment complies with FCC radiation that the light is off.
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
General information environment. End Users must follow the spe-
N00585600026 cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
Your HomeLink system operates on a radio
be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
and must not be co-located or operating in
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
conjunction with any other antenna or trans-
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
mitter.
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
The term IC: before the certification/regis-
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
tration number only signifies that Industry
RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules.
Canada technical specifications were met.
Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions. 1- Cargo room light P.5-227
2- Dome light (rear) P.5-226
This device may not cause harmful inter- 3- Dome light (front)/Reading lights
ference. P.5-226
This device must accept any interference 4- Downlight P.5-177
that may be received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.

Interior lights
The doors and the liftgate are closed Reading lights
Dome light (front)/Reading
and the power door lock function is
lights used to lock the doors.
N00537601165
Regardless of the dome light switch position,

N00525401469
The keyless entry system remote con-
when you press the lens (A), the light on the
trol transmitter is used to lock the
Dome light (front) side that is pressed illuminates; when you
doors.
press the lens (A) again, the light goes out.
In vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-
5 gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-
key.
NOTE
When the engine is started using the key
while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you
remove the key, the dome light will illumi-
nate for approximately 30 seconds then go
off.
1- (DOOR) When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are
When any of the doors or the liftgate is
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,
opened, the dome light illuminates; when the dome light will illuminate for approxi-
any of them are closed, the dome light mately 30 seconds and then go off.
Dome light (rear)
goes off after approximately 30 seconds. The time until the light goes off can be
N00525801245
However, the light goes off immediately adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
if: Motors dealer for details. For vehicles
The doors and the liftgate are closed equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
while the ignition switch is in the nication System, adjustments can be made
ON position or the operation mode using screen operations. For details, refer to
is in ON. the separate owners manual.
The drivers door is closed while the
its lock knob is in the lock position, 2- (OFF)
after all the other doors are closed. The dome light stays off regardless of any
door or the liftgate being opened or closed.

Interior lights
1- (ON) NOTE Cargo room light

The dome light illuminates regardless of When the engine is started using the key N00526101186
any door or the liftgate being opened or while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you
closed. remove the key, the dome light will illumi-
2- () nate for approximately 30 seconds then go
When any of the doors or the liftgate is off.
opened, the dome light illuminates; When the engine is started using the
when any of them are closed, the dome F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,
5
light goes off after approximately 30 sec-
the dome light will illuminate for approxi-
onds. However, the light goes off imme- mately 30 seconds and then go off.
diately if: When the dome light switch is in the ON
The door and the liftgate are closed position, the light will not go off, even when
while the ignition switch is in the all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
ON position or the operation mode The time until the light goes off can be 1- (ON)
is in ON. adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi The cargo room light illuminates regard-
The drivers door is closed while the Motors dealer for details. For vehicles less of the liftgate being opened or closed.
its lock knob is in the lock position, equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 2- ()
after all the other doors are closed. nication System, adjustments can be made
When the liftgate is opened, the cargo
The door and the liftgate are closed using screen operations. For details, refer to
room light illuminates; when it is closed,
the separate owners manual.
and the power door lock function is it goes out.
used to lock the doors. 3- (OFF) 3- (OFF)
The keyless entry system remote The dome light stays off regardless of any The cargo room light stays out regardless
control transmitter is used to lock the door or the liftgate being opened or closed. of the liftgate being opened or closed.
doors.
In vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift-
gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.-
key.

Storage spaces
Interior light auto-cutout func- Storage spaces

tion (dome light and other N00526401567
lights) CAUTION
N00526301449
Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
If interior lights are left on with the igni- or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
tion switch in the LOCK position or the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
operation mode in OFF, the lights go off
5 automatically after approximately 30 min-
become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
utes. unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
The lights come on again if the ignition may rupture. The heat may also deform or
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
1- Luggage floor box
switch or the engine switch is operated, if
tacle parts that are made of plastic. 2- Floor console box
any door or liftgate is opened or closed, or
Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while 3- Glove compartment
if the keyless entry or F.A.S.T.-key is
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a 4- Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)
operated.
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
during a sudden stop.
NOTE
The interior light auto-cutout function can be
deactivated. The time until the lights auto- NOTE
matically go off can be adjusted. See your Do not leave valuables in any storage space
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for when leaving the vehicle.
details.
For vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, adjustments
can be made using screen operations. For
details, refer to the separate owners manual.

Storage spaces
Glove compartment Card holder Floor console box

N00551501298 N00551601244
There is a card holder on the inside of the To open the console box, lift the release lever
WARNING glove compartment. (A) and raise the lid.
An open glove compartment door can
The floor console box can also be used as an
cause a serious injury or death to the front
arm rest.
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
5
when driving.
To open, pull the lever (A).
NOTE
When the lights are illuminated with the
light switch in the , or AUTO
position (vehicles with automatic light con-
trol), the glove compartment light illumi-
nates. B- Tissue holder
C- Pen holder
D- Tray

Storage spaces
The luggage floor board can be folded at the
NOTE indicated positions (A).
The USB input terminal is located in the
floor console box (if so equipped). For
details, refer to USB input terminal on
page 5-215.
5 Luggage floor box

N00552301046
There is a luggage floor box under the lug-

gage floor board. *: Front of the vehicle
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
4- Luggage floor board (front) 3. To access the center of the luggage floor
5 persons 5- Luggage floor board (rear) box (front), insert your hand in the gap
(C) and raise the board as illustrated.
To access the luggage floor box

(front)
1. Fold the second seatback forward.
Refer to Folding the second row seats
on page 4-13.
2. Insert your hand in the gap (B) and fold
the board as illustrated.
1- Luggage floor box (front)

2- Luggage floor box (center)
3- Luggage floor box (rear)

Storage spaces
To access the luggage floor box 7 persons CAUTION

(center) Do not use for storing objects heavier than
typical sunglasses.
1. Raise the luggage floor board (rear) by
There is risk that the holder lid will open
pulling up on the strap (D). accidentally, resulting in an injury due to
falling objects.
5
NOTE
Some types of sunglasses cannot fit snugly in
the holder.
Before storing, check the shape to make sure
they fit.
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

2. Insert your hand in the gap (E) and raise N00502601073
the board as illustrated. To open, push the lid.

Cup holders
Cup holders For the second row seat

N00527301417 N00537001185
The cup holder is designed for holding cups This cup holder is located in the second row
or drink-cans securely in its holes. seat arm rest.
Pull the arm rest down to use the cup holder.
For the front seat
5
The cup holder is located in front of the floor
console.
For the third row seat

N00532401038
The cup holder is located at the right side of

the third row seat.

Bottle holders
Bottle holders NOTE

N00527301420 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
CAUTION tles, etc.
Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
is distracting and can cause an accident.
Vibration and shaking while driving may
Cargo area cover (if so
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as equipped) 5
spilling hot beverages could cause burns. N00528301153
There are bottle holders located on both sides WARNING

of front and rear doors. For vehicles equipped with third row seat,
when the third row seat is in use, always
remove the cargo area cover to avoid seri-
ous injury or death at an accident.
2. Remove the cover from the mounting
grooves, and the cover will be rolled back
To use into the retracted position.
1. Pull out the spring-loaded cover and insert NOTE

it in the mounting grooves (A) on both Do not place anything on the cargo area
sides. cover.
NOTE
Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

2. After changing the position, gently shake
To change position the entire cargo area cover to make sure it
To remove
There are 2 installation holes (B) for the is securely retained. 1. Roll back the cargo area cover.
cargo area cover. 2. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the
NOTE inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove
If the second row seat touches the cargo area the cargo area cover.
cover, move the cargo area cover rearward.
5 The cargo area cover could be damaged if it
supports the seatback of the second row
seats.
1. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the

inside of the vehicle, and fit the protrud-
ing portion (D) into the installation hole
that is to be used. Move the opposite To refit
slider in the same fashion.
To refit the cargo area cover, follow the
removal steps in reverse. Gently shake the
entire cargo area cover after fitting it to make
sure it is securely retained.

Assist grips
To store (if so equipped) Assist grips Coat hooks

N00559001084 N00553601163
The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi- The assist grips (located above the doors on There is a coat hook on the second row seat
tion when not in use. the headliner) are not designed to support assist grip.
Raise the luggage floor board and store the body weight. They are intended for use only
cover. while seated in the vehicle.
5
WARNING
Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
NOTE CAUTION pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
On vehicles with premium sound system, Do not use the assist grips when getting into tain airbag was activated, any such item
you can not use this storing position. or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could could be propelled away with great force
detach causing you to fall. and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.

Luggage hooks
Luggage hooks
N00528501269
There are hooks on the sides of the luggage

area for use in securing luggage.
CAUTION
Do not load the luggage higher than the top
of the seatback.
Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious
accident.

BK0223400US.book 1
Driving safety
Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4 6
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
BK0223400US.book 2
Driving precaution
cle, always make certain that you and all your Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
Driving precaution passengers are properly wearing their seat lubricated according to the recommenda-
N00629300053
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro- tions in this manual.
priate restraints). Always keep your vehicle well main-
WARNING tained. A poorly maintained engine
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
wastes fuel and costs money.
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Fuel economy Never overload your vehicle.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive N00628801191
speed. Always buckle up.
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.
Driving, alcohol and drugs
6 Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
Your personal driving habits can have a sig-
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. N00628900049
and a narrower track, which enables them to Several recommendations for achieving the Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa- greatest fuel economy are listed below. causes of accidents.
tions. Because of the higher ground clear- Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of Whenever accelerating from a stop, even with blood alcohol levels far below the
gravity, which makes them handle differently always accelerate slowly and smoothly. legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave- When parked for even a short period, do dont drive. Ride with a designated non-
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or not idle the engine. Shut it off. drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
corner at the same speed on pavement as con- Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any stops. ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
more than low-slung sports cars are designed Keep your tires inflated to the recom- Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi- mended pressures. drugs affect your alertness, perception and
tions. When driving a 4-wheel drive vehicle on reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle highways or dry improved roads, set the pharmacist before driving while under the
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a drive mode to 4WD ECO or 4WD influence of any of these medications.
manner that might require sharp turns or AUTO (Electronically controlled 4WD),
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of or AWC ECO or NORMAL (S-
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor- AWC).
WARNING
rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
rollover. approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig- traffic, roadway and weather conditions impaired.
nificantly more likely to die than a person safely permit.
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi-
6-2 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 3
Floor mat
Floor mat WARNING

N00628600033 Never install a second mat over or under
an existing floor mat.
The original equipment floor mat provided
Do not use a floor mat designed for
with your vehicle was specifically designed
another model vehicle even if it is a Mit-
for your vehicle. subishi genuine floor mat.
Always properly position the floor mat and Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
assure it does not interfere with operation of lowing:
the pedals. Always use the retaining clip on Periodically check that the floor mat is
the drivers floorboard to secure the floor
mat. When used, this clip will help prevent
properly secured with the retaining clips. 6
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
the floor mat from moving forward and possi- ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
bly interfering with the operation of the ped- NOTE other reason, always check the condition
als. To prevent the floor mat from moving of the floor mat after it has been rein-
The shape of the mat and the number of
forward and possibly interfering with the stalled.
retaining clips may vary depending on the
operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine While the vehicle is stopped with the
vehicle model.
floor mats are recommended. engine off, check that the floor mat is not
interfering with the pedals by depressing
the pedals fully.
To install the floor mat WARNING
N00628700050
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the properly installed, it can interfere with the
operation of the pedals. Interference with
floorboard.
the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
2. Align the floor mat with the installation tion and/or increased stopping distances
holes over the retaining clips. resulting in a crash and injury. Always
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips. make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
Always use the retaining clip on the
drivers floorboard to secure the floor
mat.
Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down.
Driving safety 6-3

BK0223400US.book 4
Vehicle preparation before driving

signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
Vehicle preparation before Defrosters the instrument panel.
driving
Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
N00629001709
and set the blower switch on high. You should Fluid leaks
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
be able to feel the air blowing against the
check for the following:
windshield. Check the ground under the vehicle after
Refer to Defrosting or defogging (wind- parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
Seat belts and seats shield, door windows) on page 7-13 other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
6 Before starting the vehicle, make certain to find out why immediately and have it
that you and all passengers are seated and Tires fixed.
wearing their seat belts properly (with
children in the rear seat, in appropriate Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
restraints), and that all the doors and the uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, Safe driving techniques
liftgate are locked. glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look N00629201134
Move the drivers seat as far backward as for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check Even this vehicles safety equipment, and
possible, while keeping good visibility, the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
and good control of the steering wheel, (including spare tire) for proper pressure. can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check Replace your tires before they are heavily you give extra attention to the following
the instrument panel indicators and multi- worn out. areas, you can better protect yourself and
information display for any possible prob- As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- your passengers:
lem. sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
Similarly, the front passenger seat should damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,
also be moved as far back as possible. when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
Make sure that infants and small children replacement should, only, be performed by an of stopping distance between your vehicle
are properly restrained in accordance with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead.
all laws and regulations. Before changing lanes, check your mir-
rors, blind spots, and use your turn-signal
Lights light.
While driving, watch the behavior of
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
6-4 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 5
Driving during cold weather

Always obey applicable laws and regula- Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
When brakes are wet
leave room for unexpected events, such as time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
sudden braking. drive your vehicle slowly. Check the brake system while driving at a
If you plan to drive in another country, Stay at low speeds at first so that the low speed immediately after starting, espe-
obey their vehicle registration laws and transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
make sure you will be able to get the right have time to spread to all lubrication they work normally.
fuel. points. A film of water can be formed on the brake
Check the engine antifreeze. discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
Driving during cold weather If there is not enough coolant because of a
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
6
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit-
N00629400445
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
Check the battery. At the same time, depressing the brake pedal.
Coolant Premium or equivalent.
check the terminals and wiring. During
Please read this section in conjunction
extremely cold weather, the battery will
with the Engine coolant on page 9-8. When driving in cold weather
not be as strong. Also, the battery power
level may drop because more power is

WARNING On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking

used for cold starting and driving.
Never open the radiator cap when the
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if system, making the brakes less effective.
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
the engine runs at the proper speed and if burned. While driving in such conditions, pay close
the headlights are as bright as normally. attention to surrounding vehicles and to the
Charge or replace the battery if necessary. condition of the road surface. From time to
During extreme cold weather, it is possi- time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
ble that a very low battery could freeze.
Braking check how effective the brakes are.
N00629501528

WARNING All the parts of the brake system are critical

When driving downhill
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tery to explode, which could cause serious repair facility of your choice at regular inter- It is important to take advantage of the engine
injury or death. vals according to the WARRANTY AND braking by downshifting while driving on
Always wear protective clothes and a face MAINTENANCE MANUAL. steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
mask when working with your battery, or brakes from overheating.
let a skilled mechanic do it.
Driving safety 6-5

BK0223400US.book 6
Parking
Parking WARNING Do not keep the steering wheel

N00629601330 Leaving the engine running risks injury or fully turned for a long time
death from accidentally moving the selec-
tor lever or the accumulation of toxic
Parking on a hill exhaust fumes in the passenger compart- Move effort could be required to turn the
ment. steering wheel.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, Refer to Electric power steering system
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a (EPS) on page 5-93.
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. Where you park
6 If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
Loading information
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
Your front bumper can be damaged if you N00629900352
when parked and that the selector lever is in
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. It is very important to know how much
the P (PARK) position.
Be careful when traveling up or down steep weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
When parking on a hill, it is important to set
slopes where your bumper can scrape the called the vehicle capacity weight and
the parking brake before moving the selector
road. includes the weight of all occupants, cargo
lever to the P (PARK) position. This pre-
vents loading the parking brake against the (including the roof load), non-factory-
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to WARNING installed options, and the tongue weight of
move the selector lever out of the P Do not park your vehicle in areas where the trailer, if any, being towed. The tire and
(PARK) position. combustible materials such as dry grass or loading information placard located on the
leaves can come in contact with a hot drivers door sill of your vehicle will show
exhaust, since a fire could occur. how much weight it may properly carry.
Parking with the engine run-
ning WARNING
When leaving the vehicle Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
Never leave the engine running while you can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the Always remove the key from the ignition vehicle performance, including handling
engine running in a closed or poorly venti- switch and lock all doors and the liftgate and braking, cause tire failure, and result
lated place. when leaving the vehicle unattended. in an accident.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area. It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
6-6 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 7
Loading information
Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load Production options weight: the combined
on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
individual tire that is determined by dis- ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
tributing to each axle its share of the curb rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
weight, accessory weight, and normal Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupant weight and dividing by two. *times the number of specified occupants 6
Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum (3 in the case of your vehicle)
of - Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- This placard shows the maximum number of
(a) Curb weight; tion within the passenger compartment (In occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
(b) Accessory weight; your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, well as the combined weight of occupants
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and 1 in second row seat) and cargo (A), which is called the vehicle
(d) Production options weight. capacity weight. The weight of any non-fac-
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- tory installed options, as well as the tongue
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
cle with standard equipment including the weight of a trailer being towed and roof load
regulations.
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- is included in the definition of cargo when
ant. determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
Accessory weight: the combined weight placard also tells you the size and recom-
(in excess of those standard items which Tire and loading information mended inflation pressure for the original
may be replaced) of automatic transmis- placard equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
sion, power steering, power brakes, power N00630101407 information, refer to Tires on page 9-15.
windows, power seats, radio, and heater,
to the extent that these items are available The tire and loading information placard is
as factory- installed equipment (whether located on the inside sill of the drivers door.
installed or not).
Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)
*times the vehicles designated seating
capacity.
Driving safety 6-7

BK0223400US.book 8
Loading information
Type 1 5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201222
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
Type 2 cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the XXX amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 9
Loading information
NOTE
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWRs, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the Specifications section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

BK0223400US.book 10
Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700435 To reduce the risk of serious injury or Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
N00630301092
Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to Tire and load-
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard on page 11-3
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion. Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label located if you suddenly have to brake can cause a For additional information, refer to
on the inside sill of the drivers door as the serious accident or injury or death. Maximum roof load on page 11-5.
guide for passengers and/or cargo weight. Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
(Except for Vehicles for Mexico) your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630401123 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicles center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 11
Trailer towing
CAUTION Trailer towing

Before driving and after traveling a short dis- N00629801329
tance, always check the load to make sure it
Towing a trailer will adversely affect your
is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
vehicles handling, performance, braking,
the load remains secure. If the load is not durability and driving economy (fuel con-
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and sumption, etc.).
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre- If you do tow a trailer with this vehicle, be
ate a road hazard. sure to use proper equipment and cautious
steering and braking for safe driving. 6
NOTE Section CAUTION
To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
Do not lose control of your vehicle when
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
towing a trailer.
use.
Always use proper equipment.
Before using an automatic car wash, check
Always drive carefully
with the attendant to determine if the roof
carrier should be removed. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper
equipment or driving is not covered by your
warranty.
Roof carrier mounting bracket *: Front of the vehicle

cover (if so equipped)
N00630601112
To install the covers

When installing the roof carrier, use the pro-
vided brackets.
Install the covers by performing the removal
The brackets are located under each cover.
step in reverse.
To remove the covers

1. Slide each cover (A) toward the front of
the vehicle.
2. Lift the front edge of the cover (A).
Driving safety 6-11
BK0223400US.book 12
Trailer towing
Weight limits Maximum trailer weight Tongue weight

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight, The tongue weight of any trailer is important
Recommendations for towing up to this limit
maximum trailer weight (A), maximum because it affects the vehicle capacity weight.
are as follows.
tongue weight (B) and Gross Axle Weight The vehicle capacity weight includes any
Rating (GAWR). cargo you may carry, and the people who will
Models Maximum trailer weight
be riding in the vehicle. If you will tow a
With brake 1,500 lbs. (680 trailer, you must include the tongue weight of
kg) the trailer in your calculation of the vehicle
2.4 liter models
6 Without brake 1,250 lbs. capacity weight. For more information
(567 kg) regarding vehicle capacity weight, refer to
With brake 3,500 lbs. Tire and loading information placard on
(1,588 kg) page 6-7.
3.0 liter models Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight
Without brake 1,400 lbs.
(635 kg) for your vehicle.
Models Maximum tongue weight

With brake 150 lbs. (68
kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 2.4 liter models
Without brake 125 lbs. (57
kg)
The vehicle capacity weight is printed on the
With brake 350 lbs. (159
tire and loading information placard as com-
kg)
bined weight of occupants and cargo. 3.0 liter models
Without brake 140 lbs. (64
The weight includes the weight of all occu-
kg)
pants and the total weight it can carry.
For more information, refer to Tire and load-
ing information placard on page 6-7. After youve loaded your trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see
if the weights are proper.
Keep the trailer tongue load at 10% of the
loaded trailer weight for dead weight hitches.
6-12 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 13
Trailer towing
Tongue loads can be adjusted by proper dis-
tribution of the load in the trailer. This can be
NOTE Maintenance when trailer tow-
checked by separately weighing the loaded Mitsubishi Motors recommends that sway ing
control be used whenever you are towing, to
trailer and then the tongue.
improve towing stability.
For further information, please contact your Your vehicle will need service more often
Gross axle weight rating (GAWR) authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. when youre towing a trailer. Refer to WAR-
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
UAL. Especially important in trailer
The GAWRs are printed on the certification
Safety chains operation are manual transaxle oil, automatic
label which is riveted on the door sill on the
drivers side.
transaxle fluid, engine oil, rear axle oil, belt, 6
cooling system and brake system. Each of
Refer to Vehicle labeling on page 11-2. A safety chain must always be used between these is covered in this manual.
the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave suf- For details, please refer to the Vehicle care
Trailer hitches ficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain and maintenance section.
should cross under the trailer tongue to pre- Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
vent the tongue from dropping to the ground and bolts are tight.
Choose a proper hitch and ball, and make in case it becomes damaged or separated.
sure it is installed at a height that is compati- For correct safety chain procedures, consult
ble with the trailer. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Trailer brakes
Use a good equalizing hitch which uniformly
distributes the trailer tongue load throughout
the frame. CAUTION Mitsubishi Motors recommends that any
Never tow a trailer without using a safety trailer having a total weight of 1,250 lbs (567
chain securely attached to both the trailer kg) or more (2400 models), 1,400 lbs (635
WARNING and the vehicle. If the coupling unit or hitch kg) or more (3000 models) be equipped with
If you make any holes in the body of your ball experiences a problem, the trailer may its own electric or surge-type brakes.
vehicle for installing a trailer hitch, be separate from your vehicle.
sure to seal the holes later when you If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are
remove the hitch. If you dont seal them, electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your into your vehicles hydraulic system. No mat-
exhaust can enter your vehicle. Refer to ter how successful it may seem, any attempt
Exhaust system on page 9-24.
to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles
hydraulic system will lower braking effec-
tiveness and create a potential hazard.
Driving safety 6-13

BK0223400US.book 14
Trailer towing
yourself with the feel of handling and braking
Trailer lights Operating hints with the added weight of the trailer. Always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving
Trailer lights and equipment must comply is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
with federal, state, and local regulations.
WARNING
responsive as your vehicle is without a trailer.
If you have a rear window open and you
Check with your local recreational vehicle
tow a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
dealer for the requirements in your area, and
use only equipment designed for your vehi-
monoxide gas which you cannot see or Vehicle preparation
smell could come into your vehicle. It can
cle. cause unconsciousness or death. Refer to
Before you start, check the trailer hitch,
6 Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type
Exhaust system on page 9-24.
To maximize your safety when towing a safety chains, tires and mirror adjustment.
and brand, you should have a qualified tech- trailer:
nician install a suitable connector between the Have your exhaust system inspected for
vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or leaks, and make necessary repairs before
Tire
installation can cause damage to your vehi- starting on your trip.
cles electrical system and affect your vehicle Keep the rear windows closed. Be sure your vehicles tires are inflated to the
warranty. If exhaust does come into your vehicle cold inflation pressure listed in the manual.
through a window or another opening, Youll find these numbers on the tire and
drive with your front, main heating or loading information placard at the sill of the
Additional trailer equipment cooling system on and with the blower on drivers door.
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside Refer to Tire inflation pressures on page
Many states and Canadian provinces require air into your vehicle. Do not use recircula- 9-18.
special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. tion because it only recirculates the air
Even if not required, you should install spe- inside your vehicle. Refer to Air selection
switch on page 7-9.
cial mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind
you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Following distance
Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any Driver preparation Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle
other items are recommended or required for ahead as you would when driving your vehi-
your towing situation. Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of cle without a trailer. This can help you avoid
experience. situations that require heavy braking and sud-
Before setting out for the open road, youll den turns.
want to get to know your trailer. Acquaint
6-14 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 15
Trailer towing
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal If the engine coolant temperature indica-
Passing well in advance. tor flashes on the information screen in
the multi-information display or the
Youll need more passing distance up ahead
when youre towing a trailer. And, because Overheating engine power drops suddenly, refer to
Engine overheating on page 8-4.
youre a good deal longer, youll need to go
much farther beyond the passed vehicle Towing a trailer puts additional burden on the If the warning display or warning
before you can return to your lane. engine and transaxle, which may cause over- display illuminates, refer to Warning dis-
heating. Following are some suggestions to play on page 5-66, 5-74.
reduce overheating:
Backing up 6
Cause of overheating Solution
Driving on hills
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with Air conditioning on Turn off
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, Highway speeds Reduce speed Reduce speed and downshift before you start
just move that hand to the left. To move the Going up hills Select lower gear posi- down a long or steep downgrade. If you dont
trailer to the right, move your hand to the tion downshift, over using the brakes can cause
right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, Stop-and-go city traf- With the vehicle reduced brake efficiency.
have someone guide you. fic stopped, shift to the
You can tow in D (DRIVE) position. You
N (NEUTRAL)
may want to shift the selector lever to the 3rd
Making turns position and idle the
or a lower position, under heavy loads or hilly
engine at high idle.
conditions.
CAUTION When towing at high altitudes, engine coolant

Making sharp turns while towing a trailer and automatic transaxle oil will overheat at a Parking
could cause the trailer to come in contact lower temperature than at normal altitudes.
with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be dam- If you turn your engine off immediately after Always place chocks or blocks under both the
aged. Avoid making sharp turns while tow- towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Be
ing a trailer. your vehicle may show signs similar to over- sure that the parking brake is firmly set and
heating. To avoid this, let the engine run that the selector lever is in the P (PARK)
When youre turning with a trailer, make while parked (preferably on level ground) position. Avoid parking on a hill with a
wider than normal turns to help prevent the with the automatic transaxle in the P trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only
trailer from striking shoulders, curbs, road (PARK) position for a few minutes before after performing the following:
signs, trees or other objects. turning the engine off.
Driving safety 6-15
BK0223400US.book 16
Trailer towing
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place chocks or blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks or blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
chocks or blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Set the selector lever to the P (PARK)
position and turn off the engine.
6 When restarting out after parking on a hill:
1. Check that the selector lever is set to the

P (PARK) position.
2. Start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake
pedal depressed.
3. Set the selector lever to the D (DRIVE)
position or R (REVERSE) position.
4. Release the parking brake and brake pedal
and slowly pull or back away from the
chocks or blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
5. Have someone retrieve the chocks or
blocks.
6-16 Driving safety

BK0223400US.book 1
Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Automatic climate control air conditioner .......................................7-5
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-14
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-15
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-15
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-18
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-20
7
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-24
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-24
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-28
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-29
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-31
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-32
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-33
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-35
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation
(vehicles with Bluetooth 2.0 interface) ...................................7-38
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-41
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-43
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-44
System Settings ..............................................................................7-45
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-49
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-51
Clock (if so equipped) ....................................................................7-51
General information about your radio ...........................................7-52
BK0223400US.book 2
Vents
Vents Air flow and direction adjust- Passengers vents

N00729901288 ments
N00730201340 Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
To close the vent, fully move the knob (A) to
Drivers vents the left side.
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

To close the vent, fully move the knob (A) to
the outer side.
7
1- Drivers vents
2- Passengers vents
1- Close
2- Open
NOTE
1- Close
On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
2- Open air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
due to only moist air cooling suddenly and it
does not indicate a problem.
Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
7-2 Comfort controls

BK0223400US.book 3
Vents
Changing the mode selection Foot/Face position Foot position

N00736401605
To change the position and amount of air Air flows to the upper part of the passenger Air flows mainly to the leg area.
flowing from the vents, press the MODE compartment, and flows to the leg area.
switch or defogger switch. Refer to MODE
switch on page 7-9, Defogger switch on
page 7-9.
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents 7
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
NOTE
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen- The foot/face air flow ratio can be adjusted
ger compartment. with the mode selection in the posi-
tion.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Comfort controls 7-3

BK0223400US.book 4
Vents
Foot/Defroster position Defroster position
Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
the door windows. door windows.
NOTE
The foot/defroster air flow ratio can be
adjusted with the mode selection in the
position.
For further information, we recommend you
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

BK0223400US.book 5
Automatic climate control air conditioner

N00731501311
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
N00711801637
Automatic climate control air conditioner - Type 1
1- Temperature control switch 9- OFF switch

2- Air conditioning switch 10- Temperature display P.7-7
3- MODE switch 11- Air conditioning indicator
4- Blower speed selection switch 12- Mode selection display
5- Air selection switch 13- Blower speed display
6- Defogger switch
7- AUTO switch
8- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-190

BK0223400US.book 6
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioner - Type 2
1- Drivers side temperature control 14- Passengers side temperature display

P.7-7
NOTE
switch There is an interior air temperature sensor
2- Air conditioning switch 15- Air conditioning indicator
(A) in the illustrated position.
3- Blower speed selection switch 16- Blower speed display Never place anything over the sensor, since
4- MODE switch doing so will prevent it from functioning
5- Passengers side temperature control properly.
switch
6- Air selection switch
7- Defogger switch
8- AUTO switch
9- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-190
10- OFF switch
11- Drivers side temperature display
P.7-7
12- DUAL indicator
13- Mode selection display

BK0223400US.book 7
NOTE Blower speed selection switch Temperature control switch

Since the air conditioning operation is con- N00736901192 N00737001334
trolled while the ECO mode is operating, Press of the blower speed selection Press or of the temperature control
you may feel that effectiveness of the air
switch to increase the blower speed. switch to the desired temperature.
conditioner is insufficient.
ECO mode switch P.5-184 Press of the blower speed selection The selected temperature will be shown in the
Even during ECO mode operation, you can switch to decrease the blower speed. display (A).
select normal operation of the air condi- The selected blower speed will be shown in
tioner. the display (A).
Type 1
can be used to change the setting. Refer to 7
In extreme cold, the air conditioning control
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This
does not indicate a problem.
It will disappear when the vehicle interior
temperature rises to a normal temperature.
Type 2
NOTE
The temperature value of air conditioner is
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
ature display unit of the multi information
display.
1- Increase On vehicles equipped with multi information
2- Decrease display - Type 1, refer to Changing the tem-
perature unit on page 5-143.
On vehicles equipped with multi information
display - Type 2, refer to Changing the tem-
perature unit on page 5-153.

BK0223400US.book 8

air conditioning switch to match your per- If the drivers side temperature control
NOTE sonal preferences. switch is pressed, the passengers side
When the engine coolant temperature is low,
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a temperature will also be controlled to the
the air temperature from the heater will be
repair facility of your choice for assistance. same setting temperature as the drivers
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if
you have selected warm air with the switch. Refer to Personalizing the air conditioning side.
To prevent the windshield and windows from switch (Changing the function setting) on Dual mode
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to page7-11. If the passengers side temperature con-
and the blower speed will be reduced Refer to Personalizing the air selection trol switch is pressed under synchronized
while the system is operating in the AUTO (Changing the function setting) on mode, the system will switch to dual
mode. page7-10. mode. In dual mode, the drivers side and
When you feel that it is hotter or colder than the passengers side temperature can be
7 the set temperature, you may adjust it to your
Synchronized mode and dual mode set separately by using each temperature
preference. control switch.
(if so equipped)
For further information, we recommend you Press the AUTO switch to return to syn-
chronized mode.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. The drivers side and the passengers side
When the temperature is set to the highest or temperature can be controlled independently.
the lowest setting, the air selection and the At this time, the DUAL indicator will be
air conditioner will be automatically changed shown in the display (A).
as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioner will stop.
Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioner will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You Synchronized mode

can personalize the air selection switch and

BK0223400US.book 9
Mode switch Defogger switch NOTE

N00737101221 N00703401038 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
To change the amount of air flowing from the When this switch is pressed, the mode conditioning system automatically operates
vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the changes to the mode and the blower and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes air) is selected. This automatic switching
speed will be set at the maximum automati-
control is carried out to prevent misting of
to the next one in the following sequence: cally. The indicator light (A) will come on
the windows even if Disable automatic air
and the mode is shown in the display conditioning control or Disable automatic
. The selected mode is shown in the dis- (B). air selection control is set. Refer to Person-
play (A). Refer to Changing the mode selec- alizing the air conditioning switch (Changing
tion on page 7-3. the function setting) on page 7-11, Person-
Type 1
alizing the air selection (Changing the func-
tion setting) on page 7-10.
7
Type 1
The indicator light (A) will go off when
adjusting the blower speed.
Type 2 Air selection switch

N00737201378
Type 2 Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, simply press the

air selection switch.
Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}

Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.

BK0223400US.book 10

When the setting has changed from
NOTE enabled to disabled, the system will beep
When the engine coolant temperature rises to
three times and the indicator light will
a certain level, the air selection is automati-
flash three times.
cally switched to the recirculation position
and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this When the setting has changed from dis-
time, the system will not switch to the out- abled to enabled, the system will beep
side position even if the air selection switch two times and the indicator light will
is pushed. flash three times.
Personalizing the air selection Multi-Communication System, screen
operations can also be used to change the
(Changing the function setting)
7 When the air conditioning turns on, the air N00712300036 setting. Refer to the separate owners
selection is controlled automatically. When manual for details.
You can change the following functions to
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection match your preference.
automatically goes back to the outside posi- NOTE
tion. Enable automatic air selection control: The factory setting is Enable automatic air
If high cooling performance is desired, or if When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection control.
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in selection switch will also be automatically When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
some way, use the recirculation position. controlled. selection will automatically change to the
Switch to the outside position every now and outside air position, even if the system is set
then to keep the windows from fogging up. Disable automatic air selection control: to Disable automatic air selection control,
Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, in order to prevent windows from fogging
the air selection switch will not be auto- up.
CAUTION matically controlled.
Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up. Changing the settings Air conditioning switch
Press the air selection switch for approxi- N00737301353
mately 10 seconds or longer.
NOTE When the setting has changed, the system
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
If the mode selection is set position, will beep and the indicator light will flash. compressor will turn on. The indicator
you cannot turn the air conditioner off or will be shown in the display (A).
select the recirculation position.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.

BK0223400US.book 11

When the setting has changed, the system
NOTE will beep and the indicator light will flash.
For example, sometimes after using a high-
When the setting has changed from
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
and the indicator blinks temporarily. three times and the indicator light will
Wait for a while, press the air conditioning
flash three times.
switch once to turn the system off, then once
more to turn it back on. Once the water evap-
When the setting has changed from dis-
orates, the blinking will stop. abled to enabled, the system will beep
two times and the indicator light will
flash three times.
Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function set- Multi-Communication System, screen 7
Push the switch again and the air condition-
ting) operations can also be used to change the
ing compressor will stop and the indicator N00712200022
goes off. setting. Refer to the separate owners
You can change the following functions to manual for details.
match your preference.
CAUTION
Using the air conditioning slightly increases Enable automatic air conditioning control: NOTE
the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure When the AUTO switch is pressed, or The factory setting is Enable automatic air
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when when the temperature control switch has conditioning control.
shifting the transaxle into drive. been set to the minimum temperature, the When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
air conditioning switch is automatically conditioner will run automatically, even if
controlled. the system is set to Disable automatic air
NOTE conditioning control, in order to prevent
If a problem is detected in the air condition- Disable automatic air conditioning con- windows from fogging up.
ing compressor, the indicator blinks. trol:
Press the air conditioning switch once to turn The air conditioning switch is not auto-
it off, then once more to turn it back on. If matically controlled, unless the air condi- AUTO switch
the indicator does not blink, there is no tioning switch is used. N00703501042
problem. If it does blink, have it checked at When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Changing the settings cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec-
repair facility of your choice. Press the air conditioning switch for about tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/
10 seconds or longer. outside air selection, temperature adjustment,

BK0223400US.book 12

and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all
OFF switch Operating the air conditioning
controlled automatically. The selected mode
and the blower speed are not shown in the
N00703601027
system (automatic mode)
display. Push the switch to turn off the air condition- N00731701443
ing system.
In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Push the AUTO switch.

2. Set the temperature control switch to the
desired temperature. The temperature can
be set within a range of around 61 (LO) to
89 (HI) (when the outside temperature
unit of the multi-information display
shows F) or 17 (LO) to 31 (HI) (when the
outside temperature unit of the multi-
information display shows C).
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment, and ON/OFF
of air conditioner will be controlled automati-
cally.

BK0223400US.book 13
NOTE Defrosting or defogging (wind- Type 1

Set the temperature at about 75 (when the shield, door windows)
outside temperature unit of the multi-infor- N00732401506
mation display shows F) or 24 (when the
outside temperature unit of the multi-infor- CAUTION
mation display shows C) under normal con- For safety, make sure you have a clear view
ditions. through all the windows.
When the engine coolant temperature is low, Type 2
the air temperature from the heater will be
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if To remove frost or mist from the windshield
you have selected warm air with the temper- and door windows, use the MODE switch or
ature switch. To prevent the windshield and defogger switch ( or ). 7
windows from fogging up, the vent mode
will be changed to and the blower For ordinary defrosting
speed will be reduced.
Use this setting to keep the windshield and 1. Set the air selection switch to the outside
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the position.
Operating the air conditioning leg area heated (when driving in rain or 2. Set the MODE switch to the posi-
system (manual mode) snow). tion.
N00731801125 3. Select your desired blower speed by
pressing the blower speed selection
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
switch.
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
4. Select your desired temperature by press-
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
ing the temperature control switch.
desired positions. To return to automatic
5. Push the air conditioning switch.
operation, press the AUTO switch.

BK0223400US.book 14
Important air conditioning operating tips
For quick defrosting NOTE Air conditioning system refrig-

To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the erant and lubricant recommen-
Type 1 side vents toward the door windows.
When defrosting, do not set the temperature
dations
to the maximum cool position. This will
blow cool air on the window glass and fog it If the air conditioner seems less effective than
up. usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak.
Have the system inspected by your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
Type 2
Important air conditioning of your choice.
operating tips
7 N00733701346
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

CAUTION
The air conditioning system in your vehicle
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
vehicle interior extremely hot which then 134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56.
requires more time to cool. If it is neces- Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
sary to park in the sun, open the windows cause severe damage and may require replac-
1. Push the defogger switch.
for the first few minutes of air conditioning your vehicles entire air conditioning
2. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
ing to expel the hot air. system.
tion.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
when the air conditioner is in use. The sphere is not recommended.
NOTE entry of outside air through open windows The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-
will reduce cooling efficiency. cle is designed not to harm the earths ozone
While the indicator light is on, the air layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
conditioning compressor will run automati- 3. When running the air conditioner, make
global warming.
cally. The outside air position will also be sure the air intake, which is located in It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
selected and the blower speed will be set at front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- saved and recycled for future use.
the maximum automatically. tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
If the indicator light is on, you cannot the air-intake chamber may reduce air
turn the air conditioner off or select the recir- flow and plug the water drains.
culation position. This prevents the windows
from fogging up.

BK0223400US.book 15
Air purifier
During a long period of disuse AM/FM radio/CD player (if NOTE

If foreign objects or water get into the audio
so equipped)
The air conditioner should be operated for at equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
N00734302102
comes from it, immediately turn off the
least five minutes each week, even in cold
audio system and have it checked at an
weather. This includes the quick defrosting The audio system can only be used when the
mode. Operating the air condition system ignition switch or the operation mode is in repair facility of your choice. Never try to
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres- ON or ACC. repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioner tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
in the best operating condition. NOTE son.
To listen to the audio system while the If the audio system is damaged by foreign
Air purifier engine is not running, turn the ignition objects, water, or fire, have the system 7
switch to the ACC position or put the oper- checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
N00733801190
ation mode in ACC. technician.
The air conditioning system is equipped with If the ignition switch or the operation mode
an air filter to remove pollen and dust. is left in ACC, the accessory power will Important Points on Usage
The air filters ability to collect pollen and automatically turn off after a certain period
N00715000021
dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace of time and you will no longer be able to use
it periodically. For the maintenance interval, the audio system. The accessory power
refer to the WARRANTY AND MAINTE- comes on again if the ignition switch or the iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if
engine switch is operated with it in the so equipped)
NANCE MANUAL.
ACC position. Refer to ACC power auto-
cutout function on page 5-19 and 5-60. This product supports audio playback
NOTE If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif-
Operation in certain conditions such as driv- it may create noise in the audio equipment.
fering versions mean that playback cannot
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the This does not mean that anything is wrong
be guaranteed.
air conditioner can lead to reduction of ser- with your audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far away Please be aware that depending on the
vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
air flow is lower than normal or when the as possible from the audio equipment. iPod/iPhone model or version, operation
windshield or windows start to fog up easily, may differ.
replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

BK0223400US.book 16
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)

Apple is not responsible for the operation
How to Clean of this device or its compliance with
N00715200023
safety and regulatory standards.
If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
soft cloth.
If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in NOTE
neutral detergent diluted in water, and iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin- users to privately reproduce and play back
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may non- copyrighted material as well as material
harm the surface. that may be legally copied and reproduced.
Infringement of copyright is prohibited.
For vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface,
7 Trademarks the types of devices that can be connected
N00715300053 may vary.
Product names and other proper names [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
are the trademarks or registered trade- For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
marks of their respective owners. North America website.
Furthermore, even if there is no specific [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
denotation of trademarks or registered For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
trademarks, these are to be observed in website. Please read and agree to the Warn-
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other
their entirety.
Companies. The websites mentioned above
may connect you to websites other than the
Mitsubishi Motors website.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
ucts/index.html
Made for iPod, Made for iPhone
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

BK0223400US.book 17
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)
5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

BK0223400US.book 18
Handling of Discs
4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB
N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

BK0223400US.book 19
Handling of Discs
If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent 7
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center. Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back 3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500026 Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

BK0223400US.book 20
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

Discs that have not been finalized cannot There may be noise during playback.
be played back. There may be jumping in the audio.
CAUTION
CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
Even if recorded using the correct format The disc may not be recognized.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application The first track may not be played back.
Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc It may take longer than usual until start
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or condensation on the lens inside the Playback may start from within the net or other means to servers is an infringe-
product may render the disc unplayable. track. ment of the law.
Depending on the disc, some functions Some parts may not be played back. Do not append the file extensions .mp3,
may not be used, or the disc may not play Tracks may freeze during playback. .wma, or .m4a, to other than
back. Tracks may be displayed erroneously. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
7 Do not use discs with cracks or warps. discs with these types of files recorded upon
If the disc has stickers affixed, remains them may cause the files to be incorrectly
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files identified for playback, which may lead to
sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC) loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
accident.
Discs that have decorative labels or stick- N00715600027
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, NOTE
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices. Depending on the condition of the disc
recorder or recording software used, correct
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media playback may not be possible. In these cases,
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following refer to the user manual for your product or
regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format software.
audio files on discs or USB devices. Depending on your computers operating
Ensure that you use discs with on the Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- system, version, software, or settings, files
label surface. als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing may not have a file extension appended. In
Playback of other than standard CDs is software, and ensure these are used correctly. these cases, append the file extensions
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files .mp3, .wma, or .m4a when copying
includes title information or other data, then the files.
played back, the audio quality cannot be
this can be displayed. Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
guaranteed.
played back.
When playing back other than standard
CDs, the following may occur.

BK0223400US.book 21
Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700028
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric
WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, _
7
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
Folder Structure exten- 64 characters
N00715800029 sion can be used.
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. Multises- Not supported (only first session
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - sion supported)
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum level)
number
of levels
Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
mum
folder
number

BK0223400US.book 22

Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900020 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
Motion Picture Experts Group, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
7 name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate)
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Monaural
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
1:Do not include other than tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. played are as below.

BK0223400US.book 23
What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000028 Specification Windows Media Audio AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
Be Played Back
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma 7
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
Pro, Lossless, and Voice are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100029
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural

BK0223400US.book 24
Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a The driver should not perform compli- During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations. Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
7 This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han- Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi Operation Keys
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your N00716300021
This may prevent the driver looking choice.

where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result Turn the Power ON/ OFF
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
N00716400048
Do not disassemble or modify the product.
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

BK0223400US.book 25
Operation Keys
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
AFA109400 AFA109413
Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the 7
from the previous status. increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power OFF. 2. Press the key.
NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
NOTE The maximum value for volume is 45, and so remove the disc.
Hold down the steering MODE key to also
the minimum is 0.
turn the audio function ON/OFF.
The initial setting for volume is 17. CAUTION
When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs ping is permitted.
N00716500049
N00716600024 Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. injury, smoking, or fire.
label surface up.
3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

BK0223400US.book 26
Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700070
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- CAT key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. CAT (category content) searches and
6- PWR/VOL key scans can be performed while receiving
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power radio RBDS broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
8- INFO key radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
Switch the content of the display. 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
For audio, play repeat playback; for 12- PAGE key
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

BK0223400US.book 27
Operation Keys
13- 5 key 3- MODE key
Steering wheel audio remote
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use Hold down to turn the audio function
control switch ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
as preset key 5 for radio. N00716800042
pressed, this switches the audio source.
14- 6 key
The order of switching is as shown
Return during audio track search, and
below.
stop Bluetooth Audio*2. If devices are not connected, then these
For radio, use as preset key 6. are to be skipped, and the next source
15- key/ key selected.
For audio, select audio track/file; for
radio, perform automatic station selec-
tion. CD or MP3 7
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. 1
iPod* or USB device
16- MENU key
Bluetooth Audio*2
Switch to Menu mode. 1- Vol + key, - key
Adjust audio functions and the mobile AM
17- /SEL key
Adjust audio quality and select items. phone function volume. FM1, 2
For radio, manually select stations. 2- CH key, key SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. Select CD and other audio source tracks
* 1: Requires a satellite tuner connection. and radio stations.
Hold down to skip up and down through *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- required.
tooth-capable audio device in equip- tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio *2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
ment by type (vehicles with a tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
band during satellite radio reception.
Bluetooth 2.0 interface). with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface).
3: Requires a satellite tuner connection.
*

BK0223400US.book 28
Listen to Radio
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
Listen to Radio /SEL key Increases the frequency
(clockwise) being received. key to the 6 key.
N00716900069
This explains how to listen to AM and FM key Release the button to start A Beep sounds, and the preset key is
radio broadcasts. (hold down) seek station selection, and registered.
when a station is received,
key scanning stops.
To Listen to the Radio (hold down) NOTE
The preset memory can register a maximum
Press the RADIO key to switch the band. of 6 stations for each band.
Scan Station Selection If a preset key that already has a station reg-
Switch between AM and FM bands. istered is selected, then this is overwritten
7 The selected band is indicated on the display. Collective search for stations that can be with the new preset.
received. Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered frequency.
NOTE Press the SCAN key.
Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*. When a station is received, this is played for 5
CAT Search
If no signal is received, bands will not be seconds, then the product searches for the
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4. next station.
During RBDS broadcast reception, select
*: When a satellite tuner is connected CAT (category content), and automatically
NOTE scan for stations.
Press this button again while receiving the
Manual/Seek Station Selection station to return to normal reception. 1. During FM reception, press the CAT key.
This switches to the CAT selection mode.
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis-
Preset Memory 3. Press the key or key.
ten to.
The CAT (category content) indicator will
Register the broadcast station in advance, and flash, and station selection will automati-
/SEL key Reduces the frequency cally start.
being received. select this at a later time.
(counter- When a station is received, the frequency
clockwise) 1. Tune in to the frequency to register. is displayed.

BK0223400US.book 29
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

*:If no signal is received, bands will not be
NOTE Listen to Satellite Radio (if so switched.
This receives the station detected first.
equipped)
10 seconds after reception, CAT search mode
N00717000054
will be cancelled.
To receive a different station, press the This section explains how to listen to satellite Select a Station
key or key again. radio.
Press the key or key to select the sta-
NOTE tion.
CAT Scan A subscription is required to listen to satel-
lite radio. Satellite radio cannot be received Go down one step from the
During RBDS broadcast reception, select after the free trial period has expired. key channel being received. 7
CAT (category content) to perform a collec- If no subscription has been made when the
Go up one step from the
free trial period expires, the display will key
tive search for stations. channel being received.
alternate between CALL and 888-539-
1. During FM reception, press the CAT key. SIRI. While the key is held down,
key
This switches to the CAT selection mode. it will cycle down through
(Hold down) the channels being received.
2. Press the CAT key to select CAT.
3. Press the SCAN key. To listen to Satellite Radio While the key is held down,
When a broadcast station is received, this key it will cycle up through the
is played for 5 seconds, then the product (Hold down) channels being received.
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
searches for the next station.
Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and
SIR4 bands. NOTE
NOTE The selected band is indicated on the display. When cycling up/down through channels, the
Press this key again while receiving the sta- channel number display in the upper level of
tion to return to normal reception. the display changes.
NOTE
When channel number 000 is selected, the
Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
Switch satellite radio bands by holding down
the key or key on the steering remote
control switch.

BK0223400US.book 30
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)
Scan Station Selection NOTE Channel Search

Press the SCAN key or CAT key again while
Channels are received in order and take 10 receiving the channel to return to normal Other channels can be selected while listen-
reception.
seconds each. ing to a channel.
Turning the /SET key will cancel.
1. Press the CAT key.
Scan All Channels Switches to the category search mode,
Preset Memory and the category name is indicated on the
Press the SCAN key. display.
All of the channels are scanned. Register the channel in advance, and select 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
7 this at a later time. gory.
3. Press the /SEL key.
NOTE 1. Tune in to the channel to register. Switches to channel search mode.
Press this key again while receiving the 2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
channel to return to normal reception. 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
key to the 6 key. nel.
Selecting a channel will cancel this.
A Beep sounds, and the preset key is 5. Press the /SEL key.
registered. A Beep sounds, and the selected chan-
Scan Category Channels nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
NOTE ting mode)
1. Press the CAT key. The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
Switches to the category search mode, of 6 stations per band. flashes.
and the category name is indicated on the If a preset key that already has a channel reg- Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
display. istered is selected, then this is overwritten search mode and return to normal recep-
2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- with the new preset. tion.
gory. Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered channel. 6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL
3. Press the SCAN key. key to select the channel.
The preset channels on the display are shown
The channels in the selected category are The selected channel is received.
as P1 though P6.
scanned.
Cancels the search mode and returns to
normal reception.

BK0223400US.book 31
Listen to CDs
NOTE Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode

After making preliminary settings in the N00717100026
channel search mode, this will switch to the Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
This explains how to listen to audio CDs
channel being received.
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). playback are possible.
Channel number 000 is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched.
If the CAT ALL category is selected, all Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
channels can be searched in the channel
search mode. Press the 1RPT key.
Insert the disc.
In the category mode, press the CAT key to
cancel search mode. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
In the channel search mode, press the 6 Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25) played. 7
key to return to the category search mode. If a disc is already within the product, press
In the channel preliminary setting mode, the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the NOTE
press the 6 key to return to the category source. Pressing again will cancel.
search mode without returning to the previ- Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
ous channel search mode. or rewinding will cancel.
If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the Select the Track
search mode will be cancelled.
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Initialize the CODE (Passcode)
This enables selection of the next or previous Press the 2RDM key.
The CODE required for changing the LOCK track.

Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
settings in the satellite settings is initialized.
(The factory setting is 1111.) Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL Pressing again will cancel.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key. Ejecting will cancel this.
key while holding down the /SEL key.
Turn the Power ON/OFF (P7-24) Fast forward/rewind is possible.

BK0223400US.book 32
Listen to MP3s
If a disc is already within the product, press
Scan Playback (SCAN) Repeat Playback (RPT)
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source.
Press the SCAN key. Press the 1RPT key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks NOTE Repeat playback of the track currently being
on the whole disc in order. Depending on the file structure, it may take played.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
NOTE NOTE
Press this button again during playback if Pressing again will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track Select the Track (File) Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
7 will play normally. rewinding will cancel.
Press the key or key to select the
track.
Listen to MP3s Folder Repeat Playback
N00717200027
This enables selection of the next or previous
track. Hold down the 1RPT key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind Repeat playback of the tracks within the
folder currently being played.
CAUTION
CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
play back MP3 format audio files.
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible. Pressing again will cancel.
Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan Random Playback (RDM)
playback are possible.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25) Press the 2RDM key.

BK0223400US.book 33
Listen to an iPod
Play the tracks in the folder in a random
order.
Search Tracks Listen to an iPod
N00717300044
Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting commercially-available

NOTE
iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
Pressing again will cancel.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. play back tracks on these through the product.
Folder Random Playback Files within the selected folder are dis-
CAUTION
Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
played.
the vehicle.
Hold down the 2RDM key. 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. Never hold these devices in your hand to
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous. 7
dom order. No indemnification for data loss resulting
This plays the selected file (track). when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE Depending on how the devices are handled,
Pressing again will cancel.
NOTE audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
While the folder is selected, press the 6 it is recommended that data be backed up.
key to cancel track search mode.
Scan Playback (SCAN) If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode NOTE
will be cancelled.
Press the SCAN key. Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks key to start playback from the first track in on this product may not be possible.
that folder. (P.7-16) Additionally, playback as
in the folder currently being played in order.
While the file is selected, press the 6 key explained in this document may not be possi-
to return to the previous operation. ble.
NOTE While the file is selected, hold down the
Press this button again during playback if
6 key to cancel track search mode.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally. If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
Disc operations such as selecting a track will
cancel track search mode.

BK0223400US.book 34
Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

For vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface, iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may
the types of devices that can be connected mean that connection is not possible, or
may vary. result in differences in operation or display.
track.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone,
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors track information may not be displayed cor-
North America website. rectly.
track.
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico] Depending on the status of the vehicle and
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
website. Please read and agree to the Warn- after starting the engine. Fast Forward or Rewind
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other Data containing copyright information may
7 Companies. The websites mentioned above not play back.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
may connect you to websites other than the It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
Mitsubishi Motors website. equalizer settings be set to flat.
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- Fast forward/rewind is possible.
Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
ucts/index.html this product.
Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Switch Playback Mode
refer to How to connect an iPod on page as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
5-216. not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a cable. Connection using both methods will
Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
commercially-available iPod connection result in erroneous operation. possible.
cable. If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
Set up the device in order that no unsafe then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod- Repeat Playback (RPT)
actions, such as plugging in the connection uct, reset, then reconnect.
cable are taken while driving.
When inserting and removing the Press the 1RPT key.
iPod/iPhone, for safetys sake first stop the Play iPod
vehicle. Repeat playback of the track currently being
Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, played.
Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
it may take some time until the device is rec- source.
ognized, or playback starts. NOTE
Buttons on the product will not operate while The selected source is indicated on the dis- Pressing again will cancel.
iPod/iPhone is connected. play.

BK0223400US.book 35
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
Shuffle Playback (RDM) 2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or

tracks within the selected category are
Listen to Audio Files on a
displayed. USB Device
Press the 2RDM key. N00717400061
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
Play tracks in the category currently being gory or track. By connecting commercially-available USB
played in a random order. 4. Press the /SEL key. devices such as USB memory to this product,
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. you can play back audio files on these
through the product.
NOTE Select the track, and press the /SEL
Pressing again will cancel. key to play.
CAUTION
NOTE
Do not leave the USB device unattended in
the vehicle.
7
Album Shuffle Playback
While the category (1st level) is selected, Never hold these devices in your hand to
press the 6 key to cancel track search operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
Hold down the 2RDM key. mode. Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-
If there is no operation for 10 seconds after ory readers, as damage may occur to these or
Play back the album in a random order
selecting the category, then track search to the data contained therein. If these are
(tracks in any order on the album). mode will be cancelled. erroneously connected, then turn the ignition
Select the category, and hold down the switch to the OFF or LOCK position or
NOTE /SEL key to start playback from the first put the operation mode in OFF, then remove.
Pressing again will cancel. track in that category. Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom-
mended that files be backed up.
While the track is selected, press the 6
No guarantee is made as regards damage to
key to return to the previous operation.
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam-
Search Tracks While the track is selected, hold down the
age to data contained therein.
6 key to cancel track search mode. Depending on how the devices are handled,
Search categories or track names, and select a If there is no operation for five seconds after audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
track. selecting the track, that file is played back. it is recommended that data be backed up.
iPod operations such as selecting a track will
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- cancel track search mode.
gory.

BK0223400US.book 36
NOTE NOTE Select the Track (File)

Digital audio players that support the mass USB device specifications and settings may
storage class specifications can be con- mean that connection is not possible, or
nected. result in differences in operation or display.
track.
For details regarding the types of USB Depending on audio data in the USB device,
devices that can be connected and the types track information may not be displayed cor-
of files that can be played back in vehicles rectly.
track.
with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface, refer to Depending on the status of the vehicle and
Types of connectable devices and supported device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
file specifications on page 5-217. after starting the engine. Fast Forward or Rewind
Regarding how to connect USB devices, Data containing copyright information may
7 refer to How to connect a USB memory not play back.
device on page 5-215. This product can play back MP3, WMA, and
When connecting a USB device, use a con- AAC format audio files.
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
nection cable. Failure to use a connection Depending on the type of USB device, usage
cable when connecting may place undue load may not be possible, or functions that can be
on, or damage the USB connector. used may be restricted. Switch Playback Mode
Set up the device in order that no unsafe The recommended file system for USB
actions, such as plugging in the connection memory is FAT32.
cable are taken while driving.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
The maximum supported capacity for USB
When inserting and removing the USB memory is 32GB.
device, for safetys sake first stop the vehi- Operate the USB device containing recorded
cle. audio files while connected to this product. Repeat Playback (RPT)
Do not insert other than audio devices into
the USB port. Damage to the device or
equipment may result. Play Back of Audio Files on a Press the 1RPT key.
Depending on the status of the USB device, USB Device Repeat playback of the track currently being
it may take some time until the device is rec-
played.
ognized, or playback starts.
Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the
Depending on USB devices, buttons on the
source.
product will not operate while the USB NOTE
device is connected. Pressing again will cancel.
The selected source is indicated on the dis-
play.

BK0223400US.book 37
NOTE NOTE NOTE

Selecting a file will cancel this. Cycling up/down through files will cancel Press this button again during playback if
However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles this. you wish to hear that track, and that track
with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface. Even if the file is selected, folder random will play normally.
playback will not be cancelled.
Folder Repeat Playback

All Folder Random Playback Folder Scan Playback
Hold down the 1RPT key.
Hold down the 2RDM key. Hold down the SCAN key.
Repeat playback of the tracks within the
Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in
folder currently being played. Play the tracks in all folders in a random
each folder on the USB device in order.
7
order.
NOTE NOTE
Pressing again will cancel. NOTE
Pressing again will cancel. Press this button again during playback if
Selecting a folder will cancel this.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
Cycling up/down through files will cancel Selecting a folder will cancel this.
will play normally.
this. Cycling up/down through files will cancel
Even if the file is selected, folder repeat this.
playback will not be cancelled. Even if the file is selected, all folder random
playback will not be cancelled. Search Tracks
Folder Random Playback (RDM) Search folders and files, and select a track.
Scan Playback (SCAN)
Press the 2RDM key. 1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.
Press the SCAN key. 2. Press the /SEL key.
Play tracks in the folder currently being
played in a random order. Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks Files within the selected folder are dis-
on the whole USB device in order. played.
NOTE 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.
Pressing again will cancel. 4. Press the /SEL key.
Selecting a folder will cancel this.

BK0223400US.book 38
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth 2.0 interface)
This plays the selected file (track). For information concerning the voice recog-
nition function or speaker registration func-
To search by artist name
N00772200017
NOTE tion, refer to Bluetooth 2.0 interface on 1. Say Play on the main menu.
page 5-192.
While the folder is selected, press the 6
The following explains how to prepare for NOTE
key to cancel track search mode.
voice operation and play the tracks.
If there is no operation for 10 seconds after The Bluetooth 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
selecting the folder, then track search mode ing the connected device.
will be cancelled. Preparation for voice operation If the connected device cannot be recognized
Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL N00772101039 or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth
key to start playback from the first track in To use the voice operation, press the 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
7 that folder.
SPEECH button (except for vehicles with guide. Follow the voice guide.
While the file is selected, press the 6 key Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System) or
to return to the previous operation. PICK-UP button (for vehicles with Mitsubi- 2. After the voice guide says Would you
While the file is selected, hold down the shi Multi-Communication System) first. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
6 key to cancel track search mode. Genre?, say Artist.
If there is no operation for five seconds after
selecting the file, that file is played back.
NOTE
Operations such as selecting a track will can-
If you say Artist <name>, you can skip
cel track search mode.
step 3.
To play iPod/USB memory 3. After the voice guide says What Artist
would you like to play?, say the artist
device tracks via voice oper- name.
ation (vehicles with Blue- 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
tooth 2.0 interface) 1- SPEECH button
ceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the
N00772001038
2- PICK-UP button voice guide will say More than one
When connected to the USB input terminal match was found, would you like to play
desired tracks on the iPod/USB memory <artist name>? If you say Yes, the sys-
device can be selected and played via voice tem proceeds to step 6.
operation.

BK0223400US.book 39
If you say No, the next matching artist
is uttered by the system.
NOTE NOTE
The Bluetooth 2.0 interface starts recogniz- If you say No to three or all album titles
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
NOTE ing the connected device.
say Album not found, please try again and
If the connected device cannot be recognized
If you say No to three or all artist names the system returns to step 2.
uttered by the system, the voice guide will or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth
say Artist not found, please try again and 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
the system returns to step 2. guide. Follow the voice guide. 6. After the voice guide says Playing
Search time depends on the number of songs <album title>, the system creates a playl-
on your connected device. Devices contain- 2. After the voice guide says Would you ist index for the album title.
ing a large number of songs may take longer
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
to return search results.
Genre?, say Album. NOTE 7
If the confirmation function is active, the
6. After the voice guide says Playing <artist NOTE voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
name>, the system creates a playlist rect. If the album title is correct, say Yes.
If you say Album <title>, you can skip
If not, say No. After the voice guide says
index for the artist. step 3.
Album not found, please try again, the sys-
tem returns to step 2.
NOTE 3. After the voice guide says What Album
would you like to play? say the album
voice guide confirms if the artist name is 7. The system exits the voice recognition
title.
correct. If the artist name is correct, say mode and starts playback.
Yes. If not, say No. After the voice guide 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
says Artist not found, please try again, the ceeds to step 6.
system returns to step 2. 5. If there are two or more matches, the To search by playlist
voice guide will say More than one N00772400019
match was found, would you like to play 1. Say Play on the main menu.
7. The system exits the voice recognition <album title>? If you say Yes, the sys-
mode and starts playback. tem proceeds to step 6.
If you say No, the name of the next
To search by album title matching album is uttered by the system.
N00772300018
1. Say Play on the main menu.

BK0223400US.book 40
NOTE NOTE NOTE

The Bluetooth 2.0 interface starts recogniz- If you say No to three or all playlist names The Bluetooth 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
ing the connected device. uttered by the system, the voice guide will ing the connected device.
If the connected device cannot be recognized say Playlist not found, please try again and If the connected device cannot be recognized
the system returns to step 2.
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
guide. Follow the voice guide. 6. After the voice guide says Playing guide. Follow the voice guide.
<playlist>, the system creates an index
2. After the voice guide says Would you for the playlist. 2. After the voice guide says Would you
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
7 Genre?, say Playlist. NOTE Genre?, say Genre.
NOTE voice guide confirms if the playlist name is NOTE
correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
If you say Playlist <playlist>, you can skip If you say Genre <type>, you can skip step
Yes. If not, say No. After the voice guide
step 3. 3.
says Playlist not found, please try again,
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide
the system returns to step 2. Refer to Con-
will say There are no playlists stored on
firmation function setting on page 5-196. 3. After the voice guide says What Genre
device and the system returns to step 2.
would you like to play?, say the music
7. The system exits the voice recognition type.
3. After the voice guide says What Playlist 4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
would you like to play?, say the playlist mode and starts playback.
ceeds to step 6.
name. 5. If there are two or more matches, the
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- To search by genre voice guide will say More than one
ceeds to step 6. N00772500010 match was found, would you like to play
5. If there are two or more matches, the 1. Say Play on the main menu. <genre>? If you say Yes, the system
voice guide will say More than one proceeds to step 6.
match was found, would you like to play If you say No, the next matching genre
<playlist>? If you say Yes, the system is uttered by the system.
proceeds to step 6.
If you say No, the next matching playl-
ist name is uttered by the system.

BK0223400US.book 41
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

If you say No to three or all genres uttered Never hold these devices in your hand to Depending on the status of the vehicle and
by the system, the voice guide will say operate while driving, as this is dangerous. device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
Genre not found, please try again and the Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device after starting the engine.
system returns to step 2. unattended in the vehicle.
Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
Connect a Bluetooth-capable
6. After the voice guide says Playing
<genre>, the system creates an index for it is recommended that data be backed up. Audio Device
the genre.
Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth
NOTE NOTE device, refer to Connecting the Bluetooth
Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable 2.0 interface and Bluetooth device on page
7
audio devices, usage may not be possible, or
voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. 5-199.
functions that can be used may be restricted.
If the genre is correct, say Yes. If not, say Operation methods below describe situations
No. After the voice guide says Genre not Confirm together with the user manuals for
the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa-
once connection has been completed.
found, please try again, the system returns
to step 2. Refer to Confirmation function ble audio devices.
setting on page 5-196. Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable NOTE
audio devices, volume levels may differ. If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
7. The system exits the voice recognition to use, it is recommended that you turn the not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
mode and starts playback. volume down. cable. Connection using both methods will
Adjust Volume (P.7-25) result in erroneous operation.
Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if audio device, it may take some time until the
so equipped) device is recognized, or playback starts.
Bluetooth audio device specifications and
Play Bluetooth Audio
N00717500020
settings may mean that connection is not
1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth
This product can play back tracks on com- possible, or result in differences in operation
or display.
Audio as the source.
mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio
devices. Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
The selected source is indicated on the
audio device, track information may not be
display.
displayed correctly.

BK0223400US.book 42
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)

2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play- Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE
back starts.
Press this button again during playback if
Press the 1RPT key. you wish to hear that track, and that track
NOTE will play normally.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
Hold down the 5 key to pause.
played.
Press the 6 key to stop.
NOTE
Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
Select the Track (File) switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
7 repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
track.
Random Playback (RDM)
track.
Press the 2RDM key.
Fast Forward or Rewind Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device
in a random order.

NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible. Pressing again will cancel.
Switch Playback Mode Scan Playback (SCAN)

Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Press the SCAN key.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
order.

BK0223400US.book 43
Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800052 The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order Frequency, Sta-
safety before operation. tion name, and Radio text.
indicator.
Press the INFO key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the INFO key is pressed, the dis- Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. NO MESSAGE is displayed.

BK0223400US.book 44
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped) If there is no text information to display, then If there is no text information to display, then
NO TITLE is displayed. NO TITLE is displayed.
Displayed genre name in equipment by type
This switches in the order Channel name,
(vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface).
Category name, Artist name, Track
name, and Composer name.
Display the ID3tag The genre name display may not be possible.
Hold down the INFO key.

NOTE During Bluetooth 2.0 Audio Play-
The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display.
display of 8 characters. The other items have
back (if so equipped)
7 a maximum display of 36 characters.
Each time INFO key is pressed, this switches
in the order Album name, Track name,
N00718300025
Artist name, Genre name*, and Operat- Operating details are the same as in During
ing status. iPod Playback (P.7-44).
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order Disc title, Track files on a USB device (vehicles with a Audio Quality and Volume
title, and Operating status. Bluetooth 2.0 interface). Balance Adjustment
N00718400026
NOTE Change audio quality settings.

If there is no text information to display, then NOTE
NO TITLE is displayed. During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
INFO key to switch to the folder title display.
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
The genre name display may not be possible. ume Balance
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
back items.
During iPod Playback
N00718200024
This switches in the order Folder title, File Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
title, and Operating status. This switches in the order Albums, Track
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
name, Artist name, Genre name, and
FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel.
Operating status.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
BK0223400US.book 45
System Settings
Adjust- Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise switches in the order Satellite radio set-
clockwise
items tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
(low low-pass (high low-pass 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
volume) volume) 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass This completes settings, and displays the
volume) volume) next settings item.
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
REAR 11 CENTER *1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
nected.
7
(emphasize (emphasize
REAR) FRONT) * :Displayed when playing back audio files
2
(vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 interface).

BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11
(emphasize (emphasize
LEFT) RIGHT)
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
(Low vehicle (High vehicle
compensated compensated
volume effect) volume effect)
System Settings
N00718500072
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
items.

BK0223400US.book 46
System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
7 They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
SKIP SETTING When YES is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, CH LCKED is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING When YES is selected and the CODE for settings is input, the LOCK settings
ALL RESET for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE 1111.)
If the input code is incorrect, LOCK SETTING WRG LC is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to each channel SKIP setting, press the 6 key.

BK0223400US.book 47
System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to each channel LOCK setting, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
Time Setting NOTE NOTE

In order to finish adjusting the time, hold Depending on the distance between the prod-
Set the time manually. uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
down the /SEL key until the seconds are
reset to 00. within the vehicle, and types of screening,
The time can also be set using another proce- connection may not be possible. In these
dure. cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
H M
Refer to CLOCK on page 7-51.
Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile 7
phone, characteristics and specifications may
/SEL mean that correct operation may not be pos-
PHONE Settings sible.
For safetys sake, do not operate the mobile
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- phone while driving. When operating the
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
tings and the Bluetooth 2.0 interface lan-
location.
guage.
1. Select YES at the Adjust time screen, Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings phone, phone specifications and settings may
and press the /SEL key. may not be possible. result in differences in display, or prevent
2. Press the various keys to adjust. correct operation.
H - Hour setting NOTE Some models may not be confirmed as con-
Cancel functions such as the mobile phone nected, or may not connect.
Press this key to fast-forward the
hours. dial lock, and connect while on the Supported profiles
M - Minutes setting standby screen.
While connected, mobile phone (receiving Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
minutes. calls, etc.) operations may not function cor- Phonebook
rectly. OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0)
transfer
This completes the adjustment.

BK0223400US.book 48
System Settings
Vehicles without a Bluetooth 2.0 Inter- Vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 Interface
face
(Set value bold typeface indicates factory
A hands-free kit (available separately) is default settings.)
required.
(Set value bold typeface indicates factory Settings Settings
Settings content
default settings.) name value
HFM ENG- Change the hands
Settings voice lan- LISH free module voice
Settings content
value guage set- FRENCH language.
7 PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice tings
SPANISH
OFF cut-in.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- JAPA-
MUTE in, mute the audio. NESE
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-

ATT in, output audio from all speak- Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
ers. Bluetooth 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
IN-L in, output sound from the left The version number can be confirmed.
front speaker.
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- 1. Select Gracenote DB and press the
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
front speaker. 2. Turn the /SEL key and select DB Ver-
During mobile phone voice cut- sion.
PHONE
in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
IN-LR
and right front speakers. The DB Version is displayed.

BK0223400US.book 49
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
N00718600044
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.
Mode Message Cause Response

CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up. 7
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera-
ture to return to normal.

BK0223400US.book 50
Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (P.7-20)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (P.7-20)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
7 DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound. Adjust Volume (P.7-25)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance (P.7-44)

BK0223400US.book 51
Antenna
Symptoms Cause Response
The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
inserted. Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading. Insert/Eject Discs (P.7-25)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place. 7
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Antenna NOTE
N00734201494 When covering your vehicle with a car
cover
When driving into a structure that has a low
Roof antenna ceiling.
To remove Clock (if so equipped)

N00755001150
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. The time is displayed when the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON or
To install NOTE ACC.
Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base following cases: NOTE
(B) until it is securely retained. When using an automatic car wash
Reset the time after the battery terminals are
disconnected and reconnected.

BK0223400US.book 52
General information about your radio
Time Setting NOTE Signal transmission

The time can also be set using another proce-
dure. FM signals do not follow the earth surface
Refer to System Settings on page 7-45. nor are they reflected by the upper atmo-
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot
H M PAGE be received over long distances. AM signals
General information about follow the earths surface and are reflected by
/SEL your radio the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM
N00733901465 broadcasts can be received over longer dis-
Your vehicles radio receives both AM and tances.
7 FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by FM AM
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
1. Press and hold the PAGE key until the
clock display flashes.
2. Press the various keys to adjust.
H - Hour setting
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
hours.
(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
M - Minutes setting
minutes.
Weak reception (fading)
3. Press the PAGE key to finish adjusting the
time. When the adjustment is complete, Because of the limited range of FM signals
the clock display stops flashing. and the way FM waves transmit, you may
experience weak or fading FM reception.
NOTE When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
If the PAGE key is pressed and held when or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
the time adjustment is finished, the seconds turbed.
will be reset to 00.

BK0223400US.book 53
General information about your radio
Reflection Cross modulation Causes of disturbances

The reason why one can hear FM but not AM If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that vicinity of another strong station, both sta- tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected tions might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression
by solid objects such as buildings, etc. device. The disturbance is even greater if the
Because FM signals are easily reflected by station is weak or poorly tuned.
buildings, this can also cause reception dis- FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
turbances. disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
The direct signal from the broadcast station tive to electrical disturbances such as power
reaches the antenna slightly before the lines, lightning and other types of similar
reflected signal. This time difference may electrical phenomena. 7
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.

BK0223400US.book 54
BK0223400US.book 1
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-14
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-15
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-16 8
BK0223400US.book 2
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836301230 N00836401778 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isnt 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehi-
slowly with the hazard lights flashing, until cle and move the selector lever into the
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the P (PARK) position.
WARNING 4. Set the parking brake firmly on the other
flashers flashing. To reduce the risk of igniting flammable vehicle. Put the automatic transaxle in P
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
(PARK) or the manual transaxle in N
If the engine stops/fails carefully read this section before jump-
(Neutral).
starting the vehicle.
8 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
5. Turn the ignition switch (the engine
If the engine stops, there will be no power or towing. This can cause an accident switch) on each vehicle to the LOCK or
assist to the steering and brakes, making these resulting in serious injury or death and OFF position.
difficult to use. can damage the vehicle.
NOTE
The brake booster will not work, so the Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal NOTE loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
will be harder to press than usual. Do not use jumper cables if they have dam- both batteries.
Since there is no power steering assist, the age or corrosion.
steering wheel will be hard to turn. 6. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch the proper level. (Refer to Battery on
When the engine fails at the bands or bracelets that might create an page 9-13.)
intersection accidental electrical contact.
2. Position the vehicles close enough
together so that the jumper cables can
Get help from your passengers, bystanders,
reach, but be sure the vehicles arent
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe
touching each other.
area.
8-2 For emergencies

BK0223400US.book 3
Jump-starting the engine

3.0 liter models 8. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
WARNING
to the negative (-) terminal of the
If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP booster battery (B), and then connect the
STARTING!! other end to the designated ground
The battery might split open or explode if location of the vehicle with the discharged
the temperature is below the freezing battery (A) at the point farthest from the
point or if it is not filled to the proper battery.
level.
WARNING
7. Connect one end of one jumper cable Be sure to follow the proper order when
to the positive (+) terminal of the disconnecting the batteries, of:
charged battery (A), and then connect the
other end to the positive (+) terminal WARNING Make sure that the connection is made 8
of the booster battery (B). Make sure that the jumper cables and to the correct designated location (as
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans shown in the illustration) properly. If the
2.4 liter models connection is directly made to the negative
and drive belts. Entanglement with the
fans or belts can cause serious personal (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable
injury. gases from inside the battery might catch
fire and explode, causing personal injury.
When connecting the jumper cable, do not
connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
NOTE tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-
Open the terminal cover before connecting tery explode.
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the battery.
(Refer to Battery on page 9-13.) 9. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
Use the proper cables suitable for the battery the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
size. utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could with the discharged battery.
result. 10. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
you connected them.
For emergencies 8-3

BK0223400US.book 4
Engine overheating
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
Charging the battery by using As your vehicle has anti-lock the hazard warning flashers.
an external battery charger brakes 2. With the engine still running, carefully
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery compartment.
WARNING charge after the engine has been started by 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
Always remove the battery from your the fan is not turning, stop the engine
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
vehicle when the battery is charged by an
This can cause the anti-lock braking system immediately and contact an authorized
external battery charger.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a ity of your choice for assistance.
from the battery because the battery could
explode. problem with the brake system. If this hap-
Keep your work area well vented when pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the WARNING
charging system is operating properly. To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
8 charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space. jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
Remove all the caps before charging the fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
battery.
Engine overheating
N00836501375
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- 4. If you see steam or spray coming from
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte When the engine is overheating, the warning under the hood, turn off the engine.
comes in contact with your hands, eyes, will be displayed in the instrument cluster as 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
clothes, or the painted surface of your follows. from under the hood, leave the engine on
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
until the high coolant temperature warn-
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them The information screen in the multi infor-
immediately and thoroughly with water,
ing goes off. After the high coolant tem-
mation display will be interrupted and the
and get prompt medical attention. perature warning has gone off, you can
engine coolant temperature warning dis-
Always wear protective clothing and gog- start driving again. If the high coolant
gles when working near the battery. play will appear. Also will blink. temperature warning stays on, turn off the
Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- (Color liquid crystal display type) engine.
dren. The high coolant temperature warning
lamp will illuminate. (Mono-color liquid
If these warnings are displayed:
8-4 For emergencies

BK0223400US.book 5
Jack and tools
WARNING WARNING Jack and tools

Before raising the engine hood, check to Removing the radiator cap could scald N00836601389
see if there is steam or spray coming from you with escaping hot water or steam.
under the hood. Steam or spray coming When checking the radiator level, cover
from an overheated engine could seriously the cap with a cloth before trying to
Storage
scald you. remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
Do not open the hood until there is no wise, without pressing down, to the first The jack and tools are stowed on the right
steam or spray. notch. The pressure in the system will then side of the luggage compartment.
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
6. When you do not see any more steam or
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
spray, open the hood. Look for obvious until it comes off.
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
careful as components will be hot. Any
leak source must be repaired. 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 8
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
the coolant level in the engine coolant plain water if you have to (and replace it
reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too with the right coolant as soon as possible).
low, slowly add coolant. 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
ture display on the multi information dis- 1- Tools
coolant, you will probably also need to
play (Color liquid crystal display type) or 2- Jack
add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
or remove the radiator cap until the engine the high coolant temperature warning
has cooled down. light (Mono-color liquid crystal display
type). You can start driving again when
the high coolant temperature warning
does not come on.
11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
For emergencies 8-5

BK0223400US.book 6
How to change a tire
Tools How to change a tire

N00836901829
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
To retract
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the P
(PARK) position and turn the ignition
switch (the engine switch) to the LOCK
or OFF position.
8 1- Bar To store 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
2- Wheel nut wrench set up a warning sign, such as a warning
1. Retract the jack, then return it to its origi- triangle or flashing signal lamp, at an ade-
nal position. quate distance from the vehicle, and have
2. Extend the jack and firmly set it in its all your passengers leave the vehicle.
Removing and storing the jack storage area, then attach the lid. 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
To remove
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
1. Remove the lid. ing.
To retract
2. Retract the jack to remove it from the
attaching hardware (A).
To extend
8-6 For emergencies

BK0223400US.book 7
Spare tire information CAUTION

N00849600315 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
Compact spare tire to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
The compact spare tire is stowed below the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
luggage compartment floor. It is designed to Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18.
save space in the luggage compartment. Its The compact spare tire should be used only
lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
tire occurs. being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem will not function properly. Have the tire
WARNING WARNING
replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit-
Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of 8
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If your choice as soon as possible.
time with age even when they are not Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
being used. It is recommended that tires ing with the compact spare tire.
jack could slip out of position, leading to
over 6 years generally be replaced even if Avoid sudden starting and braking when
an accident.
damage is not obvious.
driving with the compact spare tire.
Do not drive through automatic car washes
NOTE CAUTION
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
The chocks shown in the illustration do not age the underside of your vehicle. Because
While the compact spare tire is stowed, the the compact spare tire is smaller than the
come with your vehicle. It is recommended
inflation pressure should be checked at least original tire, there is less clearance between
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep
once a month to assure that it remains at the the ground and your vehicle.
them in the vehicle for use if needed.
recommended inflation pressure. See the tire Because the compact spare tire is designed
If chocks or blocks are not available, use
and loading information placard attached to only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
stones or any other objects that are large
the drivers door sill. Refer to Tire and load- other vehicle.
enough to hold the wheel in position.
ing information placard on page 11-3. Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
ready. compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
(Refer to Jack and tools on page 8-5.) damage these parts or other parts on your
vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7

BK0223400US.book 8
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use tire chains with your compact When hooking or unhooking the tire hanger,
spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage be sure to hold the tire hanger firmly to pre-
to your vehicle and loss of the chains. vent it from dropping on your foot.
To remove the spare tire

N00849701296
To change a tire
1. Open the liftgate and use the bar to N00849801457
remove the cover (A) over the tire hanger 1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first
mounting bolt. remove the covers (refer to Wheel cov-
ers on page 8-13). Then, loosen the
CAUTION wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
8 While checking the tire hanger, carefully not remove the wheel nuts yet.
loosen the tire hanger mounting bolt. Loos-
ening it too much could pull out the hook and
cause the compact spare tire to drop.
3. Lift up the section of the tire hanger (B)

that is marked with the arrow in the illus-
tration and remove it from the hook (C).
Then lower it and remove the tire.
2. With the wheel nut wrench, loosen the tire
hanger mounting bolt by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
8-8 For emergencies

BK0223400US.book 9
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

WARNING portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top WARNING
Set the jack only at the positions shown of the jack. Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the 8
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
it could dent your vehicle or the jack ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
might fall over and cause personal injury. Do not get under your vehicle while using
Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- the jack.
face. Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
personal injury. Always use the jack on a are very dangerous.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, Do not use a jack except the one that came
make sure there are no sand or pebbles with your vehicle.
under the jack base. The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
No one should be in your vehicle when
NOTE 4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut using the jack.
Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar Do not start or run the engine while your
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack vehicle is on the jack.
into the shafts jack end, as shown in the
slips out of position. Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
illustration.
that are still on the ground could turn and
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
make your vehicle fall off the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground
surface.
For emergencies 8-9

BK0223400US.book 10

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
wrench, then take the wheel off.
Type 1
CAUTION
Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur- Type 2
face.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
mount the spare tire. 7. Turn the wheel nut clockwise by hand to
initially tighten them.
NOTE
8 [Type 1: On vehicles with steel wheels] Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare wheel as shown in the illustra-
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
tion, but return to the original wheel and tire
hand until the tapered parts of the wheel as soon as possible.
nuts make light contact with the seats of
the wheel holes and the wheel is not
loose.
[Type 2: On vehicles with aluminium
wheels]
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
hand until the flange parts of the wheel
nuts make light contact with the wheel
WARNING and the wheel is not loose.
Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
(I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
installed backwards can cause vehicle CAUTION
damage and result in an accident. Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
8-10 For emergencies

BK0223400US.book 11
NOTE
If all 4 aluminum wheels are changed to steel
wheels, use tapered nuts.
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
nut wrench counterclockwise.
CAUTION CAUTION
Never use your foot or a pipe extension to Driving with an improperly inflated tire can 8
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and your speed down and avoid sudden steering
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
illustration until each nut has been tight- 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
ened to the torque listed here. ommended tire pressure for your vehicle wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 Nm) is listed on the tire and loading informa- come loose.
tion placard attached to the drivers door If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to after changing the tire, have the tire checked
Tire inflation pressures on page 9-18. for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi
choice.
Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
For emergencies 8-11

BK0223400US.book 12

4. Install the cover over the tire hanger
To store the spare tire CAUTION mounting bolt.
N00832300020 Make sure you hook the tire hanger in the
1. Place the tire on the center of the tire proper position. If the tire hanger is not
hanger, with the wheel surface facing hooked properly, the hook could damage the To store the flat tire, jack, bar
vehicle body or the tire could fall off the
upwards.
vehicle while driving, causing an accident.
and wheel nut wrench
N00850001172
CAUTION Store the flat tire in the luggage compartment.
Storing the tire with the wheel surface facing 3. With the wheel nut wrench, firmly tighten
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
down may damage the wheel or tire hanger. the tire hanger mounting bolt by turning it
ing the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench.
If you find any damage on a spare tire, do not clockwise.
use the tire and contact an authorized Mit- Refer to Jack and tools on page 8-5.
your choice.
8
2. Lift up the tire hanger (A) and hook it on
the hook (B).
CAUTION
Confirm that the tire hanger is firmly secured
after storing the spare tire. If the tire hanger
is not secured, it could drop out while driv-
ing, causing an accident.
When hooking or unhooking the tire hanger,
be sure to hold the tire hanger firmly to pre-
vent it from dropping on your foot.

BK0223400US.book 13
Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

N00849401235 Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
To remove fingers.
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it

into the notch provided in the wheel cover, To install
and pry the cover away from the wheel.
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away CAUTION
from the wheel to remove it completely. Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
NOTE
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from The back of the cover has a symbol (E) that 8
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that shows the position of the notch.
has broken tabs.
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
into the wheel.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
4. Gently tap the top (H) of the wheel cover
around its outer circumference to push it
in.
NOTE
The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel

cover notch (D).

BK0223400US.book 14
Towing
NOTE Towing the vehicle by a tow

Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. truck
There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.
CAUTION
This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
Obey the regulations of the area where you
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
are driving your vehicle.
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.
This vehicle must not be towed with the driv-
ing wheels on the ground (Type B) as illus-
trated.
This could result in the driving system dam-
8 Towing age.
N00837001898
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
rear wheels on the ground (Type C) as illus-
If your vehicle needs to be trated. This could result in the driving system
damage or vehicle may jump at the carriage.
towed If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with Type D or E equipment.
this style.
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
Incorect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
cle with a rope.

BK0223400US.book 15
Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION Operation under adverse On wet roads

[For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)]
driving conditions
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
N00837201760
CAUTION
switch in the ON position or the operation Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
mode in ON and only the front wheels raised If your vehicle becomes stuck in than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. When towing
sand, mud or snow by driving into flood water.
When driving in rain, on water-covered
the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep roads, or through a car wash, water could get
the ignition switch or the operation mode as If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
follows. or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
F.A.S.T.-key] free it. erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly
The ignition switch is in LOCK, OFF or Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. several times while driving to dry the brake 8
ACC position. pads or linings, then check them again.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] When driving in rain, a layer of water may
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the form between the tires and the road surface
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires grip
transaxle before trying again.
Towing a front-wheel drive vehi- If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
on the road, making it difficult to steer or
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
cle with front wheels off the ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
ground (Type C) service. Do not drive on worn tires.
Always keep the tires at the correct infla-
Release the parking brake. WARNING tion pressures.
Set the selector lever to the N (NEUTRAL) When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
position. stuck position, make sure that there are no
people nearby. The rocking motion can
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward
or backward, and injure any bystanders.

BK0223400US.book 16
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
On snowy or icy roads CAUTION bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
When driving on a road covered with tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
The vehicle could start moving when it
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains engine.
breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
cannot be used on your vehicle. There an accident.
may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using On a bumpy or rutted road
them. Refer to Snow tires on page 9-21
and Tire chains on page 9-21. Drive as slow as possible when driving on
Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
8 brakes.
Allow extra distance between your vehi-
CAUTION
Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
If a skid occurs when the accelerator inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the age.
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
skid.
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock Fuel Pump Shut-off System
braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
N00860600031
pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
Do not pump the brake pedal which will WARNING
result in reduced braking performance. Before attempting to restart the engine
After parking on snowy or icy roads, it after a collision, always inspect the ground
may be difficult to move your vehicle due under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
to the brake being frozen. Depress the leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
accelerator pedal little by little to move not restart the engine.
the vehicle when safe to do so. Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.

BK0223400US.book 1
Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-6
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-8
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-9
Automatic transaxle fluid (if so equipped) .....................................9-11
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped) .9-11
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-12 9
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) .........................................9-12
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-12
Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-12
Battery ............................................................................................9-13
Tires ...............................................................................................9-15
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-21
Parking brake .................................................................................9-22
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-22
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-22
General maintenance .....................................................................9-23
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-25
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-25
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-25
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-29
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-38
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-38
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-39
BK0223400US.book 2
Service precautions
*: Front of the vehicle
Service precautions
WARNING
N00937301384
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre- When checking or servicing the inside of
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- the engine compartment, be sure the
sible. engine is stopped and has had a chance to
cool down.
You can do some of the maintenance work If you need to work in the engine compart-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- ment with the engine running, be espe-
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. does not get caught in the cooling fans,
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- drive belts, or other moving parts.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit- The cooling fans can turn on automati- Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of cally even if the engine is not running. Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
your choice. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance position to be safe while you work in the See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
engine compartment.
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so for details.
Do not smoke or allow open flames around
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
tions for each procedure.
ble. Catalytic converter
Be extremely careful when working N00937401457
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
The catalytic converter requires you to use
Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
a jack. destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
Always use properly rated automotive the converter.
jack stands.
Handling your vehicles parts and materi- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask require maintenance. However, it is important
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or a repair facility of your choice if you verter to continue to work properly.
have questions.
A- Cooling fans
B- Caution label
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

BK0223400US.book 3
Engine hood
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937501588
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, is idling roughly or otherwise obviously To open
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
vehicle when it is overheated may result in To prevent the catalytic converter from Use the engine hood release lever (located
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not under the instrument panel near the drivers
race the engine when turning off the igni- door) to unlock the engine hood.
tion switch.
WARNING Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Pull the lever toward you to release the
Do not park or run your vehicle in areas performance is noticeably low, or the engine hood latch.
where combustible materials such as dry engine has a malfunction such as with the
grass or leaves can come in contact with a ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. driving immediately, slow down and drive
Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- for only a short time. Have your vehicle
9
lytic converter. checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con- choice as soon as possible.
verter damage: In unusual situations involving major
engine problems, a burning odor may
Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
the type of recommended in the Fuel converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
selection. in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
level. Running out of gas could damage immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
WARNING
the catalytic converter. Never use the release lever to unlatch the
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
Do not try to start the engine by pushing engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
vice.
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

BK0223400US.book 4
Engine hood
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
CAUTION CAUTION
Always insert the support prop into the hole Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
specially made for it. Propping the engine before driving.
hood at any other place could cause the prop If you drive without the engine hood com-
to slip out and lead to an accident. pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
The hood prop can fall out if the hood is ing.
lifted by a strong wind.
NOTE
To close If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and position.
put it back in its retainer. Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
NOTE you push down, you could create a dent in
9 To prevent damage to the engine hood and the vehicle body.
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting If you drive with the engine hood left open, a
position when you open the engine hood. warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches

(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.

BK0223400US.book 5
View of the engine compartment
View of the engine compartment

N00937601749
2.4 L models 3.0 L models
1- Engine oil level dipstick

2- Engine oil cap
3- Air cleaner filter
4- Brake fluid reservoir
5- Washer fluid reservoir
6- Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
7- Engine coolant reservoir
8- Battery

BK0223400US.book 6
Engine oil and oil filter

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
Engine oil and oil filter wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. 3.0 L models
N00937702024
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
To check and refill engine oil face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
above the line on the dipstick.
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
need to add oil between the recommended oil NOTE
change intervals. Before starting the engine, If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
moment and then recheck the oil level by
checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
CAUTION
Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
If the level does not reach the line which oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
9 shows the minimum amount of oil required,
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
cover, and fill to within the Good range. WARNING
Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
2.4 L models age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
oughly after working with it.
Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc.

BK0223400US.book 7
Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL.
Engine oil identification mark Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only economy and cold weather starting.
1- The upper part indicates the quality of
engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
bol on the front of the container.
the oil. If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn- 9
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
of the oil viscosity. grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
ILSAC certification symbol can be used.
However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20
Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the
Recommended engine oil vis-
next oil change to maintain optimum fuel
cosity economy and cold weather starting.
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for

To replace the oil filter
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
Only use high quality replacement filters on
oil with the following label.
this vehicle. The manufacturers specifica-
tions for Mitsubishi Motors Genuine oil fil-

BK0223400US.book 8
Engine coolant
ters require that the filter can withstand a *: Front of the vehicle
pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Mitsubishi Engine coolant
Motors Genuine oil filter is the best replace- N00937801594
ment filter. To add coolant

Follow the installation instructions printed on To check the coolant level
the filter.
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you Use Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
quickly see when you need to add coolant. Life Coolant Premium or equivalent*.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based
ant in the reserve tank should be between the non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
stays full so there is no reason to remove the organic acid technology
radiator cap (B) except when you check the
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze
coolant. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
9 excellent protection against corrosion and
rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
num, and prevents clogs in some parts of
engine.
If you need to add coolant often, or if the
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
parts.

BK0223400US.book 9
Air cleaner filter
CAUTION WARNING Air cleaner filter

The required concentration of anti-freeze dif- Wait for the engine to cool down before N00937901494
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 F (-35 C): 50 % concentration from the radiator and scald you.
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
of anti-freeze with a new filter using the schedule in the
Below -31 F (-35 C): 60 % concentration WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
of anti-freeze MANUAL.
You can check the concentration level with a
Points to remember
gauge from an automotive supply store, or 1. For 2.4 L models, remove the two clips
Do not overfill the reserve tank. (A), then remove the Air duct (B).
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
service station can check it for you.
Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
Do not use water to adjust the concentration
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
of coolant. from the reserve tank back to the radiator
Do not top off the tank with plain water only. when the engine cools down. If you need
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature to change the cap, use the exact same 9
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
water freezes, it will damage your cooling Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
Radiator cap against freezing.
Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean. 2. For 2.4 L models, while holding down the
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre- tab (C), pull out the connector (D).
If the engine coolant temperature does not
vent losing coolant, which may result in
rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
engine damage. Only use a Mitsubishi
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors Genuine Parts radiator cap, or an
approved equivalent.
choice to have the thermostat checked,
and replaced if necessary.

BK0223400US.book 10
Air cleaner filter
3.0 L models 2.4 L models
3. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the 4. Replace the air cleaner filter and put the
3.0 L models
cover and take out the air cleaner filter. cover back on in its original position.
2.4 L models
9 NOTE
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are recom-
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
For 2.4 L models, make sure that the connec-
tor is properly reconnected.
After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
are firmly set.
CAUTION
Take care not to scratch the engine air flow
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.
5. For 2.4 L models, put the duct back on in

its original position.

BK0223400US.book 11
Automatic transaxle fluid (if so equipped)

2. The fluid level should be at the HOT
Automatic transaxle fluid (if mark, but never above the HOT mark
CAUTION
Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
so equipped) when the engine is warmed up. Add or
age the transaxle.
N00938000570 drain fluid to get to the correct level.
3. Make certain that the dipstick cap is
The automatic transaxle should be maintained installed properly to keep dirt and water
and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi out of the transaxle. Special additives
choice to obtain the best performance and Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec-
longest life. It is important that the transaxle Good (Hot)
ommend the addition of any fluid additives to
fluid is kept at the correct level. the transaxle.
To check the fluid level Continuously variable

transmission (CVT) fluid (if
The fluid level should be checked when the 9
bar graph for the engine coolant temperature so equipped)
display on the multi-information display N00938101103
shows the engine is warmed up and the fluid

The continuously variable transmission
in the transaxle is heated to its normal work- WARNING (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
ing temperature. Driving with the wrong fluid Transaxle fluid is extremely flammable an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
level will rapidly wear out the transaxle and and poisonous. Do not spill fluid when repair facility of your choice to obtain the
destroy the fluid. adding or draining. best performance and longest life. It is impor-
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
Procedure for checking the correct level.
fluid level Fluid type
Fluid type
1. With the brake pedal fully depressed and Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine ATF-
the engine idling, select each gear J3 transaxle fluid to ensure optimum trans-
momentarily, ending with the selector axle performance. Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
lever in the P (PARK) position. CVTF-J4 transmission fluid to ensure opti-
mum transmission performance.

BK0223400US.book 12
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
CAUTION Rear axle oil (All-wheel vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
age the transaxle.
drive models) essary.
N00915201279 Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as level with the dipstick.
Special additives necessary to maintain the proper level.

Fill with the oil according to the table below.
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-

mission. Fluid type
EMPTY
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive Mitsubishi Motors Genuine FULL
Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
models) classification GL-5
9 N00938401281
Viscosity
SAE 80
Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
range
add oil as necessary to maintain the proper When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
level. Fill with the oil according to the table out the water in the reservoir by operating the
below. Washer fluid pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
N00938601342 freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
Fluid type The windshield and rear window washer fluid the system for a few seconds to flush out the
reservoir is in the engine compartment. residual water.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API Brake fluid
classification GL-5 N00938701271
Viscosity
SAE 80 To check the fluid level
range
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level must be between the MAX
and MIN marks on the reservoir.

BK0223400US.book 13
Battery
CAUTION NOTE
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, After replacing the battery, the electronic
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This control system data for the automatic trans-
will damage the seals. axle, etc., will be erased.
Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can As a result, shifting may be rough.
damage painted surfaces. Shifting will become smoother after several
Use only the listed brake fluid. Different changes in speed.
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. Checking battery electrolyte
Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating.
level
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
brake pads, but this does not indicate any
abnormality. The electrolyte level must be between the
Battery limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
If the fluid level falls sealed tight in a short
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of 9
length of time, it indicates leaks from the N00939101940
brake system. the battery is divided into several compart-
The condition of the battery is very important ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an for quick starting and to keep the vehicles
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a and fill to the mark.
electrical system working properly. Check the Do not fill above the top line because a spill
repair facility of your choice. battery regularly. during driving could cause damage.
Fluid type If battery performance is suspect, have the

battery and charging system tested by an During cold weather
Use the recommended brake fluid conform- repair facility of your choice.
ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water This has to do with its chemical and physical
out. properties and is why a very cold battery,
especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-

BK0223400US.book 14
Battery
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
WARNING WARNING
Never disconnect the battery while the If you are quick-charging your battery,
will provide more reliable starting, and longer
engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
battery life.
the vehicles electrical parts. In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure
Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
Disconnection and connection cause it to overheat and be damaged. first, and reconnect it last.
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away If the electrolyte level is very low, have the
from the battery because the battery could battery checked at an authorized Mitsubi-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
explode. shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal your choice.
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- sories contain lead and lead compounds.
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, color them. And if it gets on your skin or Wash hands after handling.
before starting the vehicle. in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-
ness. Please observe the following han-
9 NOTE dling instructions: NOTE
If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft You can prevent further corrosion by wash-
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of ing with a solution of baking soda and water.
nal of the battery.
water and neutral detergent then imme- Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or
Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the diately rinse the affected parts with
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. tightening them.
plenty of water. Ensure the battery is securely installed and
If electrolyte gets on your hands or cannot be moved. Also check each terminal
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If for tightness.
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
with water immediately and get immedi- long period of time, remove the battery and
ate medical attention. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
Open doors and windows in any closed not freeze. The battery only should be stored
space where you may be charging or with a full charge.
working with the battery. Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
Always wear protective clothing and gog- filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
gles when working with the battery, or
have a skilled automobile technician do it.

BK0223400US.book 15
Tires
Recommended inflation pressure: the Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
Tires inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
N00939201589
mance. Section width: the linear distance between
Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
WARNING The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
or improperly inflated is dangerous.
These type tire conditions will adversely
turer, brand, and/or model name molding Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
affect vehicle performance. that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
These type tire conditions can also cause a molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
tread separation or blowout which may or Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
result in an accident causing serious The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
injury or death. metrical tire that has a particular side Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
Tires, including spare tire, degrade over that must always face outward when tire.
time with age even when they are not mounted on a vehicle. Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
being used. Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire
It is recommended that tires over 6 years on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated.
9
generally be replaced even if damage is
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
not obvious.
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat.
pounds or less. Groove: the space between two adjacent
It is important to familiarize yourself with the Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs.
following terms: its manufacturer as primarily intended for
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
Cold tire pressure:
passenger vehicles.
The measured pressure after the vehicle
Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
has been parked for at least three hours,
contact with the road.
or
Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
The measured pressure when the vehicle
ferentially around a tire.
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
Tread separation: pulling away of the
having been parked for three hours.
tread from the tire carcass.
Maximum pressure: the maximum per-
Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
missible cold tire inflation pressure for
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
this tire.
bears the load.

BK0223400US.book 16
Tires
Tire Markings Construction code NOTE

R means radial construc- LT (Light Truck) -metric tire
R tion. sizing is based on U.S.A. design
D means diagonal or bias standards. The size designation
construction. for LT-metric tires is the same as
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) for P-metric tires except for the
letters LT that are molded into
NOTE the sidewall preceding the size
European/Japanese metric tire designation. Example:
sizing is based on European/Jap- LT235/85R16.
anese design standards. Tires Temporary spare tires are high
designed to these standards have pressure compact spares

9 Size Designation designed for temporary emer-
the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the sec- gency use only. Tires designed
EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 tion width. The letter P is to this standard have the letter
Passenger car tire size based absent from this tire size desig- T molded into the sidewall
P preceding the size designation.
on U.S.A. design standards nation. Example: 215/65R15
96H. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Section width in millimeters
215
(mm)
Service Description
Aspect ratio in percent (%)
65 Ratio of section height to sec- EXAMPLE: 95H
tion width of tire.
Load index
A numerical code associated
95
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.

BK0223400US.book 17
Tires
Speed symbol EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD

WARNING 1504
A symbol indicating the Overloading of your tire is
range of speeds at which a Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tire can carry a load corre- tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi-
sponding to its load index This symbol certifies that the
cle handling, and increase
under certain operating con- tire is in compliance with the
your stopping distance. Use DOT
ditions. U.S. Department of Trans-
H tires of the recommended load
The maximum speed corre- portation tire safety stan-
capacity for your vehicle.
sponding to the speed symbol dards, and is approved for
Never overload them.
should only be achieved highway use.
under specified operating Code representing the tire
conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2
vehicle loading, road condi- digits) 9
tions and posted speed limits) Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire
maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9
size. (2 digits)
Maximum Load tion pressure for this tire. ABC
Code used by tire manufac-
D
turer. (1 to 4 digits)
Maximum load indicates the maxi- Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Number representing the
mum load this tire is designed to
The TIN may be found on one or 15 week in which the tire was
carry.
both sides of the tire but the date manufactured. (2 digits)
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits)
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

BK0223400US.book 18
Tires
Economy
Treadwear, Traction and Temper- Temperature
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven
ature Grades wear patterns in the tire tread. These
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C, representing the tires resistance to the abnormal wear patterns will reduce the
Treadwear generation of heat and its ability to dissipate tread life, and the tire will have to be
heat when tested under controlled conditions replaced sooner.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Too little pressure also makes it harder for
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Sustained high temperature can cause the the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
under controlled conditions on a specified material of the tire to degenerate and reduce Ride comfort and vehicle stability
government test course. For example, a tire tire life, and excessive temperature can lead The superior riding experience built into
graded 150 would wear one and one-half to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
(11/2) times as well on the government course sponds to a level of performance which all tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
respond.
9 their use, however, and may depart signifi- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
Unequal tire pressures can make steering
cantly from the norm due to variations in performance on the laboratory test wheel than
driving habits, service practices and differ- the minimum required by law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
ences in road characteristics and climate.
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-
Tire inflation pressures mal driving conditions is listed on the placard
Traction N00939300815
attached to the drivers door sill.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to Tire and loading information plac-
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard on page 11-3.)
the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures under
measured under controlled conditions on problems in three major areas: normal driving conditions should be used for
specified government test surfaces of asphalt the tires listed below.
Safety
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
Too little pressure increases flexing in the Item Tire size Front Rear
traction performance.
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
240 240
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability P215/70R16
Normal tire KPA, KPA,
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and P225/55R18
35 PSI 35 PSI
potholes could then cause tire damage that
may result in tire failure.
BK0223400US.book 19
Tires
Item Tire size Front Rear Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
CAUTION
Compact 420 KPA, 60 ing information placard attached to the Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
T155/90D16
spare wheel PSI should be used, because your vehicle is
drivers door sill.)
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
Stay within the recommended load limits. tem.
Tire pressures should be checked, and
Make sure that the weight of any load in Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
your vehicle is evenly distributed. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
Pressures should be checked more often
Drive at safe speeds. to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
whenever weather temperatures change
After filling your tires to the correct pres-
severely, because tire pressures change with
sure, check them for damage and air
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
Tire maintenance
are always cold inflation pressure. N00939700141
valve stems.
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the The following maintenance steps are recom-
vehicle has been parked for at least three mended:
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) Replacing tires and wheels
after having been parked for three hours. N00939600241 Check tire pressures regularly. 9
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the Have regular maintenance done on the
maximum values molded into the tire side- CAUTION wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
wall. After driving several miles, your tire Avoid using different size tires from the one sion alignment.
inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 listed and the combined use of different Rotate your tires regularly as described in
types of tires, as this can affect driving
to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure. the Tire rotation section on page 9-20.
safety.
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
Refer to Tires and wheels on page 11-7.
specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires
too low. of the same size, same type, and same brand,
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one and which have no wear differences. Using
tire looks lower than the others, check the tires that differ in size, type, brand or the
pressure for all of them. degree of wear, will increase the differential
You should also take the following safety pre- oil temperature, resulting in possible damage
cautions: to the driving system. Further, the drive train
will be subjected to excessive loading, possi-
bly leading to oil leakage, component sei-
zure, or other serious problems.

BK0223400US.book 20
Tires
Tread wear indicator Tire rotation Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction
N00939800184 N00939901528
Front
To even out the wear on your tires and make
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
Front
road surface conditions, and your own per-
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
1- Location of the tread wear indicator sible.
9 2- Tread wear indicator

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal CAUTION
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres- A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help sure, wheels that are not aligned properly, rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
you know when your tires should be replaced. wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe during the tire rotation. However, it must not
Many states have laws requiring that you be included in the regular tire rotation
braking.
sequence.
replace your tires at this point. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the
These indicators are molded into the bottom dealer or a repair facility of your choice to correct direction of rotation, swap the front
of the tread grooves and will appear when the find out the reason for uneven tread wear. and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
mm). The first tire rotation is the most important right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
When the bands appear next to one another in one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. Keep each tire on its original side of the
two or more places, replace your tires. vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure
the arrows point in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-
NOTE ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the
Tire wear indicators can have different marks wrong direction will not perform to its full
and locations depending on the tire manufac- potential.
turer.

BK0223400US.book 21
Brake pedal free play
CAUTION Brake pedal free play

Front
Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels N00940300293
should be used, because your vehicle is To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
tem. eral times with your foot. Then press the
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
pedal down with your fingers until you first
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
feel resistance.
Brake pedal free play:

.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Tire chains
CAUTION N00940101139
Avoid the combined use of different types of CAUTION

tires. Using different types of tires can affect
vehicle performance and safety.
Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the
9
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
Snow tires aged.
N00940000320
In some areas of the country, snow tires are

required for winter driving. If snow tires are
required in your area, you must choose snow If the free play is not within these limits, take
tires of the same size and type as the original your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
should also be installed on all four wheels. choice for adjustment.
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
can be reduced.
Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h).

BK0223400US.book 22
Parking brake
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
Parking brake Wiper blades trol system is made of:
N00940401259 N00940700138
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean a positive crankcase ventilation system
Parking brake lever stroke them regularly to remove deposits of salt and an evaporative emission-control system
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild an exhaust emission-control system
Check the parking brake lever travel occa- detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works
slowly and count the number of clicks of the Replace the blades if they continue to streak properly, have your vehicle inspected and
ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke: or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
6 to 7 notches (clicks) Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
(Psrking brake adjustment when pulled with choice. This should be done at the time or
the force of 200 N)
NOTE mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND
Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
time. This wears out the rubber and can
the ratchet after pulling. These, and all the other general mainte-
9 scratch the glass.
nance services listed in this manual, need to
be performed to keep your vehicle running
properly and reliably.
During cold weather You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Emission-control system
maintenance
WARNING N00940800328
Continued operation of the vehicle with
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when
control system that meets all the requirements
unattended. of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

BK0223400US.book 23
General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
NOTE Fuel hoses fold.
To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000040
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
The engine electronic control module that If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire.
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
Check engine light) is ON.
Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control

Spark plugs N00950100050 system (except evaporative 9
N00940900231
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
Spark plugs must fire properly to ensure
mileage specified in the WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
proper engine performance and emission-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
control.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or
adjustments made by an authorized Have the system checked at an authorized
regapping. Spark plugs should be replaced at
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
the mileage specified in the WARRANTY
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL. ified in the WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL.
NOTE connection, and fuel tank filler
Use the recommended or equivalent spark cap) General maintenance
plugs listed under Engine specifications on N00941300173 N00941501299
page 11-6. Use of other plugs could cause
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service
engine damage, loss of performance or radio
noise. the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
BK0223400US.book 24
General maintenance
there are other parts which do not usually The underside or rear of the vehicle is
need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage damaged
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- seals, drive shaft boots
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800093 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
problem with them. grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
If you have any questions, see your autho- Ball joint boots of the suspension and fumes seep into the luggage and passenger
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. steering linkage compartments.
Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Disc brake pads Check for any of the following
N00941600059 Exhaust system conditions:
Good brakes are essential for safe driving. N00942201118
Check the brake pads for wear. For good Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
9 braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING caused by corrosion or damage.
with the same type pads as the originals. Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicles Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death. Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
Brake hoses damage.
N00941700076
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have Timing belt
for: the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
N00942300079
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas The timing belt should be replaced with a
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- new one at the mileage listed in the WAR-
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing: UAL.
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
hose wears through. A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
Improper installation may cause twisting, tem
or wheel, tire or chassis interference. The smell of exhaust fumes inside the
vehicle

BK0223400US.book 25
For cold and snowy weather
Hood lock release mechanism Weatherstripping WARNING

and safety catch Fusible links must not be replaced by any
N00942501124 To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
The hood lock release mechanism and hood on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
property destruction and serious or fatal
safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and be treated with silicone grease.
injuries at any time.
oiled when needed for easy movement and to
prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Additional equipment (For
Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding
parts of the hood latch and release lever.
regions where snow is encoun- Fuses
Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- tered) N00942801912
nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-

ered. It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short- Fuse block location
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
9
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
For cold and snowy weather the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
N00942600102
useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
Ventilation slots Passenger compartment

Fusible links
N00942700291
The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
a large current attempts to flow through cer- ment are located behind the fuse lid in front
snowfall so that the operation of the heating
tain electrical systems. of the drivers seat at the position shown in
and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your the illustration.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Pull the fuse lid to remove it.
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to Fuse
load capacities on page 9-26.

BK0223400US.book 26
Fuses
Fuse load capacities Sym- Capac

No. Electrical system
N00954801355
bol ity
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 2 Defogger 30 A*
cal systems and their fuse capacities. 3 Heater 30 A
There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover
in the engine compartment. Always replace a 4 Windshield wipers 30 A
blown fuse with one of the same capacity as 5 Door locks 20 A
the original.
6 Rear fog light 10 A
A- Main fuse block Passenger compartment fuse loca- 7 12 V power outlet 15 A

B- Sub fuse block tion table 8 Rear window wiper 15 A
9 Sunroof 20 A
Main fuse block
9 Engine compartment 10 Ignition switch 10 A
11 Option 10 A
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration. While Sub fuse Hazard warning
12 15 A
pressing the tab (A), pull up the cover (B). block flasher
13 4-wheel drive system 10 A
Stop lights
14 15 A
(Brake lights)
15 Gauges 10 A
16 SRS airbag 7.5 A
17 Radio 15 A
Sym- Capac
No. Electrical system 18 Control unit relay 7.5 A
bol ity
Interior lights
Power window con- 19 15 A
1 30 A* (Room lights)
trol

BK0223400US.book 27
Fuses
Sym- Capac Engine compartment fuse location Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
No. Electrical system No.
bol ity table bol tem ty
20 Back-up lights 7.5 A Air condition-
SBF3 ing condenser 30 A*
Heated outside
21 7.5 A fan motor
rearview mirrors
Radiator fan
Outside rearview SBF4 40 A*
22 10 A motor
mirrors
Anti-lock brak-
Cigarette lighter/ SBF5 40 A*
23 15 A ing system
12 V power outlet
SBF6 VLC 40 A*
24 Charge 7.5 A
Anti-lock brak-
25 Power seat 30 A* SBF7 30 A*
ing system
26 Heated seats 30 A BF1 Power liftgate 30 A 9
Behind the fuse block cover Audio system
*: Fusible link BF2 30 A
amplifier
Some fuses may not be installed on your BF3 IOD IOD 30 A
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
BF4 Diesel 30 A
or specifications.
The table above shows the main equip- Automatic
F1 20 A
ment corresponding to each fuse. transaxle
F2 Wiper de-icer 15A
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci
No. F3
bol tem ty
Daytime run-
Air condition- F4 10 A
ning lights
SBF1 ing condenser 30 A*
fan motor F5 Front fog lights 15 A
SBF2 Starter 30 A* F6 Air conditioner 10 A

BK0223400US.book 28
Fuses
Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci Sym- Electrical sys- Capaci The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
No. No. 25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses
bol tem ty bol tem ty
burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
Headlight Head-
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
F7 20 A
washer light
25 A: 20 A spare fuse
F20 (low LED 20 A 30 A: 30 A audio system amplifier fuse
F8 Security horn 20 A
beam)
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
F9 Horn 10 A (right)
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
F10 ETV 15 A Head- ble.
light
F11 Alternator 7.5 A Halo-
F21 (low 10 A
gen Identification of fuse
F12 Engine 7.5 A beam)
(left)
ENG/POWER 20 A Capacity Color
F13 Head-
9 Fuel line heater 25 A light
Halo-
7.5 A Brown
F22 (low 10 A 10 A Red
F14 Fuel pump 15 A gen
beam)
15 A Blue
F15 Ignition coil 10 A (right)
20 A Yellow
F16 ENG/POWER 10 A Battery current
F23 7.5 A
sensor 25 A Natural (white)
Headlight (high
F17 10 A #1 Spare fuse 10 A Green (fuse type) /
beam) (left) 30 A
Pink (fusible link type)
Headlight (high #2 Spare fuse 15 A
F18 10 A 40 A Green (fusible link type)
beam) (right) #3 Spare fuse 20 A
Head-
light *: Fusible link
F19 (low LED 20 A
Some fuses may not be installed on your
beam)
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
(left)
or specifications.
The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.

BK0223400US.book 29
Replacement of light bulbs

5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
Fuse replacement securely into the appropriate slot.
N00954901141
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off

the electrical item connected to the fuse CAUTION
and turn the ignition switch to the Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
LOCK or OFF position or put the the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
operation mode in OFF. foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine to heat up and could cause a fire.
compartment fuse block. If the replacement fuse blows again after a
short time, have the electrical system
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
matching tables, to check the fuse that is find and correct the cause.
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
9
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors N00942901359
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse the bulb when it gets hot.
block.
CAUTION
Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off.
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
B- Fuse is OK otherwise be burned.
C- Blown fuse

BK0223400US.book 30
CAUTION NOTE Outside

Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas When it rains, or when the vehicle has been N00950301987
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur- washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
Front
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. phenomenon as when window glass mists up
Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
hand, dirty glove, etc. tional problem.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb When the light is switched on, the heat will
to break the next time the headlights are remove the fog. However, if water gathers
used. inside the light, please have it checked by an
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
alcohol and let it dry completely before repair facility of your choice.
installing the bulb.
Type A
Bulb capacity
9 N00943000132
The bulb should only be replaced with a new

bulb with the same rating and type. The type
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Type B
Type A: Halogen headlights type

NOTE Type B: LED headlights type
If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.

BK0223400US.book 31

ANSI NOTE ANSI
Trade Parking light
trade No.
Watt- Item Wattage
Item No. or Daytime running light
or Bulb
age
Bulb Side turn signal light
type
type 7 - Stop light
1 - Front turn signal light 21 W PY21W Rear
2 - Headlight, high beam 60 W

9005 NOTE
HB3 The following lights use an LED instead of
3 - Head- Halogen the bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubi-
55 W H7 shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
light, low bulb
choice when either light needs to be repaired
beam LED or replaced.
4 - Parking light/ Rear side-marker light
Daytime running High-mounted stop light
light (if so equipped) Tail light 9
Stop light
5 - Front side-marker ANSI
5W W5W
light trade No.
Item Wattage
6- Front fog light or Bulb
19 W H16
(if so equipped) type
7 - Side turn signal light 1 - High-mounted

(if so equipped) stop light
2 - Tail light
NOTE 3 - Rear side-
The following lights use an LED instead of marker light
the bulb. 4 - License plate 5W W5W
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors light
when either light needs to be repaired or 5 - Back-up light 16 W W16W
replaced. 6 - Rear turn sig- 21 W WY21W
Headlight, low beam (LED type) nal light

BK0223400US.book 32

2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
Inside Headlights (low beam, except remove it.
N00950401656
for vehicles equipped with LED
headlights)
N00901801173
1. When replacing the bulb on the left side

of the vehicle, remove the bolt (A) hold-
ing down the relay box and move the
relay box toward the rear of the vehicle.
(if so equipped)
*- Front of the vehicle

Item Wattage
9 3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
1 - Cargo room light 8W
remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
2 - Dome light (rear) 8W the socket.
Dome light (front)/Read-
3- 8W
ing light
4 - Downlight
5 - Vanity mirror lights 2W
6 - Glove compartment light 1.4 W
NOTE
The downlight uses an LED instead of the
bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
choice when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.

BK0223400US.book 33

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise to
steps in reverse.
Headlights (high beam) remove it and then while holding down
N00901901132
the tab (D), pull out the bulb (E).
1. When replacing the bulb on the right side
NOTE of the vehicle, remove the clip (A) hold-
When installing the bulb, align the tab (D)
ing down the washer tank spout and move
with the notch (E) of the socket.
the spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse. 9
Headlights (low beam, for vehi-
cles equipped with LED head- 2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to Headlight aim adjustment
remove it. N00943201359
lights) The alignment of the headlights should be
N00900301142
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
NOTE dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
The headlights uses an LED instead of the
bulb. Front side-marker lights
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors N00915501197
1. When replacing the bulb on the left side
when the light needs to be repaired or
of the vehicle, move the relay box toward
replaced.
the rear of the vehicle. (if so equipped)
(Refer to Headlight (low beam, except
*- Front of the vehicle for vehicles equipped with LED head-
lights): Step 1 on page 9-32.

BK0223400US.book 34

2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to 2. Turn the socket (D) counterclockwise to
Parking lights/Daytime running remove it, then remove the bulb from the
the socket. lights (if so equipped) socket by turning it counterclockwise
N00917301610 while pressing in.
NOTE
The parking lights and daytime running
lights (if so equipped) uses an LED instead
of the bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
replaced.
9 Front turn signal lights

N00943401423
1. Remove the 12 clips (A, B), and then

remove the cover (C). *: Front of the vehicle

steps in reverse.

steps in reverse.

BK0223400US.book 35

2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the 3. While holding down the tab (D), pull out
Side turn signal lights (if so light unit. the socket (E).
equipped)
N00943501147
NOTE
The side turn signal lights uses an LED
instead of the bulb.
replaced.
4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to

Front fog lights (if so equipped) NOTE remove it.
N00943601845 When unfastening the screws or the fog 9
light, be careful not to move the beam posi-
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
tion adjustment screw (C).
driver with a cloth over its tip at the points
indicated by arrows and pry gently to
remove the cover (A).

steps in reverse.
Rear combination lights

N00943701556
1. Open the liftgate.

BK0223400US.book 36

2. Remove the screws (A), and then move 3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
the light unit toward the rear of the vehi- remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
NOTE
When mounting the light unit, align the
cle to unfix the notch (B) and pins (C). the socket.
notch (F) and pin (G) on the light unit with
the clip (H) and hole (I) in the body.
D- Rear turn signal light

9 E- Tail light and stop light (LED) - cannot Back-up lights
be replaced N00929101080
1. Push the light unit upward to remove it.
NOTE
The rear side-marker light, tail light and stop
light use an LED instead of the bulb.
replaced.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

BK0223400US.book 37

2. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
License plate lights
N00944000360
the socket.
1. When removing the light unit (A), push it
toward the left side of the vehicle body.

steps in reverse.
steps in reverse. 9
2. Use a screw driver to gently pry up the tab
NOTE
When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C)
(B) and remove the lens.
NOTE first then align tab (D) with its hole.
When installing the light unit, first insert the
notch (B) into the hole on the body, and then
push on the light unit to fit it into place.
NOTE
Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

BK0223400US.book 38
Vehicle care precautions
High-mounted stop light CAUTION CAUTION

N00943900102 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some Do not use organic substances (solvents,
are poisonous and others are highly flamma- benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
NOTE ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their alkaline or acidic solutions.
The high-mounted stop light uses an LED fumes in a closed space. When you use any- These chemicals can cause discoloring,
instead of the bulb. Check with an authorized thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be staining or cracking of the surface.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility sure to follow the instructions. Always open If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
of your choice when the light needs to be your vehicle doors or windows when youre sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
repaired or replaced. cleaning the inside. Never use the following stances mentioned above.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Vehicle care precautions Carbon Tetrachloride NOTE
Benzine Always read the instructions on the cleaner
N00945100166
Kerosene label.
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, Naphtha
9 perform regular maintenance using the proper Acetone
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
Paint Thinner
local environmental pollution control regula- Lacquer Thinner
flocked parts
tions. Choose the materials you will use care- Nail Polish Remover
N00945300155
fully, to be sure that they do not contain 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap
These can all be dangerous, and they all can and water.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
damage your vehicle. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
in choosing these materials.
wring it out well, and wipe off all the
Cleaning the inside of your soap.
vehicle
N00945200095
After washing the inside of your vehicle with

any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
lated area.

BK0223400US.book 39
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
NOTE NOTE NOTE

Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro- If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat The genuine leather surface may harden and
tectants containing silicones or wax. upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
Such products, when applied to the instru- over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec- place it in the shade as much as possible.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision. When the temperature of the vehicle interior
Also, if such products get on the switches of rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
Genuine leather (if so equipped)
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
N00945600187
ure of these accessories. stick to the seat.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen-
Upholstery tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your
N00945500128
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700058
soap.
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean. 3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicles finish, wash it often 9
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean tecting agent on the genuine leather sur- vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic face.
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
Foreign material
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be NOTE N00945800033
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
water. may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
and spot remover. alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled.
should not be used.
Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

BK0223400US.book 40
Washing CAUTION CAUTION

N00945901637 Never spray or splash water on the electrical If your vehicle is equipped with the rain
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust parts in the engine compartment. This may sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever
damage them. Be careful also when washing in the OFF position to deactivate the rain
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
the underbody to ensure that water does not sensor.
faces can damage the paint and body of your
enter the engine compartment.
vehicle if left on.
Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the
During cold weather
to protect your vehicle from this damage. paint surface and make it dull.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- Salt and other chemicals used on winter roads
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with ored vehicles. in some geographical areas can have a detri-
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of Some hot water washing equipment uses mental effect on the vehicle underbody. You
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. should flush the underbody with a high pres-
wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Because hot water can damage plastics parts sure hose every time you wash the outside of
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you your vehicle.
9 Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- do the following when using such equip-
Take special care to remove mud or other
ment:
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, debris which could trap and hold salt and
Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the moisture.
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
When washing around the door glass, hold
remain. waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
the nozzle at a distance of more than 28
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
CAUTION glass surface.
When washing the underside of your vehicle Make sure to do the following when using an NOTE
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- automatic car wash, with help from either When the door is frozen, opening it by force
tect your hands. this manual or the car wash operator, to may tear off or crack the rubber gasket
If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place avoid damaging your vehicle: installed around the door. Pour warm water
the wiper switch lever in the OFF position Fold the outside rearview mirrors. to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing Remove the antenna. off the water after opening the door. To pre-
the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper- Tape or remove the rear wiper arm assem- vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
ate in the presence of water spray on the bly. doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
windshield and may get damaged as a result. If your vehicle is equipped with a roof rails, cant.
check with the car wash operator before
using the car wash.

BK0223400US.book 41

information code plate located on the front
Waxing CAUTION passenger door sill.
N00946000205 On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black
when water does not bead up on the paint. rubber) when waxing the area around the Cleaning plastic parts
sunroof opening. N00946301221
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax
If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun-
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. roof. If the vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. rough surface of the bumper, molding or
You should wax when the painted surfaces lights, the surface may appear white in color.
are cool. Polishing In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
N00946100046 and a soft cloth or chamois.
CAUTION If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
aged and lost their original luster and color CAUTION
Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
9
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because polishing to the damaged surface only; polish surface.
they also remove paint/clearcoat. a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc. the compound from the surface and apply a tic surface.
Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
from the vehicle surface. paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
Do not put wax on the areas having black Damaged paint trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
matte coating because it can cause uneven N00946201099 cracks, or discoloration.
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away should be touched up as soon as possible with them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
with a soft cloth and warm water. mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
them immediately with water.
Check body areas facing the road or the tires
carefully for damage to the paint caused by
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle

BK0223400US.book 42
Chrome parts Window glass NOTE

N00946400052 N00946600054 The surface treatment on the inside of the
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome The window glass can usually be cleaned glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
organic solvent is used.
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
commercially available chrome polish. dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Engine compartment
N00947000071
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) Wiper blades Never spray or splash water on the electrical
accessories in the engine compartment. This
N00946500183 N00946700068
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
not be removed easily with water. blades. ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
9 Rinse off the detergent after washing the Replace the wiper blades when they no longer crack, stain or discolor them.
wheel. clean the windshield and rear window prop- If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois erly. chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
leather or a soft cloth. of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
Cleaning the sunroof (if so the affected parts with plenty of water.
CAUTION equipped)
Do not use a brush or other hard implement N00946800069
on the wheels.
Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
so could cause the coating on the wheels to with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
peel or become discolored or stained. gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
Do not directly apply hot water using a steam sponge dipped in fresh water.
cleaner or by any other means.
Contact with seawater or road salt used for
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such
substances as soon as possible.

BK0223400US.book 1
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
BK0223400US.book 2
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100171 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201498
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tires resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

BK0223400US.book 3
Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
BK0223400US.book 4
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to: Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047300098 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors Remain calm.
Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
call (670)234-7133 or write to: Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
design referred to as Energy Management.
the police, and, if necessary, call for an
Individual body parts are designed to act as
Triple J Motors ambulance.
one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 are channeled around the passenger compart-
the accident for discussions with your
ment. This important feature is possible
insurance company and other persons
because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf.
Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
For vehicles sold in American thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Samoa Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. protection features in the event of an acci-
Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with imitations,
Choosing the repair shop and the brands your vehicle may no longer meet original
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is equipment specifications.
P.O. Box 698 your decision.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
BK0223400US.book 5

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

BK0223400US.book 6
BK0223400US.book 1
Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-5
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-6
Battery ............................................................................................11-6
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-7
Capacity .........................................................................................11-7
11
BK0223400US.book 2
Vehicle labeling
The air conditioning label is affixed on the
Vehicle labeling inside panel of the engine hood.
Chassis number
N01147401781
The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and
head as shown in the illustration.
vehicle identification number. Such informa-
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.
4 - Vehicle information code plate

The vehicle information code plate is located
on the front passenger door sill.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control information
label
The vehicle emission control information
label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
2 - Vehicle identification number plate

The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
11-2 Specifications
BK0223400US.book 3
Vehicle labeling
Type 2
Engine serial number Tire and loading information
placard
The engine serial number is stamped on the
N01148101613
cylinder block as shown in the illustrations.
The tire and loading information placard is
located on the drivers door sill.
2.4 liter models
Certification label
N01148201249
The certification label is located on the

3.0 liter models drivers door sill.
Type 1
11
Specifications 11-3
BK0223400US.book 4
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147501593
Overall length 184.8 in (4,695 mm)

Overall width 71.3 in (1,810 mm)
Overall height 66.1 in (1,680 mm)
Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)
11
11-4 Specifications
BK0223400US.book 5
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147601927
2.4 liter models 3.0 liter models

Item
Seating capacity 5 persons 7 persons 7 persons
Gross vehicle weight rating 4,795 lb (2,175 kg) 5,005 lb (2,270 kg)
Front 2,535 lb (1,150 kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Rear 2,756 lb (1,250 kg)
With brake 1,500 lb (680 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
Total trailer weight
Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg) 1,400 lb (635 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg) 1,157 lb (525 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
NOTE
Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to Loading cargo on the roof on page 6-10. 11
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Specifications 11-5
BK0223400US.book 6
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701511
Item 2.4 liter models 3.0 liter models

Engine model 4J12 6B31
Engine displacement 144.0 CID (2,360 cm) 182.9 CID (2,998 cm)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-4 60 V-6
Bore 3.46 in (88.0 mm) 3.45 in (87.6 mm)
Stroke 3.82 in (97.0 mm) 3.26 in (82.9 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 188.6 F (87.0 C) 179.6 F (82.0 C)
Spark plugs NGK DILKR6D11G DILKR7C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm) .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6
11
Battery
N01147801310
2.4 liter models 75D23L

3.0 liter models 80D26L
Battery is a 12 volt type.
11-6 Specifications
BK0223400US.book 7
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels

N01147901744
Tire P215/70R16 99H P225/55R18 97H

Size 16 x 6 1/2JJ 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J
Wheel PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
Offset 1.5 in (38 mm)
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)
NOTE
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owners manual.
Capacity
N01148002169 11
Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refer to Fuel selection on page 3-2
(approximate) All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
2.4 liter Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L)
Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (star-
models Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) burst symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
3.0 liter Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L) If these oils are not available, and API classification SN can be
models used.
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Automatic transaxle 8.7 qt (8.2 L) Refer to Automatic transaxle fluid on page 9-11.
Refer to Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.2 qt (6.9 L)
page 9-11.
Specifications 11-7
BK0223400US.book 8
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Transfer oil .50 qt (0.47 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classi-
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
fication GL-5 SAE 80
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant 2.4 liter models 6.3 qt (6.0 L)
{Includes .69 qt Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
(0.65 L) in 3.0 liter models 9.5 qt (9.0 L) Premium or equivalent*
reserve tank}
Washer fluid 4.8 qt (4.5 L)
Refer to the Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
11
*:similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11-8 Specifications
SC00001100-9.fm 9
SC00001100-9.fm 10
BK0223400US.book 1
Alphabetical index
AM/FM radio................................. 7-15 Braking............................................ 6-5
Numerics CD player ...................................... 7-15 Hose .............................................. 9-24
12 V power outlets............................ 5-219 Troubleshooting ............................. 7-49 Pad wear alarm ............................... 5-89
Automatic climate control air conditioner 7-5 Parking brake ................................. 5-53
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-85
Pedal ............................................. 5-89
Automatic transaxle............................ 5-64
Pedal free play................................ 9-21
Fluid ..................................... 9-11, 11-7
A Selector lever operation .................. 5-64
Power brakes.................................. 5-89
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 Service brake.................................. 5-89
Selector lever positions ................... 5-68
Warning lights and buzzer ............. 5-173
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-94 Sports mode................................... 5-68
Break-in recommendations .................... 5-3
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC).......
Bulb capacity...................................... 9-30
5-100 B
Air bag .............................................. 4-33 Back-up light
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-9 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 C
Air conditioner Replacement .................................. 9-36 California Perchlorate Materials
Automatic climate control air conditioner. Ball joint, steering linkage seals, drive shaft Requirements ..................................... 3-7
7-5 boots ............................................... 9-24 Capacities .......................................... 11-7
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Battery .............................................. 9-13 Card holder ............................ 5-219, 5-229
7-14 Charging system warning light ....... 5-174 Cargo area cover............................... 5-233
Air purifier ......................................... 7-15 Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-13 12
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
All-wheel drive operation .................... 5-85 Disconnection and connection ......... 9-14
During cold weather ....................... 9-13 Cargo room light............................... 5-227
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-42 Specification.................................. 11-6 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-15 Bluetooth 2.0 interface .................... 5-192 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Antenna Bottle holders.................................... 5-233 Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
Roof antenna .................................. 7-51 vehicles............................................ 5-88
Brake
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-91 Fluid ..................................... 9-12, 11-7 CD player........................................... 7-15
Arm rest............................................... 4-9 Brake assist........................................ 5-90 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Assist grip ........................................ 5-235 Braking Charging system warning light ........... 5-174
Audio Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-91 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-26
12-1
BK0223400US.book 2
Alphabetical index
Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-36 Disc brake pads................................... 9-24 Serial number................................. 11-2
Cleaning Dome light (front)/Reading lights ....... 5-226 Specification .................................. 11-6
Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-38 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Engine hood ......................................... 9-3
Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-39 Dome light (rear)............................... 5-226 Engine switch..................................... 5-18
Clock................................................. 7-51 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Exhaust system................................... 9-24
Coat hook ........................................ 5-235 Doors
Lock .............................................. 5-33
Consumer information ........................ 10-2
Power door locks ............................ 5-35
F
Continuously variable transmission (CVT).... Floor console box ............................. 5-229
5-71 Driving during cold weather.................. 6-5
Floor mat ............................................. 6-3
Fluid .................................... 9-11, 11-7 Driving precaution ............................... 6-2
Selector lever operation................... 5-72 Fluid
Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2
Selector lever positions ................... 5-75 Automatic transaxle fluid ....... 9-11, 11-7
Sports mode ................................... 5-76 Brake fluid............................ 9-12, 11-7
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-8, 11-7
E Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
ECO mode switch ............................. 5-184 fluid ................................... 9-11, 11-7
Cruise control..................................... 5-96 Engine coolant ........................ 9-8, 11-7
Electric power steering system (EPS) .... 5-93
Cup holder ....................................... 5-232 Engine oil ............................... 9-6, 11-7
Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-190 Rear axle oil.......................... 9-12, 11-7
Transfer oil ........................... 9-12, 11-7
12 D Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-27 Washer fluid ......................... 9-12, 11-7
Daytime running lights
Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-79 Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-7
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-22 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
Engine 5-111
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-190
Compartment................................... 9-5 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door
Coolant ................................... 9-8, 11-7 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-12
windows) .................................. 7-9, 7-13
Hood............................................... 9-3 Front fog lights
Digital clock Malfunction indicator light............. 5-173 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Time setting ................................... 7-47 MIVEC ................................. 5-25, 5-64 Indicators..................................... 5-172
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-6, 11-7 Replacement .................................. 9-35
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-180 Overheating..................................... 8-4 Switch ......................................... 5-184
12-2
BK0223400US.book 3
Alphabetical index
Front side-marker lights Headlight leveling switch ................... 5-182 Interior lights.................................... 5-225
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Headlights
Replacement .................................. 9-33 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 J
Front turn signal light Dimmer........................................ 5-180
Jack ..................................................... 8-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Headlight flasher ........................... 5-181
Storage ............................................ 8-5
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Replacement .......................... 9-32, 9-33
Switch.......................................... 5-177 Jump-starting the engine........................ 8-2
Fuel
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3 High beam indicator .......................... 5-172
Fuel economy................................... 6-2 High-mounted stop light K
Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-23 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Keyless entry system.................... 5-7, 5-29
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Hill start assist ................................... 5-89 Keys .................................................... 5-3
Tank capacity ................................. 11-7
HomeLink Wireless Control System. 5-220
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-16
Fuses ................................................. 9-25
Hood lock release mechanism and safety L
catch ............................................... 9-25 Labeling............................................. 11-2
Fusible links....................................... 9-25
Horn switch ...................................... 5-191 Lane Departure Warning System (LDW) .....
5-116
G I License plate light
General maintenance........................... 9-23
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 12
General vehicle data............................ 11-4 Replacement................................... 9-37
Ignition switch ................................... 5-60
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 Liftgate .............................................. 5-36
Glove compartment........................... 5-229 10-4 Link System ..................................... 5-192
Glove compartment light Indicators .................... 5-154, 5-171, 5-172 Loading information.............................. 6-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32 Lubricants .......................................... 11-7
Information screen display ................. 5-155
Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-55 Luggage floor box............................. 5-230
H Luggage hooks ................................. 5-236
Inspection and maintenance following rough
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-184 road operation .................................. 5-87
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-172 Instrument cluster.............................. 5-126
Head restraints.................................... 4-10
12-3
BK0223400US.book 4
Alphabetical index
Power outlet ..................................... 5-219
M Power windows................................... 5-49 S
MIVEC engine .......................... 5-25, 5-64 Puncture (Tire changing)....................... 8-6 Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4
Modification of your vehicle.................. 3-5 S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...... 5-81
Multi information display - Type 1 ..... 5-128 R Seat belt
Multi information display - Type 2 ..... 5-146 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-23
Radiator cap ........................................ 9-9
Child restraint systems .................... 4-26
Radio ................................................. 7-15 Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
O General information about your radio 7-52 4-22
Octane rating........................................ 3-2 Reading lights Maintenance and inspection............. 4-33
Oil Bulb capacity.................................. 9-32 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-24
Engine oil ...................................... 11-7 Rear axle oil .............................. 9-12, 11-7 Seat belt force limitter..................... 4-26
Rear axle oil................................... 11-7 Seat belt pre-tensioners ................... 4-24
Rear combination lights Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-24
Transfer oil .................................... 11-7 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30
Operation under adverse driving conditions... Replacement................................... 9-35 Seat belts ........................................... 4-17
8-15 Rear side-marker lights Seats.................................................... 4-2
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-57 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 Arm rest .......................................... 4-9
Front seats ....................................... 4-4
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Rear turn signal light
12 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30
Head restraints ............................... 4-10
Heated seat ...................................... 4-8
Replacement................................... 9-35
P Making a cargo area........................ 4-12
Rear-view camera ............................. 5-124 Making a flat seat ........................... 4-16
Parking ................................................ 6-6
Rearview mirror Seat arrangement .............................. 4-3
Parking brake ................................. 5-53
Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-55 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-4
Parking lights Second row seats .............................. 4-8
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-57
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Third row seats............................... 4-10
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-29
Service brake...................................... 5-89
Polishing............................................ 9-41 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-19
Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Power brakes...................................... 5-89 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2
Side turn-signal light
Power liftgate..................................... 5-38 Roof antenna ...................................... 7-51
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
12-4
BK0223400US.book 5
Alphabetical index
Snow tires .......................................... 9-21 Theft-alarm system............................. 5-45 How to connect an iPod................. 5-216
Spark plugs ........................................ 9-23 Time Setting ...................................... 7-47
Starting the engine ..................... 5-24, 5-62 Timing belt ........................................ 9-24 V
Steering Tire ................................................... 9-15 Vanity mirror.................................... 5-218
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment Inflation pressure............................ 9-18 Vanity mirror lights
5-54 Maintenance .................................. 9-19 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-32
Wheel lock............................ 5-23, 5-62 Quality grading .............................. 10-2
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-38
Stop lights Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-19
Rotation ........................................ 9-20 Vehicle dimensions ............................. 11-4
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-35 Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-7 Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Snow tires ..................................... 9-21 Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-4
Storage spaces .................................. 5-228
Tire and loading information placard 11-3
Sun visors ........................................ 5-218 Tire chains..................................... 9-21 Vehicle weights .................................. 11-5
Sunglasses holder ............................. 5-231 To change a tire................................ 8-6 Vents ................................................... 7-2
Sunroof.............................................. 5-51 Tread wear indicator....................... 9-20
Super-all wheel control (S-AWC) Tire pressure monitoring system ......... 5-119 W
S-AWC drive mode display ............. 5-83 Tools................................................... 8-6 Warning lights .................................. 5-173
S-AWC drive mode-selector ............ 5-83 Storage............................................ 8-5
Washer
S-AWC operation display ................ 5-84 Towing.............................................. 8-14 Fluid..................................... 9-12, 11-7 12
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-33 Trailer towing .................................... 6-11 Rear window washer ..................... 5-189
How the Supplemental Restraint System Switch ......................................... 5-188
Transfer oil ................................ 9-12, 11-7
works .......................................... 4-36 Washing............................................. 9-40
Maintenance service........................ 4-49 Turn signal light
Indicators ..................................... 5-172 Waxing .............................................. 9-41
Lever ........................................... 5-183 Weights ............................................. 11-5
T
Wheel
Tail light U Covers ........................................... 8-13
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Specification .................................. 11-7
Replacement .................................. 9-35 USB input terminal............................ 5-215
How to connect a USB memory device .... Wiper
Tank capacity ..................................... 11-7 Rear window wiper ....................... 5-189
5-215
12-5
BK0223400US.book 6
Alphabetical index
Switch ......................................... 5-185
Wiper blades .................................. 9-22
Wiper deicer switch .......................... 5-190
12
12-6
BK0223400US.book 7
MMNA_LastPage.fm 1
How to calculate your gasoline mileage
You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre 3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again,
by using the following process: as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.
4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number
1. Fill your vehicles fuel tank and record the odometer mile- to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide
age. the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of
2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do. gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles-
per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.
Gas mileage record Gas mileage record

Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo- Cost Per Miles Per Gallon/Kilo-
Gallons Gallons
Cost meters Per Litre Cost meters Per Litre
Date Odometer /Litres Gallon Date Odometer /Litres Gallon
This Fill This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome-
This Fill This Fill (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilome-
/Litre ters/Litres) /Litre ters/Litres)

2016 Mitsubishi Outlander 63411 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

2016 Mitsubishi Outlander 63411 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

BK0223400US.

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Forward collision mitigation

Instruments and controls

Hazard warning flasher switch 1

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - air bag

Air conditioner P.7-5 Passengers vents

Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirrors switch P.5-58

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-23 Power window switch

Dome light (rear) P.5-226

Inside rearview mirror P.5-55

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag

Second row seat P.4-8

Dome light (front)/Reading Downlight 1

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain

Assist grips P.5-235

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

Head restraints P.4-10

Arm rest P.4-9

Luggage hooks P.5-236

Luggage floor box P.5-230

Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-51

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Windshield wipers P.5-185

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-57

Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-184, 9-30, 9-35

Halogen headlights type LED headlights type

Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights

Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7, 5-29

Tail lights P.5-177, 9-30, 9-35 Tire P.9-15

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

Stop lights P.5-177, 9-30, 9-35

Rear turn signal lights P.5-183, 9-30, 9-35

Back-up lights P.9-30, 9-36

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

SRS warning light

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while youre driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Will not turn from ACC to OFF or LOCK.

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The windows are fogged up.

Push the defogger switch to change to the position. P. 7-9

The engine does not start.

2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

Steam comes out of the engine